CX20 30 34

CX20, CX30 AND CX34 SERIES
RETAIL SCALES
CX34
CX30 TK
CX9/A702
CX20W
CX30 CX20
76101–452 Issue 2/02.03.95

Contents
Table of Contents:
About This Manual
Amendment Sheet
Abbreviations
Overview
1 Introduction 1–1
1.1 General 1–3
1.1.1 CX20 1–4
1.1.2 CX20 W 1–5
1.1.3 CX30 1–5
1.1.4 CX30 TK 1–6
1.1.5 CX34 1–6
1.2 General Data 1–7
2 General and Technical 2–1
2.1 Mechanical Description 2–3
2.1.1 CX20/CX30 2–3
2.1.2 CX20 W and CX9/A702 2–7
2.1.3 CX34 2–11
2.2 Electrical Description 2–13
2.3 Networking 2–14
2.4 Built–in Test Equipment 2–14
CX20/CX30/CX34 Service Manual i

Contents
3 Disassembly and Assembly 3–1

3.1 Introduction 3–3
3.2 Servicing the CX20/CX30 3–3
3.2.1 Removing the case 3–3
3.2.2 Fitting the case 3–4
3.2.3 Replacing the keyswitch 3–4
3.2.4 Replacing the DCU/remote keyboard connector 3–4
3.2.5 Replacing the LCD (CX20) 3–5
3.2.6 Removing external connector plate 3–6
3.3 Servicing the CX20 W and CX9/A702 3–8
3.3.1 Removing the case (CX20 W) 3–8
3.3.2 Fitting the case (CX20 W) 3–9
3.3.3 Replacing the keyswitch (CX20 W) 3–9
3.3.4 Replacing the DCU/remote keyboard connector (CX20 W) 3–9
3.3.5 Replacing the LCD (CX20 W) 3–10
3.3.6 Removing external connector plate (CX20 W) 3–10
3.4 Servicing the CX34 3–12
3.4.1 Removing the housings 3–12
3.4.2 Fitting the housings 3–13
4 Installation (CX20 W) 4–1
4.2 Installation 4–3
4.2.1 Approvals and stamping 4–4
5 Setting Up Procedures 5–1
5.2 Service mode 5–5
5.2.1 Entering service mode using the SAC number 5–5
5.2.2 Entering service mode using the DIL switch 5–7
5.3 Configuration (Menu Option) 5–7
5.4 Calibration (Menu Option) 5–7
5.5 Clear Memory (Menu Option) 5–8
5.6 Format Memory (Menu Option) 5–9
5.7 Test Weight (Menu Option) 5–10
5.8 Test Diagnostics (Menu Option) 5–10
5.9 SAC Number (Menu Option) 5–11
5.10 Print Density (Menu Option) 5–12
5.11 Label Formats (Menu Option) 5–13
6 Configuration 6–1
6.2 Configuration procedure 6–3
6.2.1 Configuring the machine 6–3
6.2.2 Configuration Option Tables 6–5
ii CX20/CX30/CX34 Service Manual

Contents
7 Calibration and Adjustments 7–1

7.2 Adjustment of Overload Stops (CX20/CX30) 7–3
7.2.1 Adjustment of Asymmetric Overload Stops 7–3
7.3 Adjustment of Overload Stops (CX9/A702) 7–3
7.4 Adjustment of Overload Stops (CX34) 7–3
7.5 Calibration 7–4
8 Testing 8–1
8.2 Date/time Entry (Menu Option) 8–4
8.3 Scale Test (Menu Option) 8–5
8.3.1 Processor test (menu option) 8–6
8.3.2 Static RAM test (menu option) 8–7
8.3.3 ROM test (menu option) 8–8
8.3.4 EEPROM test (menu option) 8–9
8.3.5 Display test (menu option) 8–10
8.3.6 Keyboard test (menu option) 8–11
8.3.7 Comms test (menu option) 8–13
8.3.8 Weighing test (menu option) 8–15
8.4 System Load Test (Menu Option) 8–16
8.4.1 Loading the system 8–16
8.4.2 Measuring on the machine 8–18
9 Label Formats 9–1
9.2 Labels 9–4
9.2.1 Label format 9–4
9.2.2 Label fields 9–5
9.2.3 Label field co–ordinates 9–6
9.2.4 Label start point 9–7
9.2.5 The offset (90 and 180 degree formats only) 9–8
9.2.6 Determining the Start Point of a 90 Degree Format 9–9
9.2.8 Text fonts 9–11
9.2.9 References 9–11
9.3 Creating a New Label Format 9–12
9.3.1 Design 9–12
9.3.2 Determining the label field co–ordinates 9–13
9.3.3 Programming 9–13
9.3.4 Example – creating a new 0 degree label format 9–14
9.4 Edit Format (Menu Option) 9–20
9.5 Clear Format (Menu Option) 9–25
9.6 Copy Format (Menu Option) 9–26
9.7 Print Format (Menu Option) 9–27
CX20/CX30/CX34 Service Manual iii

Contents
10 Error Messages 10–1

10.1 Commodity Display Error Messages 10–3
10.2 TEST REPORT Error Number 10–13
11 Main PCB 11–1
11.1 Description 11–3
11.2 Servicing 11–6
11.2.1 Removing the main PCB (CX20/CX30) 11–6
11.2.2 Fitting the main PCB (CX20/CX30) 11–6
11.2.3 Removing the main PCB (CX20 W) 11–10
11.2.4 Fitting the main PCB (CX20 W) 11–10
11.2.5 Removing the main PCB (CX34) 11–11
11.2.6 Fitting the main PCB (CX34) 11–11
11.2.7 Replacing the main PCB 11–14
12 Display (CX20) 12–1
12.2 Testing 12–4
12.3.1 Removing an integral display PCB 12–5
12.3.2 Fitting an integral display PCB 12–5
12.3.3 Removing a tower mounted display PCB 12–6
12.3.4 Fitting a tower mounted display PCB 12–6
13 Display (CX30/CX34) 13–1
13.2 Testing 13–5
13.3 Configuration Data 13–5
13.4.1 Removing a display PCB (CX30) 13–10
13.4.2 Fitting a display PCB (CX30) 13–10
13.4.3 Removing a display assembly (CX30) 13–11
13.4.4 Fitting a display assembly (CX30) 13–12
14 Keyboard 14–1
14.2 Testing 14–4
14.3.1 Removing a keyboard (CX20/CX30) 14–4
14.3.2 Fitting a keyboard (CX20/CX30) 14–5
14.3.3 Removing a keyboard (CX34) 14–5
14.3.4 Fitting a keyboard (CX34) 14–6
15 CX30 TK Machine 15–1
15.1 General 15–3
iv CX20/CX30/CX34 Service Manual

Contents
15.4 Keyboard Controller PCB 15–4

15.4.1 Circuit description 15–4
15.4.2 Power Supplies 15–4
15.4.3 Links 15–5
15.5.1 Removing the customer keyboard 15–8
15.5.2 Replacing the customer keyboard 15–8
15.5.3 Removing the keyboard controller PCB 15–8
15.5.4 Fitting the keyboard controller PCB 15–9
15.5.5 Removing the keyboard assembly 15–9
15.5.6 Fitting the keyboard assembly 15–9
15.5.7 Removing the switch PCB loom 15–10
15.5.8 Fitting the switch PCB loom 15–10
16 Power Supply Unit 16–1
16.2.1 Gaining access to the power supply unit (CX20/CX30) 16–5
16.2.2 Gaining access to the power supply unit (CX34) 16–6
16.2.3 Replacing a fuse 16–7
17 Transducer 17–1
17.1.1 Transducer Assembly CX20/CX30 17–3
17.1.2 Transducer Assembly CX34 17–4
17.1.3 Suspension Assembly CX34 17–4
17.2 Testing 17–6
17.3 A/D PCB 17–6
17.4.1 Removing the transducer (CX20/CX30) 17–7
17.4.2 Fitting the transducer (CX20/CX30) 17–7
17.4.3 Removing the transducer (CX34) 17–7
17.4.4 Fitting the transducer (CX34) 17–8
18 CX9/A702 Remote Weighing Platform 18–1
18.2 Specifications 18–5
18.3.1 Special Tool (15221) 18–5
18.3.2 Removing a transducer 18–5
18.3.3 Fitting the transducer 18–6
18.3.4 Using the C117 Special Tool 18–8
19 Receipt Printer 19–1
19.2 Test and Adjustment 19–4
19.3.1 Removing the printer (CX20/CX30) 19–4
19.3.2 Fitting the printer (CX20/CX30) 19–5
19.3.3 Removing the printer (CX34) 19–5
CX20/CX30/CX34 Service Manual v

Contents
19.3.4 Fitting the printer (CX34) 19–6

19.3.5 Cleaning the print head 19–6
19.3.6 Changing the print head 19–6
19.3.7 Changing the microswitch 19–7
19.3.8 Disassembling the printer 19–7
19.3.9 Assembling the printer 19–7
20 Label and Receipt Printer 20–1
20.3.6 Changing the take–up motor 20–7
20.3.7 Changing the stepper motor 20–8
20.3.8 Changing the friction roller 20–8
20.3.10 Changing the photodetector 20–10
20.3.11 Changing the printer mechanism 20–10
21 Networking 21–1
21.1.1 Network cabling 21–4
22 Communications Controller 22–1
22.1.1 C918 external comms controller unit 22–4
22.2 Network Connections 22–4
22.2.1 Dual comms controller operation 22–5
22.3 Comms PCB – Main Components 22–6
23 RS232 Interface PCB (CX20 W) 23–1
23.1 General 23–3
23.2 Circuit Description 23–4
23.2.1 RS232 interface 23–4
23.2.2 Wrapper control signal interface 23–4
23.2.3 Wrapper ready signal (control interface version 2 only) 23–4
23.2.4 Scale in control signal (control interface version 2 only) 23–5
23.2.5 Analogue interface 23–5
23.2.6 ”Wrapper Start” relay control 23–5
23.2.7 Label taken detection 23–5
23.2.8 ULMA 200 series wrapper protocol 23–6
23.2.9 Serial interface devices 23–6
23.3.1 Replacing the RS232 interface PCB 23–7
vi CX20/CX30/CX34 Service Manual

Contents
24 Wiring Interconnections 24–1

24.1 CX20/CX30 24–3
24.2 CX20 W 24–8
25 Appendices 25–1
25.1 Configuration Option Tables for Old Software 25–3
25.1.1 Option Tables for Mod.3 Software Release 25–3
25.1.2 Option Tables for Pre–Phase 1.2 Software Release 25–7
25.2 Label Formatting 25–17
25.2.1 Calculating the offset 25–17
25.2.2 Field data tables 25–18
Parts List
List of Figures
Figure 1.1 General View (Integral Displays) 1–4

Figure 1.2 General View (Column–mounted Displays) 1–4
Figure 1.3 General View (CX20 W) 1–5
Figure 1.4 General View (CX30) 1–5
Figure 2.1 Exploded View (CX20) – R Version 2–3
Figure 2.2 Exploded View (CX30) – LS/ECR Version 2–4
Figure 2.3 Scale Base – Plan View (CX20/CX30) 2–6
Figure 2.4 ULMA Wrapping Machines 2–7
Figure 2.5 Exploded View (CX20 W) 2–8
Figure 2.6 Exploded View (CX9/A702) 2–9
Figure 2.7 Scale Base – Plan View (CX20 W) 2–10
Figure 2.8 Exploded View (CX34) 2–11
Figure 3.1 Unit Interior (CX20) – View on Front, Right Corner 3–5
Figure 3.2 External Connector Plate – View from above 3–7
Figure 3.3 External Connector Plate (CX20 W) – View from above 3–11
Figure 5.1 Service Mode Flowchart 5–3
Figure 5.2 Menu in Service Mode 5–4
Figure 8.1 Menu of Test Diagnostics (Service Mode) 8–3
Figure 8.2 Menu of Scale Test 8–5
Figure 8.3 Link Fittings to Echo Plugs (D–type Connectors) 8–13
Figure 9.1 Label Formats Menu 9–3
Figure 9.2 Sample Label and Label Fields – 0 Degree Format 9–5
Figure 9.3 Label Start Points (0, 90 and 180 Degree Labels) 9–7
Figure 9.4 Effect of the Offset (90 Degree Label) 9–8
Figure 9.5 Determining the Start Point (90 Degree Format) 9–9
Figure 9.6 Determining the Start Point (180 Degree Format) 9–10
Figure 9.7 Example of Completed Field Measurements Table 9–18
Figure 9.8 Example of Completed Programmed Data Table 9–19
Figure 9.9 Co–ordinates (Commodity Display) 9–20
Figure 11.1 Main PCB – Electrical Connections 11–4
Figure 11.2 Main PCB – DIL Switches and Potentiometers 11–8
Figure 11.3 Main PCB – Location of Links 11–12
Figure 11.4 Main PCB – Location of Integrated Circuits 11–15
Figure 12.1 Display – FIP Type (CX20) 12–3
CX20/CX30/CX34 Service Manual vii

Contents
Figure 12.2 Display Brackets 12–4

Figure 13.1 Display (CX30) 13–3
Figure 13.2 Display (CX34) 13–4
Figure 13.3 Display PCB (Metric Multi–line) 13–4
Figure 13.4 Display PCB – Switches and LEDs 13–5
Figure 13.5 Display (CX30) – Exploded 13–11
Figure 14.1 Keyboard 14–3
Figure 14.2 Keyboard Earthing Arrangement 14–6
Figure 15.1 Keyboard Controller PCB – Communication Loom Connections 15–5
Figure 15.2 Keyboard Controller PCB – Links 15–6
Figure 15.3 Keyboard Controller PCB – Pin Signals 15–7
Figure 16.1 Power Supply PCB – Component Highlight 16–3
Figure 17.1 Transducer Assembly (CX20/CX30) 17–3
Figure 17.2 Suspension Assembly (CX34) 17–5
Figure 17.3 A/D PCB Connections (component side) 17–6
Figure 18.1 CX9/A702 Remote Weighing Platform 18–3
Figure 18.2 CX9/A702 – Exploded View 18–4
Figure 18.3 Special Tool (15221) 18–5
Figure 18.4 Removing the transducer using the 15221 18–6
Figure 18.5 Fitting the transducer using a 15221 18–7
Figure 18.6 Special Tool (C117) 18–8
Figure 18.7 Using the Special Tool (C117) 18–8
Figure 19.1 Ticket Printer (CX20/CX30) 19–3
Figure 20.1 Label and Receipt Printer (CX20/CX30) 20–3
Figure 21.1 Network Connections 21–3
Figure 21.2 Cable Screen Connection 21–4
Figure 22.1 Network Connections (with Communications Controller) 22–4
Figure 22.2 Comms PCB – Component Highlight 22–6
Figure 22.3 Comms PCB – Links LK1, LK6, LK7 22–8
Figure 22.4 Comms PCB – Switch Settings 22–9
Figure 23.1 RS232 Interface PCB 23–3
Figure 24.1 Connector Pins on Main PCB – PL6, PL8 and PL13 24–3
Figure 24.2 Connector Pins on Main PCB – PL2, PL9, PL12 and PL15 24–4
Figure 24.3 Connector Pins on Main PCB – PL7, PL14, PL17, PL18 and SK1 24–5
Figure 24.4 Connector Pins on Main PCB – PL20, PL19 and PL16 24–6
Figure 24.5 Connector Pins on Main PCB – PL3 24–7
Figure 24.6 PCB Interconnection Diagram (CX20 W) 24–8
Figure 24.7 Connector Pins on RS232 PCB (CX20 W) – PL1, PL2 and PL5 24–9
Figure 24.8 Connector Pins on RS232 PCB (CX20 W) – PL3, PL4, PL7,
PL8, TB1 and TB2 24–10
viii CX20/CX30/CX34 Service Manual

About This Manual
This manual has been prepared to assist in after sales service by providing information on
the installation, maintenance and repair of the equipment.
It is suggested that the Manual is studied carefully and familiarised, particularly the sections
listing major components, test points and adjustment available. The Manual can then be
used as a reference book by referring to the detailed contents page to obtain the
information required.
The Parts List should also be studied and it is recommended that parts are ordered in
advance for stock purposes in order to accommodate future service requirements.
The Manual is not a replacement for training but should be used to supplement training
courses, which take place at our Service Training Centre or, alternatively, within the Service
Regions and Overseas Territories.
Amendments will be issued as necessary. To ensure that your Manual is up to date the
Amendment Record Sheet must be completed as the amendments are made to the
Manual.
For further information on Service or Parts, please contact your nearest Avery Berkel dealer
or contact Avery Berkel Technical Support:
Avery Berkel Technical Support

West Bromwich Road
Tame Bridge
Walsall
West Midlands
WS5 4BD
Tel: 0922 434343

Fax: 0922 616806
NOTE:
This manual remains the property of GEC Avery Limited and must be returned to the Company on
request or if you should leave the Company’s employment.
Copyright , by GEC Avery Limited – Year: 1995 All Rights Reserved Worldwide. No part of this
publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system or translated
into any language or computer language, in any form or by any means electronic, mechanical,
magnetic, optical, chemical, manual or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Avery
Berkel, Sertec House, West Bromwich Road, Tame Bridge, Walsall, West Midlands, WS5 4BD.
CX20/CX30/CX34 Service Manual ix

Amendment Sheet
AMENDMENT DATE AMENDMENT DETAILS
1 1992 Draft 1: originated by sub–contractors (Cheltenham

Technical Publications).
2 Sep. 1992 Draft 2: conversion to Interleaf format and general

update.
3 Feb. 1994 Issue 1: general update to incorporate Phase 1.3

software release.
4 Oct. 1994 Figure 20.4 Comms PCB – Switch Settings on Page

20.10: switch settings for ”SW3: back–up controller
selected” reversed – they were incorrect.
5 Mar. 1995 Issue 2: amendments as per A/A 31167.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
CX20/CX30/CX34 Service Manual xi

Abbreviations
% Per cent LK# Circuit code: link number #

°C Degrees Celsius LS Label (printer)
LSB Least significant bit
A Ampere LSD Least significant digit
A/D Analogue to digital
ASIC Application specific integrated MC Memory controller
circuit MEM Memory
AVR Automatic variable resolution MIN Minimum
mm Millimetre
Comms Communications MSB Most significant bit
MSD Most significant digit
DCU Data collector unit
DIL Dual–in–line (switch) NT Net (weight)
DMM Digital multimeter
DPE Data processing engine OP Operator (mode)
(comms controller PCB)
oz Ounce
DVM Digital voltmeter
PCB Printed circuit board
ECR Electronic cash register
PL# Circuit code: plug number #
EEPROM Electronically, erasible,
(electrical connector)
programmable, read–only
memory PLU Price look up
EPROM Erasible, programmable,
read–only memory R Receipt (printer)
RAM Random access memory
FIP Fluorescent indicator panel RV# Circuit code: variable
FS# Circuit code: fuse number # resistance number #
g Gram SK# Circuit code: socket number #

SMPS Switched–mode power supply
Hz Hertz SSD Static sensitive device
SW# Circuit code: switch number #
I/O In/out
IC# Circuit code: integrated circuit TP# Circuit code: testing point
number # number #
in Inch
ISC Inter–scale communications V Voltage
V# Circuit code: power transistor
kg Kilogram number #
kV Kilovoltage VA Volt–Ampere
Vac Voltage, alternating current
lb Pound (Imperial weight) Vdc Voltage, direct current
LCD Liquid crystal display
LED Light emitting diode W Watts
CX20/CX30/CX34 Service Manual xiii

Overview
SAFETY WARNINGS
Lethal Voltages
This equipment is supplied by a mains voltage which can cause electric shock
injury. Before removing the unit case or the covers of any remote units (for
example: displays, weighing platforms, customer keyboards etc.), disconnect
completely the mains power supply and ensure that it cannot be connected
inadvertently by other persons.
If the unit case or the covers of any remote units have been removed, do not
apply power to the unit unless specifically instructed to do so in these
instructions. When working on live equipment, exercise great care, use
insulated tools and test equipment, and do not work alone.
The capacitors in the power supply unit will hold a charge for a period of up to
six minutes after the power supply is switched off. During this time, do not
touch the unit. Do not attempt to discharge the capacitors by shorting their
terminals.
The power plug must be inserted in a socket outlet provided with a protective
earth contact. The electrical supply at the socket outlet must provide
over–current protection of 5 amperes. The socket outlet must be within easy
reach for isolation of the machine for cleaning and servicing.
Do not clean the machine or any remote units whilst it is switched on. For
cleaning use only a clean cloth moistened with water containing a small
amount of domestic detergent.
CX20/CX30/CX34 Service Manual xv

Overview
SERVICE PRECAUTIONS
General
Before servicing a machine, it is recommended that the machine’s data is backed–up.
Refer to Part 2, Programming Handbook for use on Data Collector Units (DCUs).
Static Sensitive Devices

Almost all electronic integrated circuits, commonly known as ’chips’, are static sensitive
devices (SSDs). They will be destroyed if contaminated with static electricity.
When working with SSDs follow anti–static procedures which include:
the wearing of an anti–static wrist bracelet
making sure that the workbench is covered by a static–discharge mat
avoiding wearing nylon clothes
discharging any anti–static electricity which may be on your person by contacting an

earthed device before handling an SSD.
Keep an SSD in a bag made of an anti–static or conductive material. When shipping an
SSD, cover all the SSD contacts with an anti–static or conductive material (not polythene).
When shipping an assembly which contains SSDs, pack it securely in an anti–static bag.
Handling Procedures
The transducer in the machine or remote weighing platform is not protected against
negative overload. Do not lift the machine or remote weighing platform by the cross
assembly or transducer after the covers have been removed.
When the cross assembly, load stop or transducer are disassembled or otherwise removed,
handle the transducer with care. Do not exert physical force on it and do not attempt to
disassemble its component parts.
The strain pads and wires in the transducer are extremely sensitive. Do not attempt any
maintenance within the transducer and ensure that the strain wires are not damaged by
tools or other objects during maintenance, storage or shipment.
Main PCB
The main PCB has a battery installed on it to maintain memory data. If you are removing
the main PCB from the unit, the battery must be switched off (refer to procedures) to
prevent live parts of the PCB being shorted. Before switching off the battery, if possible, the
data contained in the machine should be backed–up (refer to Part 2, Programming
Handbook for use on the DCU). Although the battery supply is switched off, take great care
not to short the battery terminals during maintenance. After fitting a main PCB the battery
must be switched on.
Print Head
The thermal print head of the printer will be damaged if scratched with sharp objects (such
as a screwdriver or knife blade). When examining or servicing the print head, take care not
to damage it. If the print head requires cleaning, use only the cleaning kit specified in these
procedures.
xvi CX20/CX30/CX34 Service Manual

Overview
C918 External Comms Controller Unit

The details for servicing the C918 are detailed in the following documetation:
C918 Service Safety Information, Part Number 76102–129
C918 User Safety Information, Part Number 76102–130
Any warnings, cautions or notes must be strictly observed.
ORDERING
New Parts
When ordering a new part, make sure that you use the correct part number. Before fitting,
make sure that its part number matches the part number of the part being removed (or is an
approved alternative).
PUBLICATION NOTES
User Handbooks
The engineer is advised to carry a copy of the User Handbooks for reference during
maintenance. The User Handbooks for each machine are divided into seven Parts: Parts 1
and 7 are machine specific and Parts 2 to 6 are common to each machine. The Parts are:
Handbook Part Title of Handbook Machine Specific/Common

Number
Part 1 Operators’ Handbook Machine specific
Part 2 Programming Handbook Common
Part 3 Networks and Operating Modes Common
Part 4 Management Totals Common
Part 5 Help Information Common
Part 6 Label and Barcode Formats Common
Part 7 Quick Reference Guide Machine specific
Fitting Instuctions – Column Mounted TK Keyboard

See Fitting Instructions for the Column Mounted TK Keyboard Kit, Part Number 76102–188.
Notation
In this publication, where a metric value is quoted, Continental notation is used (comma for
decimal separator, space for 000’s separator). Where an Imperial value is quoted, British
notation is used (full point for decimal separator, comma for 000’s separator). Where a
value is quoted which may be either metric or Imperial (such as a period of time or an
electrical value), Continental notation is used.
CX20/CX30/CX34 Service Manual xvii

Overview
THE CX20, CX30 AND CX34 SERIES OF SCALES

The CX20, CX30 and CX34 series of scales comprise the following machines:
Model Description
CX20 ECR Receipt only counter scale with electronic cash register functions;
integral vendor display with integral or column–mounted customer
display
CX20 LS Label and receipt counter scale; integral vendor display with integral
or column–mounted customer display
CX20 LS/ECR Label and receipt counter scale with electronic cash register
functions; integral vendor display with integral or column–mounted
customer display
CX20 R Receipt only counter scale; integral vendor display with integral or
column–mounted customer display
CX20 W Label only printing and indicating machine; used in conjunction with
remote weighing platform (modified CX9/A702) on Automatic Stretch
Wrapping machines
CX30 ECR Receipt only counter scale with electronic cash register functions;
column–mounted displays
CX30 LS Label and receipt counter scale; column–mounted displays
CX30 LS/ECR Label and receipt counter scale with electronic cash register
functions; column–mounted displays
CX30 R Receipt only counter scale; column–mounted displays
CX30 TK The CX30 LS counter scale with column–mounted or remote
customer keyboard (with modifications to the CX30 LS machine on
the column–mounted version)
CX34 R Receipt only hanging scale
CX34 LS Label and receipt hanging scale
CX34 LS/ECR Label and receipt hanging scale with electronic cash register
functions
All references to CX20, unless stated otherwise, apply to all machines in the CX20 range.
This rule also applies to the CX30 and CX34 ranges, accordingly.
xviii CX20/CX30/CX34 Service Manual

Section 1
Introduction
Table of Contents:
1.1 General 1–3
1.1.1 CX20 1–4
1.1.2 CX20 W 1–5
1.1.3 CX30 1–5
1.1.4 CX30 TK 1–6
1.1.5 CX34 1–6
1.2 General Data 1–7
1–1 CX20/CX30/CX34 Service Manual

1 — Introduction
1.1 General
This manual provides service instructions for weighing scales of the CX20,
CX30 and CX34 series.
The units are electronic weighing, price computing and printing machines for
retail use. They are mains powered and can be operated as stand–alone units
or in a network. The units will interface with facilities such as:
cash drawer
data collector unit (DCU)
remote programming keyboard
remote operator’s keyboard
customer self–service keyboard
external printer
There are four main types of machine: receipt only (R); receipt only with cash
register functions (ECR); label and receipt (LS); and label and receipt with cash
register functions (LS/ECR). There are also customer self–service keyboard
(TK) and wrapping machine (W) versions.
Each machine can be programmed to configure the keyboard to suit the goods
and prices of the vendor. The keyboard face can be written on using an erasible
crayon. An audible tone sounds during keyboard operation and for certain
prompts and error messages.
The units, generally, feature a weighplate, keyboard, vendor and customer
displays, keyswitch and printer.
The keyboard has two modes of operation, serving customers and
programming, each having its own overlay.
The vendor and customer displays are at the front and rear of the machine,
respectively. Each comprises a number of display fields and annunciators which
provide information such as, weight, price, tare operation, commodity description
etc.
A keyswitch allows the selection of four modes of operation. There are three
keys used in the keyswitch:
OP key: provides access to OPerator and SUPERVISOR modes
X key: same as OP key; also provides access to System X and Machine X
programming menus
Z key: same as X key; also provides access to System Z and Machine Z
programming menus.
There are two types of printer, receipt(R) and label and receipt (LS). Both
printers are thermal type printers which print receipts and reports on a thermal
paper roll. The label and receipt printer also prints labels on a thermal label roll
and utilises a cassette for loading the paper. A number of these cassettes can
be retained for use, each loaded with different paper. Both printers can print
alpha characters, numeric characters and barcode graphics, when required.
CX20/CX30/CX34 Service Manual 1–3

1 — Introduction
1.1.1 CX20
The CX20 is a counter scale. Supplemental information is presented to the
vendor by a separate liquid crystal display (LCD) which is just below the printer.
Column–mounted displays are available as an alternative.
Figure 1.1 General View (Integral Displays)
Vendor display
Weighplate
Ticket mouth
Customer display
LCD
DCU/external keyboard
Adjustable foot (4) controller
On/Off switch (below edge) Keyswitch
Keyboard
Rating plate
Stamping plate
Spirit level
Figure 1.2 General View (Column–mounted Displays)
Customer display
Vendor display
Columns
Weighplate Blank screen
Ticket mouth
Adjustable foot (4) DCU/external

keyboard controller
On/Off switch (below edge)
Keyswitch
Rating plate Keyboard
Spirit level Stamping plate

1 — Introduction
1.1.2 CX20 W
The CX20 W is an indicating and printing machine. It is used with a remote
weighing platform, a modified CX9/A702, on a range of Automatic Stretch
Wrapping machines. The CX20 W has no weighplate or customer display.
Figure 1.3 General View (CX20 W)
Label taken sensor

Vendor display
Ticket mouth
LCD
Adjustable foot (4) controller
On/Off switch (below edge) Keyswitch
Keyboard
Rating plate Stamping plate
1.1.3 CX30
The CX30 is a counter scale with a head–up display arrangement mounted on
top of twin columns at the rear of the machine.
Figure 1.4 General View (CX30)
Customer display
Vendor display
Weighplate Ticket mouth
Adjustable foot (4) DCU/external

keyboard
connector

Keyswitch
Rating plate
Spirit level Stamping plate Keyboard

1 — Introduction
1.1.4 CX30 TK
The CX30 TK is a customer self–service, counter scale. It is basically an LS
machine but has a large column–mounted or remote keyboard for use by the
customer. The printer door can be locked to prevent unauthorised access.
Figure 1.5 General View (CX30 TK – Column–mounted Version)
Customer display
Vendor display
Customer keyboard
Column
Weighplate
Ticket mouth
Adjustable foot (6)

controller
Keyswitch
Rating plate Keyboard
Spirit level Stamping plate
1.1.5 CX34
The CX34 unit is a hanging scale which is suspended from a customer’s
support. A goods scoop rests in a cradle assembly suspended underneath the
unit.
Figure 1.6 General View (CX34)
Customer support Mains socket

Host/Master and ISC sockets Printer door
Vendor display
Printer door
Keyboard
Printer, ON/OFF switch,
keyswitch and DCU socket
(inside printer compartment)
Ticket mouth
Support bracket
Stainless steel scoop
Cradle assembly

1 — Introduction
1.2 General Data

Subject Description Notes
Power requirement 110–120/220–240 Vac +10/–15%, 50–60 Hz, Power not to
35VA (non–printing), 160VA (printing) exceed 160 VA
(worst case)
5V regulated supply capable of providing CX30 TK
20mA maximum in normal operating
conditions
Scale range See ”Digit 1 – Capacity” in Table 6.1 for scale
ranges
Keyboard (operator Membrane lattice (5 x 14 matrix), 69 key CX20
and programming)
g g) positions
Membrane lattice (9 x 14 matrix), 125 key CX30
positions
Membrane lattice (5 x 16 matrix), 80 key CX34
positions
Keyboard (customer Remote or column–mounted. Comprises CX30 TK
self–service) individual moulded plastic keys: two sizes
available, large and small. Single keyboard:
64 large, 128 small or any combination of
keys. Two keyboards: 64 large keys each.
Display Two integral, four–zone displays (customer CX20
and vendor), and one small, integral LCD
display (vendor). Customer display has option
of being column–mounted.
One integral, four–zone display (vendor), and CX20 W
one small, integral liquid crystal display
(vendor).
Two column–mounted, five–zone displays CX30
(customer and vendor)
Two integral, five–zone displays (customer CX34
and vendor)
Printer Receipt printer optional
Label and receipt printer optional (always
used on CX20 W)

1 — Introduction

Approximate 180 x 425 x 440 mm CX20/CX20 W
dimensions ((height
g x (7.8 x 16.7 x 17.3 in)
id h x d
width h)
depth) 180 x 425 x 440 mm CX20/CX20 W
(7.8 x 16.7 x 17.3 in)
500 x 425 x 440 mm CX20 with
(19.7 x 16.73 x 17.3 in) column–mounted
displays
500 x 425 x 440 mm CX30
(19.7 x 16.7 x 17.3 in)
755 x 425 x 440 mm CX30 TK
(29.7 x 16.7 x 17.3 in)
710 (with scoop) x 400 x 240 mm (28.0 x CX34
15.75 x 9.45 in)
Height of main housing is 330 mm (13.0 in)
Suggested fitting height above floor is 1700
mm (67.0 in)
Warm–up time 40 seconds (typical)
Operating –10_C to +40_C
temperature range
Storage temperature –20_C to +50_C
range
Operating humidity 0% to 95% (non–condensing)
range
Storage humidity 0% to 98% (non–condensing)
range

Section 2
General and Technical
Table of Contents:
2.1.1 CX20/CX30 2–3
2.1.2 CX20 W and CX9/A702 2–7
2.1.3 CX34 2–11
2.4 Built–in Test Equipment 2–14

2 — General and Technical
2.1 Mechanical Description
2.1.1 CX20/CX30
The CX20/CX30 unit is built around a metal chassis to which is attached four
adjustable feet (six on the CX30 TK machine) and a spirit level. A plastic lower
housing fits around the chassis. A plastic case fits over the top of the lower
housing and the interior assemblies. A weighplate is positioned at the top of the
machine.
The keyboard is located at the front of the machine to the left–hand side. On
the CX30 TK the additional customer self–service keyboard is remotely mounted
or fitted to the front of a single head–up display column (there can both on one
machine).
Figure 2.1 Exploded View (CX20) – R Version
Weighplate
Printer door
Screw
Screw, tamper
–proof
Side panel
Ticket mouth
Case
Screw and washer
Cross assembly
A/D PCB support
Special nut Main PCB
A/D PCB
Vendor display
Customer display
Cross protection
Clamp plate
Printer
Transducer
assembly
Printer spine
External connector
plate assembly Screw
LCD
Power supply unit
Screw (shrouded)

The printer is located in a housing on the right–hand side of the machine,

accessible through a removable drop–down door (lockable on the CX30 TK). It
dispenses printed tickets through a ticket slot at the front.
The CX20 unit has two 20–character, vacuum–fluorescent, numeric displays,
one on the vendor side of the unit and one on the customer side. These
displays present numeric and annunciator information only. A small liquid crystal
display (LCD), capable of presenting alpha and numeric information (16 digits),
is positioned below the ticket slot to provide the operator with prompts and error
messages.
The CX30 unit has a head–up display assembly. This comprises two
alpha–numeric displays mounted on top of a double column at the customer
side of the unit. The head–up display presents information to the customer and
vendor by way of two display screens. Operator prompt information and error
messages are presented only on the vendor side of the display assembly. The
CX30 does not have an LCD.
Figure 2.2 Exploded View (CX30) – LS/ECR Version
Weighplate
Printer door
Case
Tamper–proof screw
Side panel
Ticket mouth
Screw and washer
Cross assembly
Clamp
Cassette (label and
receipt printer only)
Customer display
Vendor display Cross protection plate
Main PCB
Printer
A/D PCB
Transducer Printer spine
External connector plate Power supply unit (shrouded)

A transducer is mounted on the chassis. On top of this is positioned a four–arm,

cross assembly. The weighplate has four spigots on its lower surface, each of
which sits in a cross rubber at the end of each arm of the cross assembly. A
load placed on the weighplate is, therefore, transferred evenly through the cross
assembly to the transducer. The transducer physically distorts under the
influence of a load, and this distortion is detected by the strain–wires attached
inside the transducer.
Overload protection of the transducer is provided by an adjustable grub screw
fitted to the transducer mounting bracket directly underneath the transducer,
below the centre of the cross assembly. Additional adjustable bolts are provided
below the extreme end of each arm of the cross assembly to prevent
asymmetrically–placed loads from overloading the transducer. There are no
mechanical stops to prevent the occurrence of an excess negative load.
A printed circuit board (PCB) containing the power supply components is
attached to the chassis: the power supply is a switch mode power supply
(SMPS). This assembly is covered by a metal shroud fabricated from sheet
aluminium. The shroud is ventilated by a series of slots around the upper area
of its sides.
A main PCB containing the majority of the electronic components of the unit is
positioned over the chassis and below the cross assembly. A rectangular hole
near the middle of the main PCB provides clearance for the transducer
mounting block onto which the cross assembly is secured.
The main PCB is positioned above the chassis on four pillars, one at each
corner: two pillars are attached to the chassis and two to the printer spine. Two
clamps, each spanning two pillars and held in position by two special nuts,
clamp the main PCB to the top of the pillars. The top surface of the pillars is
where the adjustable bolts are installed which act as asymmetric overload stops
for the transducer.
A secondary PCB, the analogue–to–digital converter (A/D PCB), is installed on
the component side (underside) of the main PCB. This is located by four plastic
pillar clips spanning between the A/D PCB and the main PCB, and by the
electrical plug interface.
A communications controller (comms) PCB is available as an optional addition
and is fitted on the component side of the main PCB. This is located by four
plastic pillar clips and is connected to the main PCB by a flying ribbon cable
from the comms PCB.
For descriptions of the transducer, keyboard, displays, printers, main PCB and
comms PCB, refer to the appropriate sections in this manual.

Figure 2.3 Scale Base – Plan View (CX20/CX30)
Transducer assembly Tunnel to

head–up display Printer spine with
Support (for cross corner stops
main PCB) (2 – off)
External connector plate Chassis
REAR
Cash
drawer Cross
connector protection
plate
ISC connector
Motor gearbox
Host/Master (for label backing
connector paper)
Mains On/Off
switch
Mains connector/ Printer stepper
filter motor
Primary earth
Fuse holder
Earth bracket LCD cradle
FRONT
Spirit level
Power supply
unit (shrouded)
Lower housing Connector for DCU and
(plastic) remote keyboard
Support pillars and cross Keyswitch
corner stops (2 – off)

2.1.2 CX20 W and CX9/A702

The CX20 W and CX9/A702 machines are used in conjunction with ULMA
Automatic Stretch Wrapping machines. Together they provide indicating,
printing and weighing functions and are an integral part of the wrapping
equipment. They can also be used on other manufacturers stretch wrapping
machines.
Figure 2.4 ULMA Wrapping Machines
The CX20 W is an indicating and printing machine. It provides an RS232 output

for communication with the wrapping machine and generates the wrapper
program number.
The CX20 W is a modified version of a CX20 LS in which the transducer
assembly, cross assembly, weighplate and customer display have been
removed. Added to it are an RS232 interface PCB, a photocell detector and
three output connectors. In place of the customer display is a metal plate.
The RS232 interface PCB is fitted over six pillars screwed in to the base of the
CX20 W, adjacent to the power supply. It is secured to the top of the pillars with
six screws with integral shakeproof washers.
The photocell is fitted to a bracket, attached to the printer spine. The head of
the photocell is positioned just in front and above the print head (where the
paper roll exits the printer).
An output for connection to the remote transducer (CX9/A702) is fitted to the
connector plate assembly towards the rear of the machine. Two outputs for
connection to wrapping machines are fitted to an output plate. This plate is
fitted above a cut-out in the base adjacent to the RS232 PCB, towards the rear
of the of the machine.

Figure 2.5 Exploded View (CX20 W)
Printer door
Tamper–proof screw
Case
Case securing screw
Side panel
Ticket mouth
A/D PCB support

Special nut Housing
support Display bracket
bracket
Main PCB Display
Cassette
Plate Cross
protection
plate
A/D PCB
RS232 interface PCB

Label taken
sensor
Printer spine
Printer
LCD display
External connector
plate assembly
Power supply unit (shrouded)
Connector plate assembly
The CX9/A702 is a remote weighing platform connected to the CX20 W. It has

been modified by removing all electrical components and leaving only the
transducer assembly, cross assembly, weighplate and transducer cable
termination. See Section 18 for details.
For descriptions of the transducer, keyboard, displays, printers, main PCB and
comms PCB, refer to the appropriate sections of this manual.

Figure 2.6 Exploded View (CX9/A702)
Weighplate
Instrument screw
Top cover
Cross
Cross rubber
Transducer retainer
Transducer assembly
Blanking panel
Base
Spirit level Levelling foot

Figure 2.7 Scale Base – Plan View (CX20 W)
Wrapper interface Printer spine (label printer)

RS232 PCB connector and corner stops
RS232 wrapper Output connector
Chassis interface connector plate
Transducer REAR
cable output Cross
connector protection
plate
ISC connector
Host/Master Motor gearbox

connector (for backing
paper)
Unit On/Off switch
Mains connector/ Printer stepper

filter motor
Primary earth
Printer
Fuse holder
Photocell
External connector
plate with earth stud LCD cradle
FRONT
LCD display
Power supply
unit (shrouded)
Lower housing Connector for DCU and
(plastic) remote keyboard
Support pillars and cross Keyswitch
corner stops (4 – off)

2.1.3 CX34
The CX34 unit is built around a mild steel chassis which is suspended from a
customer support via a fixing assembly. Fitted to the front (vendor side) and
rear (customer side) of the chassis are moulded plastic housings which enclose
all the unit’s major components Projecting from the underside of the unit is a
bracket which supports the cradle assembly and scoop that hangs directly
underneath.
The front housing houses a printer, suspension assembly, power supply unit and
vendor display PCB. There is a rectangular aperture at the front of the housing
over which is fitted a vendor display screen; below this is a a keyboard. Another
aperture, underneath the front housing at the right–hand side, allows printer
tickets to exit the unit; a black plastic moulding insert with cut-out is fitted over
the aperture.
Figure 2.8 Exploded View (CX34)
Transducer Support fixing

assembly
Rear housing Printer spine
Printer cassette
Printer door
Customer
display
Front housing
Customer
display
PCB
Comms PCB
Main PCB
Power supply
cover
Chassis
Vendor display
Suspension
assembly
Keyboard
Bracket
Cradle assembly Printer assembly

The rear housing houses a main PCB, A/D PCB and customer display PCB. A
customer display screen is fitted externally towards the bottom of the rear
housing.
The printer assembly is fitted to both sides of a vertical printer spine which is
fitted to the chassis towards the right–hand side of the unit. A bracket, fitted to
the front of the printer spine, along with the chassis, printer door and printer
spine itself, form a printer compartment at the right–hand side of the unit. In this
compartment are: print head assembly, paper sensor and cassette locating bars
(label machines only), mains ON/OFF switch, operator keyswitch and DCU
connector. On the left–hand side of the spine are fitted the printer drive motors.
The printer door is held shut by magnets.
The suspension assembly, which incorporates the transducer assembly,
supports the cradle assembly and scoop. The top of the suspension assembly
(mounting boss) is secured to the top of the chassis. The bottom of the
assembly protrudes through a hole in the base of the unit; the cradle assembly
hooks over this.
The power supply PCB is fitted to four pillars attached to the left–hand side of
the chassis. It is secured with two screws (adjacent to left–hand side of unit)
and two hexagonal support pillars. An aluminium RFI cover (complete with
warning label) fits over the PCB and is secured to the two hexagonal pillars. It
has slits in its sides for ventilation and slots and cut-outs in its bottom edges for
cables and looms. Cables are protected by rubber rings when passing through
the slits in the aluminium cover and chassis.
The vendor display PCB is fitted over the aperture inside the front housing. It is
fixed to two narrow vertical brackets which, in turn, are fitted to four pillars (two
per bracket) which support it proud of housing.
The keyboard, which has 80 keys, is fitted to the outside of the front housing in
a specially moulded recess just below the display aperture. An operator’s
overlay is adhered to the front of the keyboard; in front of this is a transparent
sheet held in position by two rubber strips above and below the keyboard. The
transparent sheet protects the overlay and also holds in position a programming
overlay (supplied loose) as it is only fixed to the keyboard along its bottom edge.
The main PCB is fitted to the back of the chassis on four pillars, component side
outermost. A rectangular hole in the PCB allows looms to be passed through to
the other side of the unit, via a circular hole in the chassis. The main PCB has
four pillars on the component side for securing the A/D PCB; each pillar has an
internal, flexible barb for locking the A/D PCB in place.
The A/D PCB is fitted towards the top of the main PCB. It clips into a connector
on the main PCB and is held in place by the four pillars.
The customer display PCB is fitted to the inside of the rear housing. Its fixing is
similar to that of the vendor display PCB.
At the top of the unit, moulded into the front and rear housings, is a raised
section which is approximately 50 mm proud of the main unit. Cut–outs in the
top of the section allow the mounting boss to pass through it and give access to
the ISC and Host/Master connectors and mains input socket which are fitted to
the top of the chassis.

2.2 Electrical Description

The unit is powered by a mains electricity supply, which is transformed, rectified
and smoothed by a power supply unit. The power supply unit distributes the
derived power supplies to the main PCB through a cable loom terminated by a
multi–pin plug. Any external power supply requirements (such as when
powering an external data network) are provided by a connection from the
main PCB. When fitted, the comms PCB also provides a local power supply for
the network.
The transducer is a strain–wire type connected through a local PCB on the
transducer to the A/D PCB. The A/D PCB converts analogue data received
from the strain–wires into digital form. The resistance of the strain–wires
changes according to the strain placed upon them (caused by physical distortion
of the transducer shell), and this change of resistance is detected by the A/D
PCB. The A/D PCB generates a digital equivalent of the analogue input for use
by calculation circuitry on the main PCB.
The main PCB derives a calculation of the load weight, by reference to firmware
which determines the units of measure (Imperial, metric, or other according to
customer choice). The load weight data is passed to the display driver and to
the microprocessor. The load weight is displayed on both customer and vendor
displays.
The main PCB scans the keyboard for input. If a Price Look Up (PLU) is
entered, the microprocessor acquires the price per weight data from memory
(which is backed–up by a battery on the main PCB). The PLU data, which
includes price per weight and goods description, is passed to the display driver
and to the microprocessor. The price per weight or item price data and the
goods description is displayed on both customer and vendor displays (LCD on
vendor side – CX20 only).
The microprocessor calculates the load price by reference to the load weight
and PLU data, and passes the load price to the display driver. The
microprocessor also passes operator–prompt information to the display driver.
On the CX20, the display driver displays the load price on both customer and
vendor displays, and also displays operator–prompt information in
alpha–numeric form on the LCD. On the CX30 and CX34, the display driver
transmits both the load price and operator–prompt information to both customer
and vendor displays. It also passes a discrete signal within the display data
which is interpreted by the customer display to suppress operator prompt data
from that display.
The microprocessor waits for the transaction to be accepted, modified, or
cancelled: this is signalled to the microprocessor by further keyboard input or
can be automatic. Assuming that the transaction is accepted, the
microprocessor logs the transaction to a cumulative table of transactions. It
then transmits a selection of data to the printer driver which is situated on the
main PCB.
The printer driver, on receiving transaction data from the microprocessor,
translates the data by reference to firmware stored on the main PCB. The
firmware formats a printable entry, to include character–composition and page
size data, and transmits the formatted data to the printer assembly.
In label mode, when transaction has been accepted (automatic or keyboard
input), the printer prints a label and then advances the label roll ready for the
next label operation: transaction is complete.

In receipt mode, when transaction has been accepted (keyboard input), the
microprocessor sums all the component transactions and transmits the result for
display. This procedure continues for each transaction until the end of sale,
then the microprocessor drives the printer to print the totals and transmits the
results for display. When the operation is complete and the printer has finished,
the microprocessor drives it to advance the ticket roll; this enables the ticket to
be torn off by the operator and issued as an itemized receipt.
The unit includes a variety of connectors enabling connection to various external
or network functions.
Details of unit operation are contained in the User Handbooks applicable to the
unit. See Overview section for more details.
2.3 Networking
Refer to Section 21.
Each unit is capable of being networked as either a MASTER or a SLAVE unit.
2.4 Built–in Test Equipment

The unit includes diagnostic software written in the EPROM firmware. This can
be accessed for maintenance use by the setting of a DIL switch. The diagnostic
software contains a number of diagnostic routines which the engineer can
choose to run (refer to Section 8). Program progress and results are displayed
on the unit displays. The unit also will display error messages generated from
firmware in response to certain conditions of operator error or equipment failure:
the list of error messages is shown in Section 10.

Section 3
Disassembly and
Assembly
Table of Contents:
3.2 Servicing the CX20/CX30 3–3
3.2.1 Removing the case 3–3
3.2.2 Fitting the case 3–4
3.2.3 Replacing the keyswitch 3–4
3.2.4 Replacing the DCU/remote keyboard connector 3–4
3.2.5 Replacing the LCD (CX20) 3–5
3.2.6 Removing external connector plate 3–6
3.3 Servicing the CX20 W and CX9/A702 3–8
3.3.1 Removing the case (CX20 W) 3–8
3.3.2 Fitting the case (CX20 W) 3–9
3.3.3 Replacing the keyswitch (CX20 W) 3–9
3.3.4 Replacing the DCU/remote keyboard connector (CX20 W) 3–9
3.3.5 Replacing the LCD (CX20 W) 3–10
3.3.6 Removing external connector plate (CX20 W) 3–10
3.4 Servicing the CX34 3–12
3.4.1 Removing the housings 3–12
3.4.2 Fitting the housings 3–13

3 — Disassembly and Assembly
3.1 Introduction
Before proceeding to service the machines please read the Safety Warnings in
the Overview section (Page xv).
3.2 Servicing the CX20/CX30
WARNING
HIGH VOLTAGES EXIST INSIDE THE UNIT. BEFORE

REMOVING THE COVER, ENSURE THAT MAINS POWER
IS DISCONNECTED COMPLETELY. EXCEPT WHERE
SPECIFIED IN THESE PROCEDURES, DO NOT APPLY
POWER TO THE UNIT WHEN THE COVER IS REMOVED.
Refer to Figures 2.1 and 2.2.
3.2.1 Removing the case

To remove the case of the CX20/CX30 and gain general access to the unit
interior, proceed as follows:
1 Switch off machine and isolate from the mains power supply. Refer to
Safety Warnings on Page xv in Overview section.
2 Remove weighplate plate (lift).
3 Remove ticket mouth (unclip and lift off).
4 Remove Posidrive screw from within ticket aperture.
5 Open printer door. (Door may be removed by unclipping it from the two
hinge clips: open printer door to a horizontal position and push down
firmly on the printer door near the hinge clips.)
6 Release case by removing two Posidrive screws in underside of

machine, located towards the left–hand side at the front (vendor) edge.
7 Release case by unclipping it from four snap–fit locations at rear

(customer) edge. Lift case a short distance from rear, then detach it
from the three locations at the front edge.
8 Carefully rotate case about front edge, so that rear edge is lifted over
unit and to front, and so that case is upside down: avoid straining any
electrical connections between case and unit.
9 Remove blank plate at left side of machine.
10 Disconnect flying connector for keyboard.
11 Disconnect case earth strap by removing its spade connection at

chassis secondary earth.

3.2.2 Fitting the case

To fit case of the CX20/CX30 and close up the unit, proceed as follows:
1 Connect case earth strap by attaching its spade connection at chassis
secondary earth.
2 Connect flying connector for keyboard.
3 Carefully rotate case about the front edge, so that rear edge is lifted
over machine and to rear. Check to ensure that wires are not trapped
by this action.
4 Position blank plate at left side of machine and settle case into position.
5 Fit case by locating front edge to location tongues on lower housing,
and then pressing rear edge down to secure (snap–fit).
6 Close printer door. (Refit, if removed, by aligning hinges with underside
of the two clips and pushing up until hinges click into position.)
7 Secure case by fitting two Posidrive screws in the underside of the
machine.
8 Secure case by fitting the Posidrive screw in the base of the ticket
aperture.
9 Fit ticket mouth over ticket aperture and clip in to position.
10 Fit tamper–proof screws to secure cover at top.
11 Fit weighplate (press fit).
3.2.3 Replacing the keyswitch

To change the keyswitch, at the front of the unit, proceed as follows:
1 Remove case (refer to Section 3.2.1).
2 Disconnect electrical connector from rear of keyswitch.
3 Remove keyswitch by removing two Posidrive screws.
4 Fit new item in reverse order and fit case (refer to Section 3.2.2).
3.2.4 Replacing the DCU/remote keyboard connector

To change the DCU/remote keyboard connector, at the front of the unit adjacent
to the keyswitch, proceed as follows:
2 Remove main PCB (refer to Section 11.2.1).
3 Disconnect the keyswitch/DCU/LCD loom from the keyswitch. CX20
only: disconnect loom from the LCD; if necessary, detach LCD from
cradle (pull out). CX30 only: detach LCD connector end of
keyswitch/DCU/LCD loom from base.
4 Detach DCU/remote keyboard connector from the keyswitch/DCU plate
by removing the two screws from the front of the machine.

5 Detach the printer spine by undoing the two screws in the machine’s
base.
6 Cut the cable tie attaching the keyswitch/DCU/LCD loom and the power
supply PCB output cables to the shroud covering the power supply
PCB, noting its position.
7 Remove the DCU/remote keyboard connector and loom assembly

noting the routing of the loom.
8 Fit new item in the reverse order and fit main PCB (refer to
Section 11.2.2) and case (refer to Section 3.2.2).
3.2.5 Replacing the LCD (CX20)

Refer to Figure 3.1.
To change the LCD, proceed as follows:
2 Detach LCD from clips in LCD cradle (pull out).
3 Disconnect LCD from wiring harness.
4 If necessary, remove LCD cradle from unit (pull out).
5 Reassemble in reverse order and fit case (refer to Section 3.2.2).
Figure 3.1 Unit Interior (CX20) – View on Front, Right Corner
LCD
LCD cradle
Looms
DCU/remote keyboard
connector
Securing screw for DCU/remote
keyboard connector
Key
Keyswitch
Mounting plate
Securing screw

3.2.6 Removing external connector plate

To remove and disassemble external connector plate, proceed as follows:
1 Disconnect mains supply.
3 Access is improved if main PCB is detached and if shroud of power

supply unit is removed. It is not necessary to perform this work but, if
desired, refer to Sections 11 (main PCB) and 16 (power supply unit).
4 It is possible to remove all components of external connector plate

without removing connector plate. If removal of plate is desired,
carefully apply firm, sideways pressure on connector plate by grasping
with hand between adjacent case and top of mains connector/filter.
While pressure is applied, push back three integral clips retaining
connector plate to case (beginning with clip adjacent to filter unit) and
detach connector plate.
5 To remove fuse holder, make note of connections at rear of fuse holder

and disconnect. Remove fuse holder by removing integral nut and
washer at rear of fuse holder.
6 To remove mains connector/filter, make note of and disconnect spade

connections to mains connector/filter. Also, disconnect attached earth
lead at adjacent earth stud on chassis by temporarily removing nut from
earth stud. Remove mains connector/filter by removing two sets of
screws, nuts, shakeproof washers and plain washers.
7 To remove Off/On switch, make note of connections at rear of switch

and disconnect. Remove switch by pressing four integral clips inwards
at rear of switch, and pushing switch downwards through connector
plate.
8 To remove either or both 9–way electrical connectors, note that red

tracer in ribbon cable(s) is to rear of unit, then remove electrical
connector(s) by removing two (four) pillar nuts from undersurface of
connector plate.
9 To remove 3–pole cash drawer connector, note orientation of connector

(keyway to extreme left of unit) and remove connector by removing
castellated nut at rear of connector.
10 Items are fitted in reverse order (see above).
11 If applicable, fit shroud covering power supply PCB (refer to

Section 16).
12 If applicable, fit main PCB (refer to Section 11).
13 Fit case (refer to Section 3.2.2).

Figure 3.2 External Connector Plate – View from above
REAR OF UNIT
Cash drawer
connector
ISC connector
WHITE
BLACK
RED
BROWN (TO CONNECTOR: PLUGS

BROWN INTO SK1 ON POWER SUPPLY PCB)
Host/Master
connector BLUE (TO CONNECTOR: PLUGS
INTO SK1 ON POWER SUPPLY PCB)
Mains On/Off switch BLUE
EARTH BRAID (TO CHASSIS
PRIMARY EARTH)
Mains connector/filter Ferrite ring
BOTH GREEN (WHEN FITTED, THEY
Fuse holder ARE CONNECTED TO POWER INPUT
BROWN
LOOM: PLUGS INTO PL8 ON MAIN PCB
– REFER TO SERVICE INFORMATION
External connector CIRCULAR 358)
plate EARTH BRAID (TO CHASSIS PRIMARY
EARTH)
Earth connections GREEN (TO KEYBOARD LOOM CONNECTOR:
PLUGS INTO PL4 ON MAIN PCB)
GREEN WITH YELLOW STRIPE (TO EARTH

STUD ON KEYSWITCH/DCU PLATE)
EARTH BRAID (TO COVER, BEHIND
KEYBOARD)

3.3 Servicing the CX20 W and CX9/A702
WARNING


For servicing of the CX9/A702 see Section 18.
3.3.1 Removing the case (CX20 W)

To remove the case of the CX20 W and gain general access to the unit interior,
proceed as follows:
2 Remove ticket mouth (unclip and lift off).
3 Remove Posidrive screw from within ticket aperture.
4 Open printer door. (Door may be removed by unclipping it from the two
hinge clips: open printer door to a horizontal position and push down
firmly on the printer door, near the hinge clips.)
5 If fitted, remove printer cassette by lifting up print head release lever
and easing out cassette.
6 Remove two Posidrive screws in underside of machine, located towards
the left–hand side at the front (vendor) edge.
7 Remove the four tamper–proof screws and washers from the top of the
case.
8 Release case by unclipping it from four snap–fit locations at rear
(customer) edge. Lift case a short distance from rear, then detach it
from the three locations at the front edge.
9 Carefully rotate case about front edge, so that rear edge is lifted over
unit and to front, and so that case is upside down: avoid straining any
electrical connections between case and unit.
10 Remove blank plate at left side of machine.
11 Disconnect flying connector for keyboard.
12 Disconnect case earth strap by removing its spade connection at
chassis secondary earth.

3.3.2 Fitting the case (CX20 W)

To fit case of the CX20 W and close up the unit, proceed as follows:
1 Connect case earth strap by attaching its spade connection at chassis
secondary earth.
2 Connect flying connector for keyboard.
3 Carefully rotate case about the front edge, so that rear edge is lifted
over machine and to rear. Check to ensure that wires are not trapped
by this action.
4 Position blank plate at left side of machine and settle case into position.
5 Fit case by locating front edge to location tongues on lower housing,
and then pressing rear edge down to secure (snap–fit).
6 Close printer door. (Refit, if removed, by aligning hinges with underside
of the two clips and pushing up until hinges click into position.)
7 Secure case by fitting two Posidrive screws in the underside of the
machine.
8 Fit ticket mouth (press fit).
9 Fit tamper–proof screws to secure cover at top.
3.3.3 Replacing the keyswitch (CX20 W)

To change the keyswitch, at the front of the unit, proceed as follows:
2 Disconnect electrical connector from rear of keyswitch.
3 Remove keyswitch by removing two Posidrive screws.
4 Fit new item in reverse order and fit case (refer to Section 3.3.2).
3.3.4 Replacing the DCU/remote keyboard connector

(CX20 W)
To change the DCU/remote keyboard connector, at the front of the unit adjacent
to the keyswitch, proceed as follows:
2 Remove main PCB (refer to Section 11.2.1).
3 Disconnect the keyswitch/DCU/LCD/RS232 loom from: the keyswitch;
the LCD display (detach LCD from cradle by easing up from bottom
edge): and the RS232 PCB.
4 Detach DCU/remote keyboard connector from the keyswitch/DCU plate
by removing the two screws from the front of the machine (either side of
the D–type connector).
5 Remove the DCU/remote keyboard connector and loom assembly
noting the routing of the loom.
6 Fit new item in the reverse order, then fit main PCB (refer to Section
11.2.2) and case (refer to Section 3.3.2).

3.3.5 Replacing the LCD (CX20 W)

To change the LCD, proceed as follows:
2 Detach LCD from clips in LCD cradle (pull out).
3 Disconnect LCD from wiring harness.
4 If necessary, remove LCD cradle from unit (pull out).
5 Reassemble in reverse order and fit case (refer to Section 3.3.2).
3.3.6 Removing external connector plate (CX20 W)

To remove and disassemble external connector plate, proceed as follows:
3 Access is improved if main PCB is detached and if shroud of power
supply unit is removed. It is not necessary to perform this work but, if
desired, refer to Sections 11 (main PCB) and 16 (power supply unit).
4 It is possible to remove all components of external connector plate
without removing connector plate. If removal of plate is desired refer to
Section 3.2.6. Refer to this section also for removal of fuseholder,
mains connector/filter, mains On/Off switch and the 9–way electrical
connectors.
5 To remove the 5–pin DIN connector at end of plate: disconnect the
cable (four leads) from terminal block TB2 on the RS232 PCB and the
earth lead from the primary earth in base (refer to Figure 2.7); unscrew
connector’s locking ring and remove the connector and cable assembly
by pulling out from the underside of machine.
6 Items are fitted in reverse order (see above).
7 If applicable, fit shroud covering power supply PCB (refer to
Section 16).
8 If applicable, fit main PCB (refer to Section 11).
9 Fit case (refer to Section 3.3.2).

Figure 3.3 External Connector Plate (CX20 W) – View from above
REAR OF UNIT
Transducer TO RS232 INTERFACE
PCB (TERMINAL TB2)
interface connector
ISC connector
BLUE
YELLOW
EARTH (TO CHASSIS
RED PRIMARY EARTH)
GREEN
BROWN (TO CONNECTOR: PLUGS

BROWN INTO SK1 ON POWER SUPPLY PCB)
Host/Master
connector BLUE (TO CONNECTOR: PLUGS
INTO SK1 ON POWER SUPPLY PCB)
Mains On/Off switch BLUE
EARTH BRAID (TO CHASSIS
PRIMARY EARTH)
Mains connector/filter Ferrite ring
BOTH GREEN (WHEN FITTED, THEY
ARE CONNECTED TO POWER INPUT
Fuse holder
BROWN LOOM: PLUGS INTO PL8 ON MAIN PCB
– REFER TO SERVICE INFORMATION
CIRCULAR 358)
External connector
plate EARTH LEAD (TO REAR DISPLAY
BLANKING PLATE)
Earth connections EARTH BRAID (TO CHASSIS PRIMARY
EARTH)
GREEN (TO KEYBOARD LOOM CONNECTOR:

PLUGS INTO PL4 ON MAIN PCB)
GREEN WITH YELLOW STRIPE (TO EARTH

STUD ON KEYSWITCH/DCU PLATE)
EARTH BRAID (TO COVER, BEHIND
KEYBOARD)

3.4 Servicing the CX34
WARNING

WARNING
WHEN LIFTING, MOVING OR SUPPORTING THE

MACHINE TAKE ITS WEIGHT INTO CONSIDERATION.
3.4.1 Removing the housings

To remove the front and rear housings of the CX34 and gain general access to
the unit interior, proceed as follows:
2 Remove the cradle assembly (complete with scoop) by unhooking it
from the support bracket underneath the machine.
3 Disconnect machine from customer’s support assembly and carefully
place it on its rear (customer side), on a flat, clean surface. Don’t
forget: when moving or supporting the machine, take its weight into
consideration.
4 Remove black plastic moulding from support bracket aperture in
underside of machine, by removing the two screws.
5 In rear housing, where rims of front and rear housings overlap, remove:
three Posidrive screws (two in underside and one top left–hand side)
and one countersunk socket screw (top right–hand side).
6 Remove the two screws in the top of machine, front and back of
mounting boss.
7 Open printer door and remove printer cassette by releasing the print
head release lever and pulling it out.
8 Remove printer tear edge from ticket mouth (bottom right–hand side of
machine) by removing the slotted screw.
9 Remove the two countersunk screws from rim of front housing, at the
top. These may be hidden by the rim of the rear housing, so you may
have to lift up the rear housing to gain access to them.

10 Remove front housing: lift up front housing (being careful not to strain
the electrical connections) and disconnect looms from the vendor
display PCB and keyboard (intermediate connection). Disconnect the
keyboard earth braid from the power supply unit cover by removing the
screw and shakeproof washer: the earth lead connected to
keyboard/main PCB loom is also freed.
11 Detach rear display housing from chassis by carefully lifting out chassis
(being careful not to strain electrical connections) and disconnect the
loom from the customer display PCB (inside the rear housing).
Remove any sub–assemblies as required (refer to appropriate sections).
NOTE: It is advisable, when servicing a component fitted to the chassis, that

the chassis be seated in either the front or rear housing, depending
on which side the component is fitted. However, it may be easier to
refit the chassis (after removing housings) to the customer fixing and
service the unit in its hanging position.
3.4.2 Fitting the housings

To fit the front and rear housings of the CX34 and close up the unit, proceed as
follows:
1 Fit any sub–assemblies previously removed and ensure chassis is
resting on its rear or is seated in the rear housing on a clean, flat
surface.
2 Connect free connectors of keyboard looms from front and rear
housings.
3 Connect the keyboard earth braid to the power supply unit cover, along
with the earth cable (connected to main PCB end of the keyboard
ribbon loom) using the screw and shakeproof washer.
4 Lift up chassis, carefully turn it upside down and lower it into the front
housing, being careful not to strain or trap any electrical cables.
5 Secure top of chassis to front housing using the two countersunk
screws (through the two countersunk holes in rim of front housing).
6 Connect display loom to customer display PCB in rear housing.
7 Fit rear display housing in position over front housing and secure using
the three Posidrive screws and then the countersunk socket screw (top
right–hand side) through rim of rear housing. Screw in the two screws
adjacent to the mounting boss in top of the unit through the front and
rear housings.
8 Fit the black plastic moulding in the support bracket aperture (underside
of machine) using the two M4 x 16 mm screws.
9 Fit the printer tear edge to ticket mouth (bottom right–hand side of
machine) using the slotted screw: make sure heads of the three small
screws on printer tear edge are outermost.
10 Fit printer cassette.

11 Lift up unit and fit it to customer’s fixing assembly. When moving or

supporting the machine, take its weight into consideration.
12 Fit the cradle assembly (complete with scoop) by hooking it over the
support bracket underneath the machine.

Section 4
Installation (CX20 W)
Table of Contents:
4.2 Installation 4–3
4.2.1 Approvals and stamping 4–4

4 — Installation (CX20 W)
4.1 Introduction
This section details the installation procedure for the CX20 W and CX/A702
machines used in conjunction with the ULMA Automatic Stretch Wrapping
machines.
4.2 Installation
1 Site and level the wrapper.
2 Secure the load cell extension platform (supplied with ULMA Scale Kit)
centrally to the CX9/A702 weighplate.
3 Install the load cell platform and the extension into the in–feed of the
wrapper.
4 Route the load cell cable through the supplied trunking to the indicator
support and up through the centre of the support.
5 Adjust the height of the load cell and its extension to achieve 5 mm
clearance between the bottom of a pack and the top of the in–feed belt.
Ensure that the clearance is equal on all extensions.
6 Level the load cell and re–check and, if necessary, re–adjust the
clearances.
7 Tighten or lock all adjustments.
8 Feed the mains socket and lead up through the indicator support.
9 Feed the wrapper interface cable down through the indicator support.
10 Place the indicator/printer on to the support and secure.
11 Connect the mains, load cell and interface connectors in to the base of
the indicator/printer.
12 Switch on and adjust calibration.
13 Connect wrapper interface connector to wrapper.
14 Set indicator to label mode, Pre–pack and Wrapper ON.
15 Create a stored tare value for tare No. 2. Refer to appropriate
Operators’ Handbook.
16 Create a PLU No. 2, with a stored tare No. 2 text Meat. Refer to
appropriate Operators’ Handbook.
17 Switch on wrapper, select scale mode and Press I. Refer to appropriate
Operators’ Handbook.
18 Set wrapper program to 1. Refer to appropriate Operators’ Handbook.

4 — Installation (CX20 W)
19 Select PLU No. 2 on scale. Refer to appropriate Operators’ Handbook.
Display will show ’Tare No 2’ – Press ’Enter’
Display will show ’Meat’
Simultaneously the tare number will be transmitted to the wrapper as

the wrapper program number.
The wrapper will respond by accepting the number 2 and then change
its program number from 1 to 2. At this point a prompt may appear
which says ”Width 2”. (This will depend on whether the wrapper is fitted
with auto width selection.)
If this appears adjust the width setting until the display changes to:
Prog 2 T=120
L=1 A=2 T=4

20 Place pack on the load cell extension. When a stable weight is
achieved a label will be printed. Simultaneously the wrapper will start
and transport the pack into the wrapper where it is wrapped and
discharged by the outfeed conveyor.
21 Load the customers PLU information and check the operation of a
selection of the PLUs with different stored tares.
4.2.1 Approvals and stamping

The indicators and load cell platforms have been granted EC approval.
The approval is covered by two certificates:
Certificate No. T2426 for top pan scales i.e. CX20/A410
Certificate No. T2427 for two–piece scales i.e. CX31/B400
These certificates cover Non–automatic combinations of weighing and
wrapping equipment.
The definition of non–automatic is as follows:
”Non–automatic weighing instrument:
Instrument requires the intervention of an operator during the
weighing process, for example, to deposit on or remove from
the receptor the load to be measured and also to obtain the
result.”
This definition applies to both versions of in–feed as long as the removal of the
label initiates the next wrapper cycle.
The certificate also covers the use of the CX20 and CX31/B400 with other types
of automatic stretch wrappers if they conform to the above mentioned definition.

Section 5
Setting Up
Procedures
Table of Contents:
5.2 Service mode 5–5
5.2.1 Entering service mode using the SAC number 5–5
5.2.2 Entering service mode using the DIL switch 5–7
5.3 Configuration (Menu Option) 5–7
5.4 Calibration (Menu Option) 5–7
5.5 Clear Memory (Menu Option) 5–8
5.6 Format Memory (Menu Option) 5–9
5.7 Test Weight (Menu Option) 5–10
5.8 Test Diagnostics (Menu Option) 5–10
5.9 SAC Number (Menu Option) 5–11
5.10 Print Density (Menu Option) 5–12
5.11 Label Formats (Menu Option) 5–13

5 — Setting Up Procedures
Figure 5.1 Service Mode Flowchart
Machine Z
programming DIL switch
menu on main PCB
TEST REPORTS
SAC NUMBER
CONFIGURATION **
CALIBRATION ***
CLEAR MEMORY
FORMAT MEMORY
TEST WEIGHT
TEST DIAGNOSTICS
SAC NUMBER
PRINT DENSITY
DATE/TIME ENTRY
LABEL FORMATS *
SCALE TEST
SYSTEM LOAD TEST
PROCESSOR TEST EDIT FORMAT
STATIC RAM TEST CLEAR FORMAT
ROM TEST COPY FORMAT
EEROM TEST PRINT FORMAT
DISPLAY TEST
KEYBOARD TEST
COMMS TEST
* Machine dependent.
WEIGHING TEST
** On machines with Phase 1.3 software release, capacity can only
be changed by using DIL switch for service mode entry.
*** Only accessible by using DIL switch for service mode entry.

5.1 Introduction
This section details the setting up procedures required after machine installation
and various servicing operations. All of these procedures are carried out in
Service Mode.
Figure 5.2 Menu in Service Mode
Machine Z programming
menu
TEST REPORTS
DIL switch on
main PCB
SAC NUMBR
On machines with Phase 1.3

software release, capacity can Only accessible by using
only be changed by using DIL DIL switch for service
switch for service mode entry. mode entry.
CONFIGURATION
LABEL FORMATS CALIBRATION
Machine dependent.
PRINT DENSITY
Use → or ← keys to move to next CLEAR MEMORY
option.
Press ENTER at required option to

These menu option carry out service procedure.
messages appear
in the commodity
display. SAC NUMBER FORMAT MEMORY
TEST DIAGNOSTICS TEST WEIGHT

5.2 Service mode
IMPORTANT:
It is recommended that, before carrying out a service operation
on a machine, you make a back–up of its data (refer to User
Guide).
Service Mode is only available to the service engineer. It allows you to:
configure and calibrate the machine
clear and format the memory
check calibration with a known test weight
run a diagnostic test
change the service access code (SAC) number
change the print density
edit label formats.
There are two ways to access service mode:
by typing in SAC number; accessible from the Test Report menu in
Machine Z mode
DIL switch on main PCB; accessible via printer compartment.
5.2.1 Entering service mode using the SAC number
NOTE 1: You cannot change the capacity of a machine, during configuration,

if you use this method of service mode entry.
NOTE 2: You cannot use this method on UK machines.
To enter service mode using the SAC number carry out the following:
What You Do What You See
1 Switch machine on.
2 Insert Z key and turn it clockwise four

positions to access System Z mode.
SYSTEM Z
3 Insert the programming overlay: lift top

of the clear plastic sheet away from
keyboard and insert programming
overlay.
4 Press → or ← to access Machine Z

mode.
MACHINE Z

5 Press ENTER.
TOTALS REPORTS
6 Press → or ← until you reach the

TEST REPORT menu.
TEST REPORT
7 Press ENTER: a test report will be

printed.
TEST REPORT
8 When TEST REPORT disappears

from the display, quickly type in the
four digit service access code (SAC) ****
number: default is 9381. An asterisk
(*) appears for each typed digit.
CONFIGURATION
9 If this has been unsuccessful, due to

incorrect SAC number or time–out,
machine reverts to TEST REPORT TEST REPORT
mode: repeat Steps 7 and 8.
10 To exit service mode turn key

counter–clockwise to one of the other
keyswitch positions. (Pressing SHIFT
then ENTER takes you back to TEST
REPORT.)

5.2.2 Entering service mode using the DIL switch

To enter service mode using the DIL switch carry out the following:
1 Switch the machine on.
2 Insert one of the keys in the keyswitch

and turn it fully counter-clockwise (that
is: to the first OPerator position).
3 Set switch 2 on DIL switch SW4 to the

ON position. Access is via the printer
compartment: through aperture in CONFIGURATION
printer spine on CX20/CX30; through
aperture in chassis, adjacent to the
mains ON/OFF switch, on CX34. If
necessary, remove printer cassette (if
fitted) .
4 To exit service mode set switch 2 on

DIL switch SW4 to the OFF position.
5.3 Configuration (Menu Option)

For configuration procedure see Section 6.
5.4 Calibration (Menu Option)

For calibration procedure see Section 7.

5.5 Clear Memory (Menu Option)

The clear memory function provides memory verification and initialisation
(automatic ’cold start’). Examples of when to use the clear memory function are:
after a change of software
after changing the main PCB
after fitting a comms PCB
after changing the operating mode (that is: from vendor, system or
customer mode)
before installation of the machine
after corruption of the machine’s software.
If clear memory function is used the SAC number will revert to its default (9381):
to change this number, if required, see Section 5.9.
1 Enter service mode (see Section 5.2).
CONFIGURATION
2 Move to the CLEAR MEMORY menu.
CLEAR MEMORY
3 Press ENTER.
SURE ? (Y/N) N
4 Press Y. (If you do not wish to clear

the memory, press N followed by
ENTER.) SURE ? (Y/N) Y
5 Press ENTER. Machine bleeps a

number of times with all displays
blank, and then runs through the CLEARING . . . . . . . .
warm–up routine. Machine returns to
service mode (”CONFIGURATION”
displayed) or system Z mode
(”SYSTEM Z” displayed) depending
on method of service mode entry: DIL
switch or SAC number respectively.

5.6 Format Memory (Menu Option)

The format memory function is a RAM check. A corrupted RAM would probably
result in a loss of some of the memory; this would be indicated by the RAM
becoming full up earlier than expected. The format memory function works by
filling up each RAM with predetermined PLUs.
CONFIGURATION
2 Move to the FORMAT MEMORY

menu.
FORMAT MEMORY
3 Press ENTER.
FORMATING . . . . . .
FORMAT MEMORY

5.7 Test Weight (Menu Option)

To check the calibration of the machine by using a known weight carry out the
following procedure:
CONFIGURATION
2 Move to the TEST WEIGHT menu.
TEST WEIGHT
3 Press ENTER.
0 :0
TEST MODE 3
4 Place test weight of known value on

5 : 0
weighplate (for example: 5 kg). Check
reading in weight display. TEST MODE 5
5 Remove weight.
0 :0
TEST MODE 6
6 Press SHIFT then ENTER.
TEST WEIGHT
If weight display reading does not correspond to known weight, re–calibrate the
machine (refer to Section 7).
5.8 Test Diagnostics (Menu Option)

For test procedure see Section 8.

5.9 SAC Number (Menu Option)

The machine’s SAC number is only displayed with the machine in the SAC
NUMBER menu in service mode. If SAC number is unknown, entry to service
mode must be effected by using the DIL switch (see Section 5.2.2): a new SAC
number must be set, using this menu option, before exiting service mode.
1 Enter service mode using the DIL

switch (see Section 5.2.2).
CONFIGURATION
2 Move to the SAC NUMBER option.
SAC NUMBER
3 Press ENTER (right–hand side of

display shows current SAC number –
default is 9381). SAC NUMBER 9381
4 Type in the new SAC number which

must be four digits long. Pressing
CLEAR clears the number (reverts to SAC NUMBER 1234
0).
5 Press ENTER. SAC number is

accepted.
ENTRY ACCEPTED
SAC NUMBER
6 If the entry is not accepted ENTRY

ACCEPTED is not displayed and the
machine immediately reverts to SAC NUMBER
SAC NUMBER menu: repeat Steps 3,
4 and 5.

5.10 Print Density (Menu Option)

In service mode the density of the printing on the thermal paper can be
adjusted. There are 13 density settings (0 to 12) to choose from on all
machines, the default being 7. Both print heads, Rohm and Axiohm, have their
recommended print density settings printed on them in the form of head
resistance (Ohms) and resistance class respectively, which have to be
converted to density settings (see Tables 5.1 and 5.2).
NOTE: The following recommended print density settings must only be used
as a guide.
Table 5.1 Print Head Density Setting Information – Axiohm
Category Density Setting

CLASS A 2
CLASS B 3
CLASS C 4
CLASS D 5
CLASS E 6
Table 5.2 Print Head Density Setting Information – Rohm

136 – 139 0
140 – 143 1
144 – 147 2
148 – 151 3
152 – 155 4
156 – 159 5
160 – 163 6
164 – 167 7
168 – 171 8
172 – 175 9
176 – 179 10
180 – 183 11
184 – 187 12

To change the print density carry out the following:
1 Enter service mode and move to the

PRINT DENSITY option.
PRINT DENSITY
2 Press ENTER. (Current print density

appears in right–hand side of display.)
PRINT DENSITY 5
3 Type in new density number, using

Tables 5.1 and 5.2 only as a guide. If
the machine can print labels, make PRINT DENSITY 12
sure a label roll is loaded (you will
have to fit the spool spindle first if
service mode was entered via the DIL
switch). Check the print density by
pressing the Test Print key to print out
a printer test label (does not print a
test receipt).
4 Press ENTER.
PRINT DENSITY
5.11 Label Formats (Menu Option)

Refer to Section 9.
The Label Formats menu option is machine dependent and is only available on
machines with the label printing function (LS machines).

Section 6
Configuration
Table of Contents:
6.2 Configuration procedure 6–3
6.2.1 Configuring the machine 6–3
6.2.2 Configuration Option Tables 6–5

6 — Configuration
6.1 Introduction
Each machine is configured to operate to customer’s requirements. The
CONFIGURATION mode enables you to change the machine’s configuration.
On networks the system is also configured in this mode.
NOTE: All machines on a network must be configured to operate in the

same weight system, that is: metric, avoir or cental. These cannot
be mixed.
Throughout this section the diagrams in the ”What You See” column represent
the display screens on CX30/CX34 machines. The bottom right–hand display is
the alphanumeric commodity display which, on CX20 machines, is situated
below the ticket mouth and is of LCD type.
6.2 Configuration procedure
NOTE: To enter service mode refer to Section 5.2.
6.2.1 Configuring the machine
1 In configuration mode
(CONFIGURATION is displayed),
press ENTER. The machine 1111111111111
configuration code number will
appear: the left–hand digit (Option 1)
flashes.
2 From Table 6.1 select your 16–digit

machine configuration code number
and type it in. You can use the ← 6429112112411
and → keys to move left and right.
3 Press ENTER. On a slave scale

configuration finishes at this point,
however, a master scale prompts for ENTRY ACCEPTED
SYSTEM ? (Y/N) Y allowing you to
configure the system.
CONFIGURATION
OR
SYSTEM ? Y/N Y

6 — Configuration
4 If you wish to configure the system go

to Step 5. If you wish to end
configuration press N then ENTER:
the display will blank, then machine
will run through its warm–up
sequence.
5 Press ENTER.
A1111111111
6 From Table 6.2 select your 16–digit

system configuration code number
and type it in. A2122111111
7 Press ENTER.
ENTRY ACCEPTED
111111
8 From Table 6.3 select your six–digit

country override configuration code
number and type it in. 112211
9 Press ENTER.
ENTRY ACCEPTED
10 Configuration has finished and

machine runs through its warm–up
sequence.

6 — Configuration
6.2.2 Configuration Option Tables

The following tables give the configuration options:
NOTE: The following option tables are for Phase 1.3 main core software
release. For machines with software prior to Phase 1.3 refer to
Section 25.
Table 6.1 Machine Configuration
Digit 1 — Capacity
0 30 kg x 5 g F Spare
1 25 lb x 1/8 oz G Spare
2 30 lb x 0.01 lb H Spare
3 15 kg x 5g I Spare
4 6 kg x 2 g J 5.2 kg x 2 g (string cell)
5 30 kg AVR K 10 kg x 5 g (string cell)
6 15 kg AVR L 6 kg x 1 g (string cell)
7 6 kg AVR M 12 kg x 2 g (string cell)
8 6 kg x 1 g N 12 kg AVR (string cell)
9 12 kg x 2 g O 30 kg x 5 g (string cell)
A 30 kg x 10 g P 60 kg x 10 g (string cell)
B 60 kg x 20 g Q 120 kg x 20 g (string cell)
C 60 lb AVR R 150 kg AVR (string cell)
D 150 kg x 50 g S 600 kg x 200 kg (string cell)
E 300 kg x 100 g
Digit 2 — Tare System
1 Free tare; stored tare 6 Free tare; graduated tare
2 Free tare; stored tare; graduated tare 7 Cumulative free tare
3 Cumulative free tare; stored tare 8 Cumulative free tare; graduated tare
4 Cumulative free tare; stored tare; 9 Cumulative free tare; stored tare; all tare
graduated tare modes retained
5 Free tare only
Digit 3 — Tare Display
1 No tare display 3 Separate tare display only
2 Negative weight display 4 Separate tare display and negative weight
Digit 4 — Porte Minimal
0 1 division 5 12 divisions
1 4 divisions 6 14 divisions
Digit 5 — Bleep Behind Zero
1 No bleep if scales goes behind zero 2 Scale bleeps if scale goes behind zero
Digit 6 — Timeout On Numeric Data Entry
1 Timeout operates on numeric data entry 2 No timeout on numeric data entry
Digit 7 — Timeout On PLU Selection
1 No timeout 4 0.8 seconds
2 0.4 seconds 5 1.0 seconds

6 — Configuration
Digit 8 — Tax Printing Options

Inclusive tax systems only.
1 No reference to tax value on receipt 3 Itemised tax printing on receipt
2 Tax value shown on receipt
Digit 9 — Weight Filtering
1 0.75 division weight filter 6 8 division weight filter
2 1 division weight filter 7 10 division weight filter
4 4 division weight filter 9 Weight reading freeze ON
5 6 division weight filter
Digit 10 — Price Base/Surcharge
1 Single price base; no surcharge 4 Single price base; surcharge
2 Dual price base; no surcharge 5 Dual price base; surcharge
3 x2, x4 price base; no surcharge 6 x2, x4 price base; surcharge
Digit 11 — Add Function
1 Add weighed goods and nonweighed 4 Add only allowed for continuous label
items;
Print transaction and total labels
2 Add weighed goods and nonweighed 5 No Add function
items;
Print total label only
3 Add nonweighed items only;
Digit 12 — Printer Attached
1 Printer attached 2 No printer attached
Digit 13 — Symbols Interlock
With symbols suppressed:
1 Either weighed or nonweighed PLUs 2 Both weighed and nonweighed PLUs
Digit 14 — Weighing Control
1 Weighing OFF 2 Weighing ON
Digit 15 — Cash Drawer Detection
1 Selectable from Machine Z menu 2 Permanently enabled
Digit 16 — Weight Printing
1 Total weight not printed on receipt 2 Total weight printed on receipt

6 — Configuration
Table 6.2 System Configuration

Digit 1 — Country Selection
A United Kingdom I Australia
B Holland J New Zealand
C France K Belgium
D Germany L Austria
E Canada M Switzerland
F Mexico N Italy
G USA O Denmark
H South Africa P Norway
Digit 2 — Security Reports
1 Security reports OFF 2 Security reports ON
Digit 3 — Communications Controller
1 No communications controller fitted 3 Communications controller fitted; no
system menus
2 Communications controller fitted
Digit 4 — Voids
1 Voids printed on receipt 2 Voids not printed on receipt
Digit 5 — Operator Training
1 Only trading mode active (training mode 2 Both trading and training modes active
not active)
Digit 6 — X totals
1 Sub–totals and totals 2 Sub–totals only
Digit 7 — Totals clear
1 Totals clear ON 2 Totals clear OFF
Digit 8 — X System Totals Printing
1 Menu selected 5 Grand totals; machine totals; groups totals;
operator totals
2 Grand totals only 6 Grand totals; machine totals; groups totals;
operator totals; hourly totals
3 Grand totals; machine totals 7 Grand totals; machine totals; groups totals;
operator totals; hourly totals; PLU totals
4 Grand totals; machine totals; groups totals
Digit 9 — Z System Totals Printing
operator totals
4 Grand totals; machine totals; groups totals 8 Grand totals; machine totals; groups totals;
operator totals; hourly totals; PLU totals;
security reports
Digit 10 — System Operating Mode
1 Vendor mode 3 Customer mode
2 System mode
Digit 11 — Tax System
1 Price inclusive of tax 2 Price exclusive of tax
Digit 12 — Host Communications Baud Rate
1 1200 Baud 3 4800 Baud
2 2400 Baud 4 9600 Baud

6 — Configuration
Digit 13 — Tare Printing Options

1 No reference to tare value on receipt 2 Tare value shown on receipt
Digit 14 — Totalisation
1 Totalise all transactions 2 Totalise the add mode transactions only
Digit 15 — AM and PM Printing
1 Disabled 2 Enabled
Digit 16 — Receipt Sequential Numbers
1 Machine generated 2 System generated
Table 6.3 Country Override Configuration
Digit 1 — Unit Price Format

1 0 to 99999 3 0 to 999990
2 0 to 999999
Digit 2 — Transaction Rounding
1 To nearest 0.5 3 To nearest 5.0
2 To nearest 2.5
Digit 3 — Decimal Places
1 1 decimal place 3 3 decimal places
2 2 decimal places 4 No decimal places
Digit 4 — Punctuation
1 Commas 2 Decimal point
Digit 5 — Currency Symbol
0 No currency A Swiss Franc (Fr)
1 Pound sterling (£) B Currency P
2 Dollar ($) C Currency E
3 Rand (R) D Currency K
4 Franc (F) E Currency M
5 Austrian shilling (S) F Currency L
6 Krona (Kr) G Currency D
7 Deutschmark (DM) H Peso (N$)
8 Guilder (ƒ) I Lira (Lit)
9 Finnish mark (mk)
Digit 6 — Receipt Rounding
2 To nearest 2.5
Digit 7 — Transaction Acknowledgement
1 No acknowledge 3 Accepted message
2 Recall sub–total

Section 7
Calibration and
Adjustments
Table of Contents:
7.2 Adjustment of Overload Stops (CX20/CX30) 7–3
7.2.1 Adjustment of Asymmetric Overload Stops 7–3
7.3 Adjustment of Overload Stops (CX9/A702) 7–3
7.4 Adjustment of Overload Stops (CX34) 7–3
7.5 Calibration 7–4

7 — Calibration and Adjustments
7.1 Introduction
Calibration data is held in the EEPROM. Calibration data contains span, zero
and linearity settings.
During calibration the weight display is active and subdivision data displayed in
the alphanumeric display.
NOTE: If the capacity of a machine is changed the machine must be

re–calibrated.
7.2 Adjustment of Overload Stops (CX20/CX30)

There is no adjustment necessary to the central overload stop, which is located
directly underneath the transducer and the centre of the cross, as this is factory
set.
7.2.1 Adjustment of Asymmetric Overload Stops

To adjust the asymmetric overload stops, proceed as follows:
1 Switch off machine and isolate it from the mains power supply.
2 Remove weighplate and case as detailed in Section 3. Then fit
weighplate back on cross.
3 Apply full load (varies according to scale) plus 0,5 kg (1 lb) to one
corner of weigh plate.
4 Adjust asymmetric overload stop below loaded corner so that head of
stop just contacts underside of weighplate. Lock overload stop in
position by tightening lock nut.
5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 at three other corner positions.
6 Remove weighplate and reassemble machine (refer to Section 3).
7.3 Adjustment of Overload Stops (CX9/A702)

There is no adjustment necessary to the central overload stop, which is located
directly underneath the transducer and the centre of the cross, as this is factory
set.
7.4 Adjustment of Overload Stops (CX34)

There is no adjustment necessary to the overload stops above and below the
transducer, as they are factory set.

7.5 Calibration
To calibrate the unit, proceed as follows:
NOTE: See Section 5.2 for service mode entry.
1 On the CX20/CX30/CX9/A702 check

that unit is level and adjust levelling
feet if necessary.
2 Enter service mode by using the DIL

switch (refer to Section 5.2.2).
CONFIGURATION
3 Press → (or ←) to obtain the

calibration menu option.
CALIBRATION
4 Press ENTER.
3:6 3/4
EMPTY PAN 10
5 Ensure weighplate is empty, then

0 : 0
press ENTER.
ADD FULL LOAD 7
6 Place full load on the weighplate.

19 : 2 3/8
ADD FULL LOAD 4
7 Press ENTER.
29 : 6 3/8
EMPTY PAN 10
8 Remove load.
4:6 1/2
EMPTY PAN 9
9 Press ENTER.
0 : 0
ADD FULL LOAD 7

10 Place full load on the weighplate.

25 : 0
ADD FULL LOAD 11
11 Press ENTER. Calibration is

complete.
CALIBRATION
If unit cannot self–calibrate at the weights in use, it will display OUTSIDE

RANGE for approximately two seconds then revert to CALIBRATION.
A calibrated standard weight is required to perform these functions. If, while
adding the full load, there is a fault on the transducer or the operator is applying
incorrect loads, on pressing the ENTER key, the scale will display OUTSIDE
RANGE and then abort the proceedings reverting back to CALIBRATION menu.
The limit for this is ±30% of expected count value at full load.

Section 8
Testing
Table of Contents:
8.2 Date/time Entry (Menu Option) 8–4
8.3 Scale Test (Menu Option) 8–5
8.3.1 Processor test (menu option) 8–6
8.3.2 Static RAM test (menu option) 8–7
8.3.3 ROM test (menu option) 8–8
8.3.4 EEPROM test (menu option) 8–9
8.3.5 Display test (menu option) 8–10
8.3.6 Keyboard test (menu option) 8–11
8.3.7 Comms test (menu option) 8–13
8.3.8 Weighing test (menu option) 8–15
8.4 System Load Test (Menu Option) 8–16
8.4.1 Loading the system 8–16
8.4.2 Measuring on the machine 8–18

8 — Testing
8.1 Introduction
The unit performs a self–test at power–up. Further diagnostic testing is
available from built–in test software which is arranged in sections. Any one
section can be applied to test the health of a particular function, or all sections
can be applied to provide a general health check.
To exit from any of the following tests at any time, turn key in keyswitch
temporarily to SUPERVISOR position.
NOTE: It is recommended that, to carry out any of the following tests, you
enter service mode via the DIL switch. See Section 5.2.2.
Figure 8.1 Menu of Test Diagnostics (Service Mode)
TEST DIAGNOSTICS
Press ENTER.
DATE/TIME ENTRY
Use → and ← keys to move to next

option.

carry out service procedure.
SYSTEM LOAD TEST SCALE TEST

8 — Testing
8.2 Date/time Entry (Menu Option)

Date and time may be set or changed.
1 Select DATE/TIME ENTRY option.
DATE/TIME ENTRY
2 Press ENTER. (Date appears in

left–hand side of display, time in
right–hand side. Left–hand digit of 05/10/92 13–49
date flashes.)
3 Type in correct date and time. (Use

→ and ← keys to move left and
right.) 06/10/92 14–06
4 Press ENTER. Date and time entry is

complete.
ENTRY ACCEPTED
DATE/TIME ENTRY
5 If you typed in an unacceptable date

or time (for example, 13 for the
month), the following occurs: repeat ERROR
Steps 3 and 4.
DATE/TIME ENTRY

8 — Testing
8.3 Scale Test (Menu Option)

All of the following tests are carried out in SCALE TEST menu.
On pressing ENTER to access PROCESSOR TEST menu option a ’SCALE
IDENTITY’ report is printed.
Figure 8.2 Menu of Scale Test
SCALE TEST
Press ENTER.
PROCESSOR TEST
WEIGHING TEST STATIC RAM TEST
Use → and ← keys to move to

COMMS TEST next option. ROM TEST
Press ENTER at required option

to carry out service procedure.
KEYBOARD TEST EEPROM TEST
DISPLAY TEST

8 — Testing
8.3.1 Processor test (menu option)

Processor performs test on:
on–processor RAM
address registers
internal interrupts
timers
Any failure will result in display showing “PROCESSOR FAIL” and unit will not
react to any keyboard or load input.
1 Select function.
PROCESSOR TEST
2 Press ENTER. If OK .....
PROCESSOR PASS
else .....
PROCESSOR FAIL
3 ... a ’PROCESSOR TEST’ report is

printed.
PROCESSOR TEST

8 — Testing
8.3.2 Static RAM test (menu option)

Processor writes data to all RAM addresses, destructively over–writing any data
already there.
1 Select function.
STATIC RAM TEST
2 Press ENTER. Runs through the test.

0
”RAM NOT FITTED” is displayed
where RAM is not fitted. A ’STATIC TESTING . . . . . . . . .
RAM TEST’ report is printed
simultaneously.
1
TESTING . . . . . . . . .
RAM NOT FITTED
3 When test is complete, either:
STATIC RAM TEST
or:
STATIC RAM FAIL

8 — Testing
8.3.3 ROM test (menu option)

A value is generated and printed for each of the three ROMs in unit: two main
EPROMs (A+B and C+D) and one PROMX. These values should be compared
with values labelled on ROMs at manufacture. Values must not have altered.
1 Select function.
ROM TEST
2 Press ENTER. Runs through the test.

0
A ’ROM TEST’ report is printed
simultaneously. TESTING . . . . . . . . .
TESTING . . . . . 4A43
3 When test is complete, either:
ROM TEST
or:
ROM FAIL

8 — Testing
8.3.4 EEPROM test (menu option)
Caution
DO NOT switch machine off during this test.
Existing EEPROM data is copied in triplicate to RAM and then deleted from
EEPROM. The EEPROM is tested in data–empty condition and a value is
generated and printed. On completion of test, RAM–held data is written back to
the EEPROM and result of test printed. Test may be selected to run more than
once. Cycle time is not less than one minute.
The following example is for two tests.
1 Select function.
EEPROM TEST
2 Press ENTER.
NO . OF TESTS 1
3 Type in the number of tests you

require.
NO . OF TESTS 2
4 Press ENTER. Number in the Price

1
To Pay display will start counting until
testing has finished. An ’EEPROM TESTING . . . . 2
TEST’ report starts printing when
”EEPROM PASS” is displayed.
1
TESTING . . . . 1
EEPROM PASS
EEPROM TEST
5 If EEPROM test fails the following will

be displayed after ”TESTING . . . . ”
has finished: EEPROM FAIL

8 — Testing
8.3.5 Display test (menu option)

This test has two parts: first part checks display function; second part provides
display burn–in at manufacture. Display burn–in is not required in the field as all
new display units are supplied already burned–in. First part energizes
sequentially every display panel (and LED, if applicable) at one–second
intervals, then all panels indicate sequence 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9. Test runs
in continuous loop until keyswitch is set temporarily to SUPERVISOR position.
1 Select function.
DISPLAY TEST
2 Press ENTER.
BURN TIME = 2880
3 Press ENTER: Display Test cycle

8.
begins. Each digit in the first panel
will energise in sequence. This is
repeated for each panel (left to right).
4 Indicators will illuminate then

extinguish in sequence. (Top
downwards, then left to right.)
5 All the digits of each display will show

000000 000000 000000
noughts, then ones, twos etc. up to
nines, in sequence. 000000 0000000000000000
6 The Display Test cycle (in Steps 3 to

5) will continue indefinitely. To exit,
turn key temporarily to SUPERVISOR DISPLAY TEST
position (all display segments are
displayed), then turn key back again
(a ’DISPLAY TEST’ report is
simultaneously printed).

8 — Testing
8.3.6 Keyboard test (menu option)

Once test has started you must press every key position on the keyboard in
sequence. Starting at top left–hand corner (key position ’1’) work from left to
right, then do the same for next row down, and so on. At each correct key press
the machine will produce a normal BEEP tone and the displayed PRESS KEY
number will increase by one. However, an incorrect key press produces a
different, and slightly shorter BEEP, and the displayed ”PRESS KEY” number
will remain the same. When test is completed successfully, test result is printed.
1 Select function.
KEYBOARD TEST
2 Press ENTER.
PRESS KEY 1
3 Press key at top left–hand corner of

keyboard.
PRESS KEY 2
4 Repeat Step 3 for all the remaining

keys. Press all keys on keyboard in
sequence: from top row left–to–right,
then next row down left–to–right, and
so on. Unit will BEEP at each
successful key press.
If you wish to exit before completing

the test turn key in keyswitch to
SUPERVISOR position.
5 When all the keys have been pressed,

and if keyboard has passed test,
displays show the following and KEYBOARD PASS
’KEYBOARD TEST’ report is printed.
KEYBOARD TEST
6 If a key fails (for example, at key 57),

test will not continue to the next key.
PRESS KEY 57

8 — Testing
7 Turn key in keyswitch to

SUPERVISOR position. A
’KEYBOARD TEST’ report is printed. KEYBOARD FAIL
KEYBOARD TEST

8 — Testing
8.3.7 Comms test (menu option)

This test requires that all communications connectors on exterior of machine
have ‘echo’ test connectors fitted (refer to Figure 8.3): these return outgoing
signals back to machine. The machine sends a block of data and monitors
returned result. The test runs through five baud rates (1200, 2400, 4800, 9600
and 19200) for the ISC and DCU, and indicates ’PASS’ or ’FAIL’ for each in the
commodity display. A report is printed at the end of the test.
Figure 8.3 Link Fittings to Echo Plugs (D–type Connectors)
ISC echo plug pinout – link across pins 1 and 6
5 4 3 2
9 8 7
DCU echo plug pinout – link across pins 3 and 4
5 4 3 2 1
9 8 7 6
To do a comms test carry out the following:
1 Select function.
COMMS. TEST
2 Connect echo plugs to ISC and DCU

connectors.
FIT ECHO PLUGS
3 Press ENTER: the number in the top

0
right–hand display will start counting.
ISC TEST 1200

8 — Testing
4 Display will then show the following ISC PASS

and a test report is printed.
or:
ISC FAIL
5 Step 4 is then repeated for the 2400,

4800, 9600 and 19200 baud rates.
6 Test continues for the DCU. The

0
number in the top right–hand display
will start counting. DCU TEST 1200
7 Display will then show the following DCU PASS

and a test report is printed.
or:
DCU FAIL
8 Step 7 is then repeated for the 2400,

4800, 9600 and 19200 baud rates.
9 Test ends.
COMMS. TEST

8 — Testing
8.3.8 Weighing test (menu option)

This test measures the stability of transducer and A/D PCB circuitry. Before the
test you must determine duration of test cycle (in minutes, from 1 to 99). When
set and when test cycle period is passed, test may begin. Weight is applied to
weighplate, and display is monitored: display shows weight data as computer
data and as final value. Test runs in continuous loop until keyswitch is set
temporarily to SUPERVISOR position. A report is printed.
1 Select function.
WEIGHING TEST
2 Press ENTER.
CYCLE TIME = 1
3 Type in required cycle time (minutes).
CYCLE TIME = 5
4 Add test weight to weighplate and

press ENTER: the start of the 2.000 11 8000
’WEIGHING TEST’ report is printed
and the cycle begins. Weight display
shows measured weight (2.000 weight
units in sample), price to pay display
shows weight data and the unit price
display shows the number of data
sub–divisions for final division (8,000
with 11 sub–divisions in sample) ...
5 ... when cycle time has elapsed and

when weight is steady, weight data is
printed on the ’WEIGHING TEST’
report. Cycle starts again ...
6 ... to exit test, set keyswitch

temporarily to SUPERVISOR position.
The ’WEIGHING TEST’ report finishes WEIGHING TEST
printing.

8 — Testing
8.4 System Load Test (Menu Option)

Simulation of normal operations to check communication, totalisation and
performance of machines. There are two tests available, both of which
comprise the loading of transactions into the machine.
8.4.1 Loading the system

This test loads the system with a given number of transactions over a given
period of time and a report is printed. This is repeated until CLEAR is pressed.
This test can be used to check communication between machines.
1 Select SYSTEM LOAD TEST option.
SYSTEM LOAD TEST
2 Press ENTER.
RECEIPT SIZE 0
3 Type in required receipt size. Receipt

size is the number of transactions that
appear on each printed report. Range RECEIPT SIZE 10
is from 1 to 99 transactions.
4 Press ENTER.
PAUSE LENGTH 0
5 Type in required pause length. Pause

length is the time between each
transaction. Must be in the range 1 to PAUSE LENGTH 2
9 seconds. 0 takes you to the other
test (see Section 8.4.2).

8 — Testing
6 Press ENTER. You may not see the

’NO TRANSACTIONS’ display every
time ... NO TRANSACTIONS
... price to pay display shows the 1

number of transactions ...
LOADING . . . . .
... when the number of transactions 10

loaded reaches the receipt size a
LOADING . . . . .
report is printed. The transactions
continue to be loaded and a report is
printed every time the receipt size is
reached.
7 Press CLEAR to abort.
ABORTED
SYSTEM LOAD TEST

8 — Testing
8.4.2 Measuring on the machine

This test determines the speed of the machine by loading it with transactions
over a pre–determined period of time. Apart from measuring machine
performance it can also be used for checking totalisation and software.
1 Select SYSTEM LOAD TEST option.
SYSTEM LOAD TEST
2 Press ENTER.
RECEIPT SIZE 0
3 Type in required receipt size. Receipt

size is the number of transactions that
appear on each printed report. Range RECEIPT SIZE 10
is from 1 to 99 transactions.
4 Press ENTER.
PAUSE LENGTH 0
5 Press ENTER. This enters a 0.
DURATION 0
6 Type in time for duration of test.

Range is 1 to 99 minutes.
DURATION 2
7 Press ENTER. Unit price display

0.00 1
shows the duration time. Price to pay
display shows the number of LOADING . . . . .
transactions. Report is printed every
time the print size is reached ...
2.00 793
... test is complete ...
COMPLETED
... if necessary, press CLEAR to exit.

SYSTEM LOAD TEST

Section 9
Label Formats
Table of Contents:
9.2 Labels 9–4
9.2.1 Label format 9–4
9.2.2 Label fields 9–5
9.2.3 Label field co–ordinates 9–6
9.2.4 Label start point 9–7
9.2.5 The offset (90 and 180 degree formats only) 9–8
9.2.8 Text fonts 9–11
9.2.9 References 9–11
9.3 Creating a New Label Format 9–12
9.3.1 Design 9–12
9.3.2 Determining the label field co–ordinates 9–13
9.3.3 Programming 9–13
9.3.4 Example – creating a new 0 degree label format 9–14
9.4 Edit Format (Menu Option) 9–20
9.5 Clear Format (Menu Option) 9–25
9.6 Copy Format (Menu Option) 9–26
9.7 Print Format (Menu Option) 9–27

9 — Label Formats
9.1 Introduction
Refer to Users’ Handbook Part 6, Label and Barcode Formats.
The LABEL FORMATS menu allows Avery Berkel personnel and dealers to
create an original label format to customer’s requirements (with regard to local
Weights and Measures Regulations).
Figure 9.1 Label Formats Menu
LABEL FORMATS
Press ENTER.
EDIT FORMAT
Use → or ← keys to move to next

option.
PRINT FORMAT CLEAR FORMAT
carry out service procedure.
COPY FORMAT
The LABEL FORMATS menu options are:

EDIT FORMAT: allows you to create new label formats and edit existing
ones.
CLEAR FORMAT: clears all a format’s pre–programmed data by setting
everything to default.
COPY FORMAT: copies all a format’s programmed data to a new format
number.
PRINT FORMAT: prints out the format in the form of rectangles which
indicate the size and position of label fields. A code number or letter
inside each rectangle indicates the field and font type.

9 — Label Formats
9.2 Labels
The label is from 40 mm to 160 mm long, up to approximately 50 mm wide and
can be supplied pre–printed or plain.
NOTE: Dark pre–printed labels can cause problems with the printer’s
photodetector resulting in a LABEL FEED ERR error display. See
Section 10.
9.2.1 Label format

Three types of label format are available: 0°, 90° and 180° orientation. The
machine stores 60 formats; 20 of each type, of which 10 are pre–programmed
and 10 flexible (see Table 9.1). Pre–programmed formats are standards that
have already been set up and always reside in the machine (refer to Users’
Handbook Part 6, Label and Barcode Formats). Flexible formats are initially
empty (that is, their settings are either 0 or default) allowing new formats to be
created from scratch.
NOTE: Pre–programmed formats can be edited, however, after a ’cold start’

(refer to Section 5.5) they revert to their original settings.
Table 9.1 Allocation of Label Format Numbers
Label Format Number Angle of Rotation Format Type
0– 9 0° Pre–programmed
10 – 19 0° Flexible
20 – 29 90° Pre–programmed
30 – 39 90° Flexible
40 – 49 180° Pre–programmed
50 – 59 180° Flexible

9 — Label Formats
9.2.2 Label fields

Each label format comprises a number of fields. A field is a rectangular area on
the label in which is printed: unit price, dates, sales messages, text, barcode etc.
A space is reserved for the optional store name at the leading edge of every
label. Figure 9.2 shows a sample of a label and next to it is the same label
showing the outline of the fields (obtained using the PRINT FORMAT option –
see Section 9.7): this is the principle on which a new label format is created.
Figure 9.2 Sample Label and Label Fields – 0 Degree Format
TEXT 1
Code number of field
(in programmed font
type)
UNIT PRICE TEXT 2

2 SYMBOL
UNIT PRICE 2 TEXT 3
TOTAL PRICE
2 SYMBOL
LEGEND 1
TOTAL PRICE 2 TARE SYMBOLS
DATE 1 TARE
LEGEND 3
LEGEND 2 SALES TEXT 1
DATE 2
OPERATOR
NAME
UNIT PRICE
SYMBOL TOTAL PRICE
SYMBOL
UNIT PRICE
TOTAL PRICE
Sample of Printed Label
WEIGHT/ITEM SYMBOL
BARCODE
STORE NAME WEIGHT/ITEMS
Label Fields

9 — Label Formats
9.2.3 Label field co–ordinates

To program a new label format each field requires two co–ordinates: X1,Y1 and
X2,Y2. These set the field’s size and position. The X1,Y1 co–ordinate is at the
field’s top left–hand corner and the X2,Y2 at the opposite corner (bottom
right–hand).
Each co–ordinate consists of two three–digit numbers (for example: X1,Y1 =
003,195). The numbers are obtained by measuring, in millimetres, the distance
between the co–ordinate and a reference point in the X and Y planes. These
distances are called x1 and y1 or x2 and y2 respectively. These distances are
then multiplied by a plane–dependent conversion factor (as the printer cannot
interpret a measurement) to give the co–ordinates X1 and Y1 or X2 and Y2.
Refer to Table 9.2.
NOTE: The reference point, or start point, is always at the bottom left–hand
corner of the label, as read.
Table 9.2 Conversion Factor – Measurement/Co–ordinate
Conversion Type Measurement/ Conversion Factor

Co–ordinate
0_ Label 90_ Label 180_ Label
Measurement (mm) to x1 and x2 3 3/2 3

co–ordinate
co ordinate
y1 and y2 3/2 3 3/2
Co–ordinate to X1 and X2 1/3 2/3 1/3
measurement (mm)
Y1 and Y2 2/3 1/3 2/3

9 — Label Formats
9.2.4 Label start point

The label start point, or origin, is the point on the label from which all label
co–ordinates are determined. This point corresponds to the 000,000
co–ordinate stored in the machine. The label’s start point is always at (0° label),
or near (90° and 180° labels), its bottom left–hand corner.
Figure 9.3 Label Start Points (0, 90 and 180 Degree Labels)
All labels aligned Print head (right–hand side)

with print head’s
left–hand side
Y
TEXT
THIS
WAY 0° Label
UP
Key:
X a = offset: distance from right–hand
Start point
side of print head to label start
point (90° and 180° labels only)
b = label width
X
Direction of Label Feed
TEXT THIS
WAY UP
90° Label
Y
Start point
b a
Label X
Start point
Area reserved
180° Label
for store name
(leading edge of
every label)
Y
Direction of X and Y planes

9 — Label Formats
9.2.5 The offset (90 and 180 degree formats only)

Unlike the 0° label format, the label start points of the 90° and 180° formats are
referenced, in the machine’s software, to the right–hand side of the print head –
see Figure 9.3. Consequently, an ’offset’ value has to be added to the Y (90°)
and X (180°) coordinates to compensate for the difference between print head
and label width.
The print head used on all label machines is approximately 53.5 mm wide. It
has 160 dots across its width at three dots every 1 mm. Therefore, as maximum
label width is 50 mm, this offset will always be required.
The offset value is usually obtained by measurement but can also be calculated
– see Section 25.2.1.
Figure 9.4 Effect of the Offset (90 Degree Label)
All labels aligned

Print head (right–hand side)
with print head’s left–
hand side
TEXT THIS WAY UP
Direction of Label Feed
90° Label with Offset
Start point (correct)

TEXT THIS WAY UP
90° Label without Offset

Outline of label
Outline of printed Start point (incorrect)

area (shaded)
Offset

9 — Label Formats
9.2.6 Determining the Start Point of a 90 Degree Format

To determine the start point for a 90° label format carry out the following (refer to
Figure 9.5):
1 From the top edge of the label, measure 53.5 mm down in the plane of
the Y axis.
2 Draw in the X axis through this point.
3 Draw in the Y axis along the left–hand edge of the label.
The start point is the point of intersection between the X and Y axes.
Figure 9.5 Determining the Start Point (90 Degree Format)
Y axis
Top edge of label

53.5 mm
X axis
Start point

9 — Label Formats
9.2.7 Determining the Start Point of a 180 Degree Format

To determine the start point for the a 180° label format carry out the following
(refer to Figure 9.6):
1 From the right–hand edge of the label, measure 53.5 mm to the left in
the plane of the X axis.
2 Draw in the Y axis through this point.
3 Draw in the X axis along the bottom edge of the label.

The start point is the point of intersection between the X and Y axes.
Figure 9.6 Determining the Start Point (180 Degree Format)
Y axis
Right–hand edge of
label
X axis
Start point
53.5 mm

9 — Label Formats
9.2.8 Text fonts

There are 24 text fonts available. During programming each text font is
represented by a letter. The text fonts are shown below (approximately full
size), each letter representing the actual programmed font.
Fonts in certain fields can be changed by the vendor in the programming mode.
9.2.9 References
In the three LEGEND fields, sales messages may be referenced. These are
fixed references and cannot be altered in the PLU editor, unlike the variable
sales messages.

9 — Label Formats
9.3 Creating a New Label Format
IMPORTANT:
In some markets the new label format must be approved by the
local Weights and Measures Regulations. To check approval,
contact Avery Berkel Customer Support (see Page ix in the
About This Manual section).
The process for creating a new label format can be broken down into three
stages:
design (refer to Section 9.3.1)
determining the label field co–ordinates (refer to Section 9.3.2)
programming (refer to Section 9.3.3).
To create a new label format: draw the required label format to the customer’s
specifications – if necessary have it checked by Avery Berkel Customer Support;
measure the position of the fields and obtain their co–ordinates; program the
machine with the new format.
Section 9.3.4 shows how to create a new 0° label format, giving a step–by–step
guide with illustrations.
9.3.1 Design
To design the new label format, stick the required label on to a piece of paper.
On the label draw the outline of each field, identifying it by writing its code
number inside.
Before drawing in the fields, please note the following:
Make sure each field is big enough for selected text font and the number
of characters to be printed; specially the unit price, weight and pack price
fields.
Allow a gap of 6 mm at the leading edge of every label across its width.
The machine reserves this area for the optional store name (programmed
using the X key).
Allow a gap of at least 1 mm between adjacent fields and along the label’s
edges.
To ensure barcode is correctly printed, minimum widths (X co–ordinate for
all label formats) are:
EAN 13/UPC 12/UPC = 110 co–ordinates

EAN 8 = 80 co–ordinates.
After designing the new format, if necessary, find out if the format is approved by
contacting Avery Berkel Customer Support.

9 — Label Formats
9.3.2 Determining the label field co–ordinates

At the bottom left–hand corner of the label mark the position of the start point –
for a 90° or 180° label its position needs to be offset, see Section 9.2.5. Draw
the X and Y axes through the start point. For each field obtain x1, y1, x2 and y2
by measuring the distances from start point to both co–ordinates in the X and Y
planes (see Section 9.2.3).
Convert x1, y1, x2 and y2 values to co–ordinates, X1,Y1 and X2,Y2, using the
conversion factors in Table 9.2.
9.3.3 Programming
The details of the new label format have to be programmed into the machine,
this is done in the EDIT FORMAT option – see Section 9.4.
After selecting the required format number for editing, the new label format can
be programmed. This involves the entry of two co–ordinates and, depending on
type of field, text font and a reference number. This is done for each field in
sequence until ENTRY ACCEPTED is displayed, indicating that your new label
format has been programmed and accepted by the machine.

9 — Label Formats
9.3.4 Example – creating a new 0 degree label format

The following example shows how to create a new 0° label format.
1 Obtain a label, peel off the backing paper and stick it onto a sheet of
paper. (If a label is not available you can draw its outline on the paper.)
See Diagram A below.
2 On the label draw the outline of all the fields you require, identifying
each field by inserting its code number. See Diagram B below.
NOTE: Don’t forget to allow 6 mm at the bottom of the label for the
STORE NAME, even if it has not has been programmed.
3 Mark the position of the label’s start point and draw in the X and Y
axes. See Diagram C below.
NOTE: For 0° and 180° labels the start point must be offset. See
Section 9.2.5.
Diagram A Diagram B Diagram C

Y axis
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ X axis
6 mm
Start point (bottom left–hand corner of label)
Reserve this area for STORE NAME – allow 6 mm.

9 — Label Formats
4 Measure the distances x1, y1, x2 and y2 in millimetres for the TEXT 1
field and enter these values in Table 25.13. See Diagram D below.
Y axis
Diagram D
(X1, Y1)
(X2, Y2)
y1 = 130 mm
y2 = 102 mm
X axis
Start point = 0 x1 = 1 mm
mm (X and Y
planes) x2 = 48 mm
Field Measurements (mm)

Name Code x1 (→) y1 (↑) x2 (→) y2 (↑)
TEXT 1 0 1 130 48 102
TEXT 2 1
TEXT 3 2
SALES TEXT 1 8

9 — Label Formats
5 Repeat Step 4 for the remaining label fields. Diagram E below gives a
further example and Figure 9.7 shows the completed table.
Diagram E
Y axis
(X1, Y1)
Y1 = 36 mm
Y2 = 33 mm
(X2, Y2)
X axis
Start point = 0 mm X1 = 14 mm
(X and Y planes)
X2 = 30 mm
LEGEND 2 A 1 24 47
LEGEND 3 B 25 51 48 47
UNIT PRICE SYMBOL C 1 36 13 33
WEIGHT/ITEM SYMBOL D 14 36 30 33
TOTAL PRICE SYMBOL E
TARE G
TARE SYMBOLS H

9 — Label Formats
6 Convert the measured distances x1, y1, x2 and y2 to co–ordinates

X1,Y1 and X2,Y2 (see Table 9.2 for conversion factor) and enter these
values in Table 25.14. See Diagram F below and Figure 9.8.
Diagram F
Name Code x1 (→) y1 (↑) x2 (→) y2 (↑)
TEXT 1 0 1 130 48 102

TEXT 2 1
TEXT 3 2
SALES TEXT 1 8
Conversion Type Measurement/ Conversion Factor

Co–ordinate
0° Label 90° Label 180° Label
Measurement (mm) to X1 and X2 3 3/2 3

co–ordinate
Y1 and Y2 3/2 3 3/2
Co–ordinate to X1 and X2 1/3 2/3 1/3
measurement (mm) Y1 and Y2 2/3 1/3 2/3
Co–ordinate = X1 co–ordinate Y2 co–ordinate

measurement x = x1 x 3 = y2 x 3/2
conversion factor = 1 mm x 3 = 102 mm x 3/2
= 003 = 153
Customer: JONES BUTCHERS Format Reference Number: 11

Machine Type: CX30 LS Rotation (0°, 90° or 180°) : 0°
Date: 22/9/93
Field Co–ordinates
Font Ref.
Name Code X1 Y1 X2 Y2
TEXT 1 0 003 195 144 153 O

TEXT 2 1
TEXT 3 2
SALES TEXT 1 8

9 — Label Formats
7 After completing Table 25.14 you are ready to program your new label
format data into the machine. Follow the procedure in Section 9.4.
8 After successfully programming your new label format, copy
Table 25.14 for the customer and keep the master yourself for record
purposes.
Figure 9.7 Example of Completed Field Measurements Table
Name Code x1 (→) y1 (↑) x2 (→) y2 (↑)
TEXT 1 0 1 130 48 102

TEXT 2 1 1 101 48 89
TEXT 3 2 1 88 48 77
SALES TEXT 1 8 18 46 48 41
DATE 1 4 1 57 22 52
DATE 2 3 1 46 17 42
UNIT PRICE 5 1 33 13 28
WEIGHT/ITEMS 6 14 33 30 28
TOTAL PRICE 7 31 33 48 28
BARCODE F 1 26 48 6
LEGEND 1 9 23 76 48 63
LEGEND 2 A 1 51 24 47
LEGEND 3 B 25 51 48 47
UNIT PRICE SYMBOL C 1 36 13 33
WEIGHT/ITEM SYMBOL D 14 36 30 33
TOTAL PRICE SYMBOL E 31 36 48 33
TARE G 23 57 48 52
TARE SYMBOLS H 23 62 48 58
UNIT PRICE 2 I 1 74 22 60
UNIT PRICE 2 SYMBOL J 1 76 22 74
TOTAL PRICE 2 K 1 64 22 58
TOTAL PRICE 2 SYMBOL L 1 68 22 64
OPERATOR NAME M 1 40 48 37
SALES TEXT 2 N

9 — Label Formats
Figure 9.8 Example of Completed Programmed Data Table
Customer: JONES BUTCHERS Format Reference Number: 11

Machine Type: CX30 LS Rotation (0°, 90° or 180°) : 0°
Date: 22/9/93
Font Ref
Ref.
TEXT 1 0 003 195 144 153 O
TEXT 2 1 003 152 144 133 O
TEXT 3 2 003 132 144 116 O
SALES TEXT 1 8 054 069 144 062 A
DATE 1 4 003 086 066 078 B
DATE 2 3 003 069 051 063 E
UNIT PRICE 5 003 050 039 042 E
WEIGHT/ITEMS 6 042 050 090 042 E
TOTAL PRICE 7 093 050 144 042 E
BARCODE F 003 039 144 009
LEGEND 1 9 069 114 144 095 A 39
LEGEND 2 A 003 077 072 071 A 38
LEGEND 3 B 075 077 144 071 A 37
UNIT PRICE SYMBOL C 003 054 039 050 D
WEIGHT/ITEM SYMBOL D 042 054 090 050 D
TOTAL PRICE SYMBOL E 093 054 144 050 D
TARE G 069 086 144 078 D
TARE SYMBOLS H 069 093 144 087 C
UNIT PRICE 2 I 003 111 066 104 D
UNIT PRICE 2 SYMBOL J 003 114 066 111 A
TOTAL PRICE 2 K 003 096 066 087 E
TOTAL PRICE 2 SYMBOL L 003 102 066 096 C
OPERATOR NAME M 003 060 144 056 C
SALES TEXT 2 N

9 — Label Formats
9.4 Edit Format (Menu Option)

New label formats can be programmed and existing ones edited in the
EDIT FORMAT option.
Before programming/editing please note the following:
In a field, if the co–ordinates of a text area remain unprogrammed (that is:
their value is 000 000 000 000 when ENTER is pressed), ENTER FONT
menu is omitted and next field is prompted for.
If the message INVALID ENTRY appears the co–ordinates are
unacceptable. Reassess them, then re–type them and press ENTER.
If the message FIELD OVERLAP appears fields are overlapping: if
necessary start again from Step 2 in the following procedure.
Figure 9.9 Co–ordinates (Commodity Display)

Y1 Y2
000 000 000 000
X1 X2
To program a new format or edit an existing one carry out the following (to exit at
any time press SHIFT then ENTER):
1 Go to the EDIT FORMAT option.
EDIT FORMAT
2 Press ENTER.
FORMAT REF 0
3 Type the number of the format you

:
wish to create/edit (refer to Table 9.1).
FORMAT REF 10
4 Press ENTER.
TEXT 1
5 Press ENTER.
000 000 000 000

9 — Label Formats
6 Type in the co–ordinates, if required

(refer to Figure 9.9).
002 240 147 118
7 Press ENTER.
ENTER FONT
8 Type in font required.
ENTER FONT D
9 Press ENTER.
TEXT 2
10 Repeat Steps 5 to 9 inclusive.
TEXT 3
SALES TEXT 1
DATE 1
DATE 2
UNIT PRICE
WEIGHT/ITEMS
TOTAL PRICE

9 — Label Formats

ENTER FONT is not prompted for as
the barcode does not have a font. BARCODE
LEGEND 1
LEGEND 2
LEGEND 3
UNITPRICE SYM
WEIGHT/ITEM SYM
TOTAL PRICE SYM
TARE
TARE SYMBOLS
UNIT PRICE 2
UNIT PRICE 2 SYM

9 — Label Formats
TOTAL PRICE 2
TOTAL PRICE 2 SYM
OPERATOR NAME
SALES TEXT 2
32 Press ENTER. (If LEGEND 1 has not

been programmed you will be
prompted for the next programmed LEGEND 1 REF 0
LEGEND. If no LEGEND fields have
been programmed go to Step 38.)
33 Type in the sales message reference

number.
LEGEND 1 REF 38

been programmed you will be
prompted for LEGEND 3. If LEGEND 2 REF 0
LEGEND 3 has not been programmed
go to Step 38.)

number.
LEGEND 2 REF 37

been programmed go to Step 38.)
LEGEND 3 REF 0

number.
LEGEND 3 REF 37

9 — Label Formats
38 Press ENTER. Programming has

finished.
ENTRY ACCEPTED
FORMAT REF 0
39 Press SHIFT then ENTER.
EDIT FORMAT
40 You can check your programming by

using the PRINT FORMAT option.
See Section 9.7.
If you wish to make alterations to the new format or you have made an error you
can edit the format by repeating this procedure.

9 — Label Formats
9.5 Clear Format (Menu Option)

This option clears all pre–programmed field data in any of the available 60 label
formats by setting the fields to 0 or default, as in an unprogrammed flexible label
format.
NOTE: Although pre–programmed label formats can be cleared, after a ’cold

start’ (refer to Section 5.5) they revert to their original
pre–programmed settings.
1 Go to the CLEAR FORMAT option.
CLEAR FORMAT
2 Press ENTER.
FORMAT REF 0
3 Type the number of the format you

wish to clear.
FORMAT REF 9
4 Press ENTER.
CLEARING . . . . .
FORMAT REF 0
5 Either clear another label format by

following Steps 3 and 4, or press
SHIFT then ENTER to exit. EDIT FORMAT

9 — Label Formats
9.6 Copy Format (Menu Option)

This option allows you to copy an existing label format.
1 Go to the COPY FORMAT option.
COPY FORMAT
2 Press ENTER.
FROM REF 0
3 Type in number of the label format you

wish to copy.
FROM REF 5
4 Press ENTER.
TO REF 0
5 Type in number of the label format in

which you wish to place the copy.
TO REF 14
6 Press ENTER.
COPIED
FROM REF 0
7 Either copy another label format by

following Steps 3 to 6, or press SHIFT
then ENTER to exit. COPY FORMAT

9 — Label Formats
9.7 Print Format (Menu Option)

See Figure 9.2 for examples.
This option prints out the selected label format in the form of boxes, each box
representing a label field which is identified by a single–digit code inside. The
STORE NAME is also printed, if programmed.
1 Go to the PRINT FORMAT option.
PRINT FORMAT
2 Press ENTER.
FORMAT REF 0
3 Type in the number of the label format

you wish to print.
FORMAT REF 7
4 Press ENTER. The label is printed. If

printing on a tally roll, make sure
machine is configured for continuous
printing (Machine X →
PRINTER SETUP → LABEL TYPE →
SEPARATE ? Y/N Y).
FORMAT REF 0
5 Either print another label format by

following Steps 3 and 4, or press
SHIFT then ENTER to exit. PRINT FORMAT

Section 10
Error Messages
Table of Contents:
10.1 Commodity Display Error Messages 10–3
10.2 TEST REPORT Error Number 10–13

10 — Error Messages
10.1 Commodity Display Error Messages

Error messages appear in the commodity display to indicate to the operator or
service engineer:
incorrect operation of the machine
faults with the machine’s hardware or software
faults on the network.
The error messages for the service engineer are a two digit number prefixed
with the letter A or E (for example: A03 or E17). The A messages indicate a
communications controller fault. Messages E07 to E12, E14 to E17 and E20
indicate a fault in the transfer of data between the scale and printer
microprocessors.
The following table gives a list of error messages with their meanings and any
action needed to rectify the cause.
Table 10.1 Commodity Display Error Messages
Message Meaning/What you should do

A01 See COMMAND ERROR.
A02 See TRAN LOST CNTRL2.
A03 See TOTS
O S LOST
OS CCNTRL1 and
a d TOTS
O S LOST
OS CNTRL2.
C
A04
A05 See DATA LOST
OS CCNTRL1 and
a d DATA LOST
OS CNTRL2.
C
A06
A07 See NO COMMS CNTRL1.
A08 See NO COMMS CNTRL2.
E01 See CALIBRATION LOST.
E02 See DISPLAY FAULT.
E03 See ANALOGUE FAILURE.
E04 See COMPUTING FAULT.
E05 See SYSTEM RAM FAULT.
E06 See SYSTEM ROM FAULT.
E07 See STORE NAME LOST.
E08 See FORMAT LOST.
E09 See PRINT DATA LOST.
E10 See PRINT MODE ERROR.
E11 See BCC ERROR.
E12 See INVALID REPLY.
E13 See NO PRINTER REPLY.
E14 See SIGN ON LOST.
E15 See SIGN OFF LOST.


E16 See PRINTER OVERFLOW.
E17 See TAB ERROR.
E18 See PRINT HEAD ERROR.
E19 See PRINT CHECK ERR.
E20 See PRINTER ERROR.
E21 See HARDWARE FAULT.
ALREADY ENTERED You are trying to enter a system number at a POS machine
when the number has already been entered, possibly by
another operator. The number can only be entered once.
ANALOGUE FAILURE Secure machines only. The software checks the accuracy
of the weighing system by switching in a known load
across the strain gauge bridge. The software then
compares the actual reading with the correct weight
reading stored in memory from calibration.
To rectify the fault:

1. Change the A/D PCB and re–calibrate. See
Sections 17 and 7.
2. If the problem persists change the transducer and
re–calibrate. See Sections 17 and 7.
s
BAD FILE FORMAT You are trying to load a file from the DCU which was set up
at an incompatible type of machine. Select the correct file
number.
BCC ERROR Indicates a problem has occurred in the transfer of data
between the scale and printer microprocessors.

1. Check the software version’s numbers are correct.
Particularly, check that the PROMX (IC10) version is the
correct one for the main core EPROMs (IC19 and IC20).
2. If the problem persists, a possible cause is a software
fault. Contact Avery Berkel head office with a full
description of the fault and a list of all software firmware
numbers.


CALIBRATION LOST The weighing constants stored in the EEPROM memory
have been corrupted. To rectify the problem either
re–calibrate the machine (See Section 7) or change the
main PCB (see Section 11). If you re–calibrate the
machine without changing the main PCB you must switch
the machine on and off a number of times to make sure the
problem does not occur again.
Note:
If the weighing system fails due to a problem with the
transducer or A/D PCB, the machine will power–up and
display either an underrange or overrange condition.
CANNOT USE TARE On a network with different capacity machines, you have
selected a PLU with stored tare which does not belong to
the machine. Select the correct PLU.
CHANGE ROLL ? You have changed from label to receipt mode or vice
versa. Check the correct type of printer roll is loaded.
CLEAR DISABLED The totals clear option is not available at your machine.
CLOSE DRAWER Displayed when the cash drawer alarm is activated. Close
drawer and turn alarm off. Only on machines configured
for Cash Drawer Detection.
COMMAND ERROR Indicates an error in the ISC communications protocol.
This can be due to a mixed network (that is: different
versions of software) or a software fault.
If the problem persists contact Avery Berkel head office

with a full description of the fault and a list of all software
firmware numbers.
COMPUTING FAULT Secure machines only. The software checks the internal
operation of the microprocessor. Indicates detection of an
internal computing fault. Change main PCB (see
Section 11).
CORRUPT PLU The PLU has developed a fault. Delete the PLU and
re–create it. Advise your local Avery Berkel service centre.
DATA LOST CNTRL1 Indicates comms controller 1 or 2 has lost data records;
probably due to a software fault.
DATA LOST CNTRL2 If the problem persists contact Avery Berkel head office
firmware numbers.
DCU DISCONNECTED You are attempting to use the DCU without it being plugged
in. Plug in the DCU and try again.
DEPT NOT ON MAP You are dumping the PLU file for a sub department which
does not have any machines. Re–select a valid
department or assign a slave to the sub department.


DISPLAY FAULT Secure machines only. The display data that is sent to the
head–up display PCB is checked. This indicates that the
data returned from the display PCB does not match the
original data sent to it.

1. Check that link LK4 on main PCB is correct for machine
type.
2. Check the display switch settings are correct.
3. Change the display PCBs and/or display loom. See
Sections NO TAG and 13.
4. If the problem persists change the main PCB. See
Section 11.
ENTER ALL ITEMS When switching a machine to local mode this message is
displayed to remind you to re–enter any uncompleted
transactions and print the receipt.
ERROR You are trying to enter a date or time which is not
acceptable. Set the machine to the correct date and time.
FIELD NOT FOUND When copying a PLU, the PLU you are creating has more
text areas than the PLU being copied.
FORMAT LOST See BCC ERROR.
HARDWARE FAULT This fault can occur at switch on, when the machine checks
the correct operation of the external RAM. Indicates a fault
in one of the ICs in the range IC11 to IC17.

1. Check that all of the DIL RAMs are fitted correctly in the
sockets.
2. If the problem persists replace all the DIL RAMs with
new ones.
3. If the problem still persists change the main PCB. See
Section 11.
ILLEGAL ENTRY You are trying to use the Add key with a weighed PLU
when your machine permits only the use of nonweighed
PLUs. Select an appropriate PLU.
The price entered for a nonweighed or departmental
PLU does not conform to price rounding criteria (that is:
multiples of the lowest currency denomination).
Re–programme the PLU.
INCOMPLETE FILE Indicates an error has occurred whilst loading a PLU file
from the DCU. Only PLUs up to the occurrence of the fault
are loaded. PLU totals stored by the machine are lost.


INVALID ENTRY You are trying to assign a key which has been switched
off. Re–programme the key.
You are trying to enter a tare value which is not a
multiple of the display division. Enter a correct tare value.
INVALID OPTION When checking the ID of an off–line slave you have
pressed ENTER before re–connecting the machine or
amending the network map.
You have tried to enter an incorrect barcode format.
You have tried to programme an option which is not
available at your machine.
INVALID PLU You have selected a counter service PLU when in
pre–pack mode. Select the correct PLU.
INVALID REPLY See BCC ERROR.
INVALID WEIGHT You are trying to weigh goods outside the machine’s
capacity.
You have selected a weighed PLU with no goods on the
machine.
LABEL FEED ERR The printer has run out of labels or is not feeding the
labels correctly. Check the printer.
You are trying to print a label on a receipt roll. Replace
the receipt roll with a label roll.
If using dark pre–printed labels, the dark printing may be
causing problems with the printer’s photodetector. On the
main PCB, set bit 7 of DIL switch SW1 to ON – see
Section 11.
LABEL NOT TAKEN You are trying to obtain a label before removing the
previous one.
LOCAL NOT CLEAR You cannot put the local machine back on the network as it
is storing outstanding transactions. Clear transactions first.
M/C MAP ERROR The ID of the machines operating on the network does not
match the programmed IDs. Check if a machine has been
switched off, disconnected or added to the network (see
Part 3 of the Users’ Handbooks).
NEGATIVE PLU You cannot refund a negative PLU, or when in label mode.
NETWORK ERROR The slave cannot communicate with the master. Check the
network map (see Part 3 of the Users’ Handbooks) and
cables. Ensure the master is switched on. Set the
machine to local mode (see Part 3 of the Users’
Handbooks).


NO COMMS CNTRL1 Indicates comms controller 1 (main comms controller) has
not been detected on the network. In this case comms
controller 2 is running the network.
Possible causes:
1. Faulty network cabling (within the machine housing the
comms controller 1).
2. The machine housing the comms controller 1 has been
switched off.
3. The wrong versions of software are fitted.
4. Faulty comms controller 1 PCB.

firmware numbers.
NO COMMS CNTRL2 Indicates comms controller 2 (back–up comms controller)
has not been detected by the network.
Possible causes:
1. Faulty network cabling.
2. The machine housing the comms controller PCB is
switched off.
3. The wrong versions of software are fitted.
4. Faulty comms controller PCB.

firmware numbers.
Note:
This message will be displayed even if a back–up comms
controller has not been fitted to the network. In this case
the message does not indicate an error condition and can
be ignored.
NO CUSTOMERS You cannot assign the transaction to your operator key
because you have not logged on the customer. Use the
HASH key to enter the customer’s number and then try
again.
NO LOCAL MODE The slave will not operate in local mode should the network
fail.
NON ZERO TOTALS When programming PLUs, you are trying to change the
PLU type (for example: weighed to nonweighed) before
clearing totals. Clear the totals for the PLU first.
NO PLUS, NO DUMP You are attempting to transfer a blank PLU file to the DCU
or a slave machine. Set up a new PLU file if required or
select the correct file.


NO POS You have not set up a POS machine on the network and
can only print a maximum of 500 receipts. Part 3 of the
Users’ Handbooks describes how to set up a POS
machine.
NO PRINTER REPLY Indicates no response from the printer microprocessor
when the scale microprocessor tries to communicate with
it.

1. Check the printer EPROM IC36 is the correct firmware
number. Check the access time is 150 ns or less. Check
the EPROM is fitted in the socket correctly.
2. To help identify the problem, Switch 1 of SW2 on the
main PCB can be swtiched on and off to initiate a test print.
This will indicate whether the printer is partly functioning.
Section 11.
NO SLAVES You are trying to copy the PLU file to the slave machines
when the master thinks that no slaves are on the network.
Enter the ID of on–line slaves at the master (see Part 3 of
the Users’ Handbooks).
NO SPACE LEFT You cannot enter any more characters in the text. Edit
the text.
You are trying to load a file from the DCU which exceeds
the available memory at the machine.
NOT FOUND The PLU entered does not exist. Ensure you entered the
correct number. Program the PLU.
NO TRANSACTIONS There are no current transactions assigned to your
operator key.
There are no outstanding transactions to be cleared.
NO TRANS MEMORY You cannot use the master. Connect another machine set
to sub department 0 to the master pin. Amend the network
map. Re–assign keys if necessary.
NO WEIGHT CHANGE You are trying to enter a transaction whilst the previously
weighed goods are still on the machine. Remove the
goods.
NT WGHT OVERFLOW You are trying to label items with a net weight of more than
9999 g. Split the items into smaller packs and label each
pack.
OUTSIDE RANGE You are trying to enter a number which is more or less than
that expected by the machine.
PAPER LOW The printer is low or out of paper. Replace the roll.
PICK UP INHIBITED You cannot use pick up because the value entered for the
pick up is greater than the amount in the drawer.


PLEASE WAIT The maximum number of operators are currently using
the machines on the network. Wait until an operator has
finished.
The machine is actioning a clear command or printing a
report.
PLU FILE ERROR This message appears after switching on the machine or
after amending the PLU file should it detect any corrupt
PLUs.
At a stand–alone machine, replace the file using the
DCU or re–create all the entries at the keyboard.
If this message appears at the master, swap the
machine with a slave set to sub department 0. Amend the
network map. Re–assign keys if necessary.
If this message appears at a slave, copy the PLU file to
the slave (see Part 3 of the Users’ Handbooks).
PLU FMT=XX/MC=YY The label format in PLU XX does not match the label
format entered at machine YY. Re–programme the PLU or
machine with the correct format.
PRICE OVERFLOW The value of the transaction or the subtotal exceeds
9999,99. If you are using an open PLU, ensure you
entered the correct unit price. If you are in receipt mode,
print the receipt for any current transactions.
PRINT CHECK ERR. Secure machines only. The software checks the valid
operation of the printer’s external EPROM program
memory. This error occurs if a checksum error is detected
in IC36.

1. Check the access time of EPROM IC36 is 150 ns or
less.
2. If the EPROM access time is correct, replace IC36 with
a new device.
3. If problem persists change the main PCB. See
Section 11.
PRINT DATA LOST See BCC ERROR.
PRINTER BUSY The printer is momentarily unable to print. Try again.
PRINTER ERROR See BCC ERROR.
PRINTER OVERFLOW See BCC ERROR.


PRINT HEAD ERROR Secure machines only. The data that is sent to the print
head is returned to the main PCB and checked against the
original data. If a complete match is not found this error is
displayed.

1. Check the print head loom.
2. Change the main PCB and/or the print head. See
Sections 11, and 19 or 20.
PRINT HEAD UP Lower the print head release lever.
PRINT LABEL You are using the Add key and have reached the maximum
number of transactions permitted.
PRINT MODE ERROR See BCC ERROR.
PRINT RECEIPT You cannot combine a refund or return with other
transactions. Print the receipt and then perform the refund
or return.
RECEIPT OVERFLOW You are trying to enter a transaction which would cause the
value of the receipt to exceed 9999,99. If you are using an
open PLU, ensure you entered the correct price. Print the
receipt and then enter the transaction.
REPORT DISABLED You cannot print this report at your machine.
SCALE OFF LINE You cannot use the machine because it has not been
entered onto the network map. Amend the map.
SIGN OFF LOST See BCC ERROR.
SIGN ON LOST See BCC ERROR.
SLAVE INHIBIT The slave is receiving the PLU file from the master and
cannot be used. Wait.
SLAVE NOT ON MAP You are trying to copy the PLU file to a slave machine
which is not on the network map. Amend the network map.
STORE NAME LOST See BCC ERROR.
SYMBOLS MISMATCH When symbols are suppressed, you cannot use a weighed
PLU with the lower price base. Select an appropriate PLU.
SYSTEM RAM FAULT Secure machines only. The software checks the internal
operation of the microprocessor’s memory. Indicates an
internal memory fault. Replace the main PCB (see
Section 11).


SYSTEM ROM FAULT Secure machines only. The software checks the valid
operation of the external EPROM program memories.
Indicates a checksum error in IC10, IC19 or IC20.

1. Check the access time of EPROM IC10 is 250 ns or
less.
2. Check the access time of EPROMs IC19 and IC20 are
150 ns or less.
3. If the EPROM access times are correct then all
EPROMs must be replaced.
Section 11.
TAB ERROR See BCC ERROR.
TARE OPERATING You have already entered a tare and have selected a PLU
with stored tare. Either cancel the tare or the PLU.
THIS IS ROM TEXT The text is factory programmed and cannot be altered.
TOTS LOST CNTRL1 Indicates comms controller 1 or 2 has lost some total
records; probably a software fault.
TOTS LOST CNTRL2 If the problem persists contact Avery Berkel head office
firmware numbers.
TRAN LOST CNTRL2 Indicates comms controller 2 has lost some transaction
records; probably a software fault.

firmware numbers.
TRANSACTION HALO The value of the transaction exceeds the value permitted
for the product. Use the OP key, see Part 1 of the Users’
Handbooks.
TRANSFER ERROR There is a communications fault with one of the machines
on the network, see Part 3 of the Users’ Handbooks.
TRANSMIT ERROR The DCU has no spare memory. Delete a file (see Part
2 of the Users’ Handbooks).
The machine and the DCU cannot communicate with
each other. Switch the machine off and on again.
TRANS. NOT CLEAR When checking a network error or moving a machine, this
message is displayed to show that the machine has
outstanding transactions.
UNDEFINED ERROR Printer fault.


WEIGHT BELOW MIN You are trying to complete a transaction with no goods on
the machine or the goods weigh less than the minimum
permitted.
WEIGHT UNSTEADY You are trying to weigh goods whilst the machine is
unsteady. Wait for the machine to become steady.
WRONG FILE TYPE The machine department, store ID or machine ID stored by
the DCU does not match that set at the machine.
Re–configure the machine. See Section 7.
10.2 TEST REPORT Error Number

If a communications controller detects a software error or system failure it is
indicated by a number printed on the TEST REPORT in place of the comms
controller software number. This number represents a specific error.
If the number appears on every TEST REPORT or, only periodically and the
system doesn’t work, contact Avery Berkel Technical Support and provide them
with a TEST REPORT containing the number. (To print a TEST REPORT:
Machine Z → TEST REPORT.)
NOTE: On first running a system it is normal for an error number to apear on

the TEST REPORT.

Section 11
Main PCB
Table of Contents:
11.2.1 Removing the main PCB (CX20/CX30) 11–6
11.2.2 Fitting the main PCB (CX20/CX30) 11–6
11.2.3 Removing the main PCB (CX20 W) 11–10
11.2.4 Fitting the main PCB (CX20 W) 11–10
11.2.5 Removing the main PCB (CX34) 11–11
11.2.6 Fitting the main PCB (CX34) 11–11
11.2.7 Replacing the main PCB 11–14

11 — Main PCB
11.1 Description
The main PCB carries all the circuitry required to scan and operate the keyboard
and displays, to perform calculations and to drive the printer. For a general
description of the function, refer to Section 2.
The main PCB carries a smaller PCB, the analogue–to–digital converter (A/D).
The A/D PCB converts the analogue signals received from the transducer and
converts it into digital form for use by the main PCB.
Electrical connectors on the main PCB are provided to connect with peripheral
devices (such as displays, printers, keyboard, cash drawer, and others). The
peripherals connected to the electrical connectors are application–specific and
some connectors will be unused in certain applications.
The main PCB has many optional features to make it suitable for a wide variety
of configurations and to provide various levels of operating power. Some of
these features are enabled by firmware (EPROM and ASIC) and some by
hardware changes (the setting of links and DIL switches). The following
information should be used for reference:
Configuration data is identified in Section 6.
PCB mounted connectors and their functions are identified in Figure 11.1
and Table 11.1.
DIL switches and their functions are identified in Figure 11.2 and
Table 11.3.
Links and their functions are identified in Figure 11.3 and Table 11.4.
Integrated circuits and their functions are identified in Figure 11.4.

11 — Main PCB
Figure 11.1 Main PCB – Electrical Connections
See Tables 11.1 and 11.2.

11 — Main PCB
Table 11.1 Main PCB – Electrical Connector Functions (CX20/CX30)
PL2 Head–up display (standard on CX30, optional CX20)

PL3 Printer data (receipt printer)
PL4 Keyboard
PL6 Printer data (label and receipt printer) – 3 dots/mm print head
PL7 Printer motor supply (receipt, and label and receipt printers)
PL8 Power supply
PL9 Cashdrawer interface
PL12 Printer disable connector
PL13 A/D PCB interface
PL14 Comms controller PCB interface
PL15 ISC interface
PL16 Paper detection (microswitch of receipt printer; photodetector of label
and receipt printer)
PL17 LCD interface (CX20 only)
PL18 Keyswitch and DCU/external keyboard interface
PL19 Display, vendor side (CX20 only)
PL20 Display, customer side (CX20 only)
SK1 Test point for printer motor current
Table 11.2 Main PCB – Electrical Connector Functions (CX20 W)
PL2 Not used

PL3 Not used
PL4 Keyboard
PL6 Printer data
PL7 Printer motor supply
PL8 Power supply
PL9 Wrapper start output
PL12 Label taken input
PL13 A/D PCB interface
PL14 Output power source for RS232 interface PCB
PL15 ISC interface
PL16 Paper detection (microswitch of receipt printer; photodetector of label
and receipt printer)
PL17 LCD interface
PL18 Output to RS232 interface PCB
PL19 Display, vendor side
PL20 Not used
SK1 Test point for printer motor current

11 — Main PCB
11.2 Servicing
11.2.1 Removing the main PCB (CX20/CX30)

To remove the main PCB on the CX20/CX30, proceed as follows:
1 Make back–up of unit data (refer to Part 2, Programming Handbook for
use of the DCU).
3 Remove case (refer to Section 3).
4 Remove cross assembly by removing two socket head screws and
washers attaching it to transducer.
5 Switch off battery on main PCB (DIL switch SW4, Bit 4 to OFF (0)).
6 CX20 only: if main PCB is to be changed for new part, remove displays
and display mounting clips (refer to Section 7).
7 Remove two clamps attaching main PCB to four chassis pillars by
removing four special nuts.
8 Lift main PCB as necessary to gain access for following operations:
avoid any strain to connecting cables during these operations.
9 Disconnect all cables attaching to main PCB (refer to Figure 11.1)
except four–wire cable assembly (attached to A/D PCB which is
mounted on component side of main PCB) and keyboard loom.
Connecting cables will vary according to model and specification of
individual machine.
10 Detach A/D PCB from main PCB by compressing barb on each of four
plastic clips between A/D PCB and main PCB: pull A/D PCB away in
straight direction, to avoid causing damage to PCB mounted electrical
connectors.
11 Lift main PCB away from unit.
11.2.2 Fitting the main PCB (CX20/CX30)

To fit main PCB to the CX20/CX30, proceed as follows:
1 Attach A/D PCB to main PCB by fitting it over interfacing electrical
connector and over four plastic clips between A/D PCB and main PCB:
check that barb on each plastic clip engages correctly.
2 Connect all cables attaching to PCB (refer to Figure 11.1 and
Table 11.1). Connecting cables will vary according to model and
specification of individual machine. Note that transducer cable is routed
behind rear left–hand pillar (main PCB support pillar).
3 Position main PCB approximately in correct position over unit, and
check that it aligns over overload stops (two on chassis pillars, and two
on printer spine).
4 Settle main PCB in position over transducer and four chassis pillars:
check that cables are not trapped or under any mechanical strain.

11 — Main PCB
5 Fit two clamps over main PCB and four chassis pillars and secure by
fitting four special nuts to pillars (chamfer on special nuts face down, to
match holes in main PCB). Take care not to move stop bolts set in
head of chassis pillars: if moved, refer to Section 7.
6 CX20 only: if removed, fit displays and display mounting clips (refer to
Section 7).
7 Switch on battery on main PCB (DIL switch SW4, Bit 4 to ON (1)).
8 Fit cross assembly by fitting two socket head screws attaching it to
transducer: check that arrow on cross assembly points towards front
(vendor) side of unit.
9 Fit case (refer to Section 3).

11 — Main PCB
Figure 11.2 Main PCB – DIL Switches and Potentiometers

11 — Main PCB
Table 11.3 Main PCB – DIL Switch and Potentiometer Functions
BIT
SW1 1 Printer test initiate
(momentarily on = generate test print)
2 Print mode default on power–up
(on = receipt mode)
3 Take–up spool
(on = will run in receipt mode)
4 Print head security test
(off = no test)
5 Paper out enable/disable
(off = inhibited)
6 Bar code length
(off = short)
7 Dark pre–printed labels
(off = standard position; on = dark pre–printed
labels)
8 Axiom (receipt)/Rohm (label and receipt) select
(off = Rohm; on = Axiom)
SW4 1 (should not be used)
2 Service configuration mode
(on = service configuration mode)
3 (should not be used)
4 Battery
(on = battery on)
RV3 – Adjust current supply to stepper motor of printer
NOTE: On pre–Phase 1.3 machines, bit 7 on DIL switch SW1 is: Serial I/O
baud rate (off = 10,416 baud)

11 — Main PCB
11.2.3 Removing the main PCB (CX20 W)

To remove the main PCB on the CX20 W, proceed as follows:
use of the DCU).
Accessible in printer compartment, through hole in printer spine.
5 If main PCB is to be changed for new part, remove display and display
brackets (refer to Section 12).
6 Remove two clamps attaching main PCB to four chassis pillars by
removing four special nuts.
7 Lift main PCB as necessary to gain access for following operations:
avoid any strain to connecting cables during these operations.
8 Disconnect all cables attached to main PCB (refer to Figure 11.1)
except four–wire cable assembly (attached to A/D PCB which is
mounted on component side of main PCB) and keyboard loom.
9 Detach A/D PCB from main PCB by compressing barb on each of four
plastic clips between A/D PCB and main PCB: pull A/D PCB away in
straight direction, to avoid causing damage to PCB mounted electrical
connectors.
10 Lift main PCB away from unit.
11.2.4 Fitting the main PCB (CX20 W)

To fit main PCB to the CX20 W, proceed as follows:
connector and over four plastic clips between A/D PCB and main PCB:
check that barb on each plastic clip engages correctly.
2 Connect all cables attaching to PCB (refer to Figure 11.1 and
Table 11.1). Connecting cables will vary according to model and
specification of individual machine. Note that transducer cable is routed
behind rear left–hand pillar (main PCB support pillar).
3 Position main PCB approximately in correct position over unit, and
check that it aligns over overload stops (two on chassis pillars, and two
on printer spine).
4 Settle main PCB in position over transducer and four chassis pillars:
check that cables are not trapped or under any mechanical strain.
5 Fit two clamps over main PCB and four chassis pillars and secure by
fitting four special nuts to pillars (chamfer on special nuts face down, to
match holes in main PCB). Take care not to move stop bolts set in
head of chassis pillars: if moved, refer to Section 7.
6 CX20 only: if removed, fit displays and display mounting clips (refer to
Section 7).

11 — Main PCB

8 Fit cross assembly by fitting two socket head screws attaching it to
transducer: check that arrow on cross assembly points towards front
(vendor) side of unit.
11.2.5 Removing the main PCB (CX34)

To remove the main PCB on the CX34, proceed as follows:
use of the DCU).
2 Switch off machine and isolate it fro the mains power supply.
3 Remove front housing (refer to Section 3).
4 Gain access to the main PCB side of the chassis and remove the
A/D PCB protection plate by removing the two securing screws from the
chassis.
5 Remove the A/D PCB: disconnect the four transducer cables from
terminal block TB1 (noting their connections); compress barb on each
of the four plastic pillars which support A/D PCB and pull A/D PCB
away in straight direction, to avoid causing damage to PCB–mounted
electrical connectors.
7 Disconnect all cables attaching to main PCB (refer to Figure 11.1).
individual machine.
8 Remove the four screws, one at each corner, securing main PCB to
pillars on chassis and lift main PCB away from unit.
11.2.6 Fitting the main PCB (CX34)

To fit main PCB to the CX34, proceed as follows:
1 Place main PCB on chassis pillars, one at each corner, and secure
using the four screws.
2 Connect all cables to main PCB (refer to Figure 11.1 and Table 11.1).
individual machine.
connector (PL1 on A/D PCB) and over four plastic pillars: check that
barb on each plastic pillar engages correctly. Connect the four
transducer cables to TB1.
5 Fit the A/D protection plate to the chassis using the two screws.
6 Fit front housing (refer to Section 3).

11 — Main PCB
Figure 11.3 Main PCB – Location of Links
LK1
LK19
1
LINK NUMBERING
– TYPICAL LINK 2–3 MADE
Set links according to 1

configuration for unit. LINK 1–2 MADE

11 — Main PCB
Table 11.4 Main PCB – Link Functions
Link Type Description

LK1 2–way DC motor boost
(1–2 = selected)
LK2 2–way Scale PROMX select
(1–2 = 27 512 – standard fit)
LK3 2–way Scale 128K/32K SRAM select
(1–2 = 128K – standard fit; 2–3 = 32K – never used)
LK4 1–way Serial display data return
(normally omitted, only fitted for 2x plug–in, integral CX20
displays)
LK5 1–way Rohm (label and receipt) printhead select
(fitted for Rohm printer)
LK7 2–way In–line display metric/avoir grid select
(1–2 = metric display – CX20 only)
LK8 2–way Printer EPROM select
(2–3 = 27 512 – standard fit)
(2–3 = 27 512 – standard fit)
LK10 2–way Scale EPROM select
(2–3 = 27C101 – normal fit, omitted for x2 fit (IC19 and
IC20))
LK11 2–way CX20/CX30 mode select
(1–2 = CX30 mode select)
(1–2 = 27C101 (IC19 and IC20))
LK13 2–way Metric/Avoir grid select – CX20 plug–in, integral displays only
(2–3 = Metric display)
LK14 1–way Switch 1 disable
(normally omitted)
LK17 1–way A/D interface select
(fitted for dual slope A/D convertor, standard fit)
(2–3 = 27C101 (IC19 and IC20))
LK19 2–way Axiom (receipt)/Rohm (label and receipt) printer select
(1–2 = Rohm printer)

11 — Main PCB
11.2.7 Replacing the main PCB

In the event of a malfunction on the main PCB, it should be returned for
exchange, as follows:
1 Remove main PCB (refer to Section 11.2.1, 11.2.3 or 11.2.5, as
appropriate).
2 On receipt of new main PCB, check correct firmware is fitted, as
follows:
check part number of main PCB
check type of printer EPROM is fitted
check correct type of main EPROMs are fitted
check correct type of PROMX is fitted
check correct RAM is fitted
check, before fitting, that battery is switched off (to be switched on
after main PCB has been fitted)
check and set all DIL switches
check and set all jumper links.
3 Fit main PCB (refer to Section 11.2.2, 11.2.4 or 11.2.6, as appropriate).
4 At power up, set configuration data (refer to Section 6).
5 Calibrate machine (refer to Section 7).
6 Test unit and adjust printer motor current (refer to Section 19 or 20, as
appropriate).
7 If data was backed–up, load stored data (refer to Part 2, Programming
Handbook for use of the DCU).

11 — Main PCB
Figure 11.4 Main PCB – Location of Integrated Circuits
RAM bank. Where not fully populated,

fill from right (IC17) to left (IC12).
System PROMs PROMX
IC10
IC12 IC13 IC14 IC16 IC17
IC20 IC19
IC18
IC36
Printer PROM Central microprocessor

Section 12
Display (CX20)
Table of Contents:
12.2 Testing 12–4
12.3.1 Removing an integral display PCB 12–5
12.3.2 Fitting an integral display PCB 12–5
12.3.3 Removing a tower mounted display PCB 12–6
12.3.4 Fitting a tower mounted display PCB 12–6

12 — Displays (CX20)
12.1 Description
There are two displays used on the CX20 unit, one on the vendor side (front) of
the unit and one on the customer side (rear). The two display units are identical
but, by software control, operator–prompt data is not displayed on the customer
display.
The CX20 W has only one display, which is on the vendor side.
The display on the vendor side is supplemented by an LCD unit (refer to
Section 2).
Figure 12.1 Display – FIP Type (CX20)
Each display is a fluorescent indicator panel (FIP) manufactured as a strip–line

unit. It has 20 numeric character positions arranged in a single, horizontal line.
The characters are 12,7 mm (0.5 in) high. When a character segment is
energized, it is displayed in a bright green colour; when a character segment is
not energized, it is almost invisible.
Each display is clipped to the main PCB by two plastic display brackets. The
brackets are different for the front and rear positions. The display face is visible
through an aperture in the unit case.
On the tower mounted version the customer display is fitted inside a housing
which is mounted on two columns. The columns are fitted at the rear of the
machine.
Each display has an integral ribbon cable terminated by a flying in–line
connector at the free end. The main PCB has two electrical connectors, one for
each display.
Each display is driven by display driver circuitry on the main PCB. The display is
strobe–scanned by the same scanning source as that which scans the
keyboard.

Figure 12.2 Display Brackets
Display bracket, front

(vendor side)
Display bracket, rear

(customer side)
12.2 Testing
The displays are check–scanned during boot–up. All numeric characters will
display progressively the number sequence from 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 and 0.
This should be observed to ensure that all display segments and display drivers
are working correctly.

12.3 Servicing
WARNING

Caution
Before adjusting the DIL switches on the display PCBs,

switch the machine OFF and leave for at least six
minutes. This prevents damage occurring to the display
drivers.
12.3.1 Removing an integral display PCB

To remove an integral display, proceed as follows:
2 Remove unit case (refer to Section 3).
3 Release display panel from the two display brackets attaching it to main
PCB.
4 Disconnect display loom from main PCB, PL20 for customer display
and PL19 for vendor display (CX20 W has vendor display only).
5 If necessary, release display brackets (two) from main PCB.
12.3.2 Fitting an integral display PCB

To fit an integral display, proceed as follows:
1 If removed, fit display brackets to main PCB (refer to Figure 12.2).
2 Connect loom and connect it to applicable jumper/PCB connector
(PL20 for customer display, PL19 for vendor display).
3 Position display in display brackets attached to main PCB, and snap–fit.
4 Fit unit case (refer to Section 3).

12.3.3 Removing a tower mounted display PCB

To remove a tower mounted display, proceed as follows:
2 Remove a display screen by prising it away from the display housing.
3 Remove the two screws securing the display PCB, and free it from the
housing by easing it down from under the two securing brackets.
Completely remove the display PCB by disconnecting the display loom.
12.3.4 Fitting a tower mounted display PCB

To fit a tower mounted display, proceed as follows:
1 Connect the display loom to the new display PCB. Move the display
PCB into position by easing it under and behind the two securing tabs
(top of display housing). Secure the display PCB at the two bottom
corners with the two screws.
2 Fit the display screen (push fit).

Section 13
Display (CX30/CX34)
Table of Contents:
13.2 Testing 13–5
13.3 Configuration Data 13–5
13.4.3 Removing a display assembly (CX30) 13–11
13.4.4 Fitting a display assembly (CX30) 13–12

13 — Display (CX30/CX34)
13.1 Description
The CX30/CX34 machines have similar displays. Each machine has two
displays: one at the front of the machine (vendor) and one at the rear
(customer). On the CX30 both displays are mounted in a housing on top of a
double column arrangement (single column on the CX30 TK machine) fitted to
the rear of the machine. The displays in the CX34 are integral and are mounted
in the front and rear housings.
A display aspect comprises a display PCB fitted behind a translucent screen.
The screen obscures the display PCB so that only its energized characters are
visible. One display faces the customer, and the other display faces the vendor.
Both displays are identical, but operator prompt and error advice data is
suppressed from display on the customer side.
Each display comprises a PCB on which is mounted:
five fluorescent indicator panels (FIPs)
a number of LEDs (depending on unit variant)
a connector (at the rear)
three banks of DIL switches
a small number of electronic components (resistors, capacitors, and two
integrated circuits).
Figure 13.1 Display (CX30)
The LEDs indicate machine status, and legends printed on the screen adjacent
to each LED will identify these to the operator. The integrated circuits control
the configuration of the displays in accordance with the switch settings, and
translate the raw display data for use by the indicating panels. The display is
strobe–scanned by the same scanning source as that which scans the
keyboard.
The ribbon jumper cable connects between the main PCB of the unit and the
rear of the vendor display. The customer display receives power and data from
a second termination of the jumper cable supplying the vendor display: the
ribbon cable feeding the vendor display is continued through the first termination
to the second termination.

On the metric displays four of the indicator panels (top row and bottom left) have
six numeric–only characters, with each character accompanied by underline
( _ ), comma ( , ) and full point ( . ) punctuation/notation marks. The sixth
character also bears the 1/2 fraction.
Figure 13.2 Display (CX34)
Display (vendor)
On the avoir displays the upper left indicator panel has five numeric–only
characters, each accompanied by a comma/full point. The third character
includes a decimal point. The sixth (rightmost) position has an “8/8” variable
fraction display, capable of showing any x/8 or x/4 fractions. The three other
six–digit indicator panels are the same as for the metric displays.
The fifth indicator panel is a 16–character alpha–numeric display, each
character of which has 16 segments arranged in ‘boxed starburst’ fashion. Each
character is accompanied by a leading apostrophe mark ( ’ ), a comma ( , ) and
a full point ( . ).
The use of Imperial or continental numeric notation (whether a comma or full
point is used to indicate a decimal point or thousand marker) is determined by
switches, which are configured to suit the country where the machine is
purchased.
Figure 13.3 Display PCB (Metric Multi–line)
LED CON1 (other side of PCB)

Vacuum fluorescent display
Switch

13.2 Testing
The displays are check–scanned during power–up. Initially, all segments and
the LED are energized. All characters will then display progressively the number
sequence 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 and 0. This should be observed to ensure that
all display segments and display drivers are working correctly. This function can
also be accessed from the Test key on the keyboard (see appropriate Operators’
Handbook). The Avoir display has a 9/8 fraction character in which one
segment is not energised.
13.3 Configuration Data
Caution
Do not adjust the display PCB switch settings with the

machine powered up as this will damage the display
drivers.
See Tables 13.1 to 13.4 for switch settings and LED allocation for both metric
and avoir display PCBs.
Figure 13.4 Display PCB – Switches and LEDs
Brown Red
1 2
A B
A B
2
SW1 SW3
1
A B D1 CON1 (other
SW2 side of PCB)
D1A
D2 D4 D6 D7
D3 D5

Table 13.1 Metric Multi–line Display PCB – Switch Settings
Vendor
Part Number, Description and Decimal SW1 SW2 SW3
Point/Comma
71014–372 Decimal Point 1 2 2
Price Base LEDs A B A
Comma A B B
Tare Transaction LEDs A B A
Comma A B B
Price Base LEDs A B A
Comma A B B
Tare Transaction LEDs A B A
Comma A B B
CX22 Price Base LEDs A B A
Comma A B B
CX22 Tare Transaction LEDs A B A
Comma A B B
Customer
Part Number, Description and Decimal SW1 SW2 SW3
Point/Comma
Price Base LEDs 1 2 1
Comma A B B
Tare Transaction LEDs 1 2 1
Comma A B B
Price Base LEDs 1 2 1
Comma A B B
Tare Transaction LEDs 1 2 1
Comma A B B
CX22 Price Base LEDs 1 2 1
Comma A B B
CX22 Tare Transaction LEDs 1 2 1
Comma A B B

Table 13.2 Metric Multi–line Display PCB – LED Allocation
Customer and Vendor Display PCBs – LED Allocation

Part Number and D1 D1A D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
Description
71014–372
Price Base LEDs
71014–373
Tare Transaction LEDs
71014–520
Price Base LEDs
71014–521
Tare Transaction LEDs
71014–566
CX22 Price Base LEDs
71014–567
CX22 Tare Transaction LEDs
71014–573
CX22 Customer Price Base LEDs
71014–574
CX22 Customer Tare Trans. LEDs
Key: Black circle F indicates LED is fitted to PCB.

Table 13.3 Avoir Multi–line Display PCB – Switch Settings
Vendor
Part Number and Description SW1 SW2 SW3
71014–353: UK Avoir Price Base LEDs A B 1 2 A 2
71014–354: UK Avoir Tare Transaction A B 1 2 A 2
LEDs
71014–518: UK Price Base LEDs A B 1 2 A 2
71014–519: UK Avoir Tare Transaction A B 1 2 A 2
LEDs
71014–559: CX22 UK Avoir Price Base A B 1 2 A 2
LEDs
71014–560: CX22 UK Avoir Tare A B 1 2 A 2
Transaction LEDs
Customer
Part Number and Description SW1 SW2 SW3
71014–353: UK Avoir Price Base LEDs 1 2 1 2 1 2
71014–354: UK Avoir Tare Transaction 1 2 1 2 1 2
LEDs
71014–518: UK Price Base LEDs 1 2 1 2 1 2
71014–519: UK Avoir Tare Transaction 1 2 1 2 1 2
LEDs
71014–571: CX22 Customer Price Base 1 2 1 2 1 2
LEDs
71014–572: CX22 Customer Tare LEDs 1 2 1 2 1 2

Table 13.4 Avoir Multi–line Display PCB – LED Allocation
Customer and Vendor Display PCBs – LED Allocation

Part Number and D1 D1A D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
Description
71014–353
Price Base LEDs
71014–354
Tare LEDs
71014–518
Price Base LEDs
71014–519
Tare LEDs
71014–559
CX22 Price Base LEDs
71014–560
CX22 Tare LEDs
71014–571
CX22 Customer Price Base LEDs
71014–572
CX22 Customer Tare LEDs
Key: Black circle F indicates LED is fitted to PCB.

13.4 Servicing
WARNING
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES EXIST INSIDE THE UNIT.

BEFORE REMOVING THE COVER, ENSURE THAT MAINS
POWER IS DISCONNECTED COMPLETELY. EXCEPT
WHERE SPECIFIED IN THESE PROCEDURES, DO NOT
APPLY POWER TO THE UNIT WHEN THE COVER IS
REMOVED.
Caution
Do not adjust the display PCB switch settings with the

machine powered up as this will damage the display
drivers.
13.4.1 Removing a display PCB (CX30)

To remove a display PCB, proceed as follows:
1 Switch off the machine and isolate it from the mains power supply.
2 Remove applicable screen (pull off).
3 Detach display PCB by removing two Posidrive screws at the bottom
corners of display PCB: support the housing behind the screws. Then
remove display PCB from under two tabs of display housing: support
display PCB as it is released.
4 Disconnect electrical connector from rear of display PCB.
5 If fitting new display PCB, make written note of switch settings on two
DIL switches on display PCB, so that these settings are transferred to
new display PCB. Also note installed position (vendor or customer).
6 If removing both display PCBs temporarily, attach label to each stating
installed position (vendor or customer).
13.4.2 Fitting a display PCB (CX30)

To fit a display PCB, proceed as follows:
1 Connect display PCB to electrical connector.
2 Fit display PCB under two tabs of display housing and secure using two
Posidrive screws in the bottom corners: support the housing behind the
screws while you are fitting them.
3 If necessary, set DIL switches (refer to Tables 13.1 to 13.4, depending
on country).
4 Fit screen (push fit), noting that small gap in screen rim is to be at the
lower edge.
5 When unit is powered–up, observe display function.

13.4.3 Removing a display assembly (CX30)

To remove display assembly complete, proceed as follows:
2 Remove closure plate at bottom of column casting by removing
Posidrive screw and shakeproof washer.
3 Remove display assembly complete from unit by detaching column
casting from unit base by removing three sets of Posidrive screws and
plain washers. Carefully ease the display assembly away from unit until
the display loom interconnection is easily accessible. Disconnect the
display loom at the interconnection, so that display assembly is
completely detached from unit.
4 Remove both display PCBs (refer to Section 13.4.1).
5 Detach display housing by removing two sets of Posidrive screws,
shakeproof washers and plain washers.
6 Remove column from column casting by removing two sets of Posidrive
screws and shakeproof washers.
7 Feed display loom from inside of display housing, through masking
plate, out through bottom of right–hand column and then out through
column casting.
Figure 13.5 Display (CX30) – Exploded
Display housing
Display PCB
Securing screw,
display PCB
Display screen
Masking plate
Display loom
Column
Column casting
Ferrite sleeve
Closure plate

13.4.4 Fitting a display assembly (CX30)

To fit display assembly complete, proceed as follows:
1 Fit column to column casting using two sets of Posidrive screws and
shakeproof washers.
2 Feed display loom (end with single connector) down through display
housing, masking plate, right–hand side of column and through column
casting.
3 Feed the two connectors at the end of the display loom through the slot
in the bottom of the display housing.
4 Attach display housing using two sets of Posidrive screws, shakeproof
washers and plain washers: this also secures masking plate in position
between columns and display housing.
5 Fit both indicator panels (refer to Section 13.4.2).
6 Connect both ends of display loom together by ensuring connector
(from main PCB) protrudes from tunnel in unit, then offer up the base of
the display assembly to the tunnel in unit so that the display loom can
be connected: connect the display loom.
7 Carefully feed display loom through tunnel in unit. Fit display assembly
complete to unit by attaching column casting to unit base using three
sets of Posidrive screws and shakeproof washers.
8 Fit closure plate at bottom of column casting using Posidrive screw and
shakeproof washer.
9 Test display function (refer to Section 8).
13.4.5 Removing a display PCB (CX34)

To remove a display PCB, proceed as follows:
1 Switch off machine and isolate it from the power supply.
2 Remove front housing (refer to Section 13.4.1). If you are removing the
customer display PCB, remove rear housing also.
3 Remove display PCB complete with brackets by removing the four
screws securing them to the pillars inside the housing.
4 Remove securing brackets by prising out the domed–headed insert of
the two–piece rivet (two per bracket).
5 If fitting new display PCB, make written note of switch settings on two
DIL switches on display PCB, so that these settings are transferred to
new display PCB.

13.4.6 Fitting a display PCB (CX34)

To fit a display PCB, proceed as follows:
1 Fit both securing brackets to the display PCB using the two–piece
rivets.
2 Fit display PCB to pillars behind aperture, inside housing, by using the
four screws through the securing brackets.
3 Re–assemble unit (refer to Section 13.4.2).
4 When unit is powered–up, observe display function.

Section 14
Keyboard
Table of Contents:
14.2 Testing 14–4
14.3.1 Removing a keyboard (CX20/CX30) 14–4
14.3.2 Fitting a keyboard (CX20/CX30) 14–5
14.3.3 Removing a keyboard (CX34) 14–5
14.3.4 Fitting a keyboard (CX34) 14–6

14 — Keyboard
Figure 14.1 Keyboard
Backing paper (protecting

Warning label self–adhesive material)
Keyboard surface
WARNING
TACTILE MEMBRANE SWITCHES CAN
BE EASILY DAMAGED UNTIL FIXED TO A
RIGID BACKING. DO NOT OPERATE
UNLESS LYING ON A FLAT SMOOTH
SURFACE. TAKE CARE NOT TO BEND
MEMBRANE IN SWITCH AREAS WHEN
REMOVING BACKING PAPER AND
FIXING IN POSITION.
Ribbon cable
(acetate) Earth strap
14.1 Description
The keyboard is a tactile type having 69 (CX20), 125 (CX30) or 80 (CX34) key
positions. Each key position is at an intersection of the lattice. The keyboard is
mounted on the unit case at the vendor side of the unit.
The keyboard is connected to the main PCB of the unit by a flying connector.
The keyboard end of the flying connector is an acetate ribbon cable terminated
in a 24–pin male flying connector. The main PCB also has a ribbon cable,
encircled by a ferrite core (for spike suppression), terminated by a 24–pin female
flying connector. The keyboard has an earth strip which is connected to the
inside of the cover (CX20/CX30) or front housing (CX34) behind the keyboard;
from there an earth lead is connected to the base of the machine.
Pressing a key position causes two of the metal laminates to contact each other.
Keyboard operation is tactile, given by the ‘oil can’ key operation. The keyboard
is strobe–scanned electronically to detect key depression: the scanning source
is the same scanning source as that which scans the unit display.
The keyboard is self–adhesive and, if removed from the unit case, will be
damaged beyond further use. Do not attempt to operate the keys of a keyboard
which is not fitted to a unit: to do so will distort permanently the laminates of the
keyboard and make it unfit for further use.

14 — Keyboard
An operator overlay is adhered to the keyboard on which is printed function key,

numeric and blank legends. The blank legend positions can be overwritten with
wax crayon by the operator to match data programmed by the operator. A
protective plastic cover is fitted in front of the keyboard. A programming overlay,
printed with programming key data, is supplied loose. When programming is
required the programming overlay is placed in front of the keyboard, behind
protective cover.
14.2 Testing
The keyboard is check–scanned during power–up.
14.3 Servicing
WARNING

Caution
Tactile membrane switches can be easily damaged until

fixed to a rigid backing. DO NOT operate unless lying on
a flat smooth surface. Take care not to bend membrane
in switch areas when removing backing paper and fixing
in position.
14.3.1 Removing a keyboard (CX20/CX30)

To remove a keyboard from CX20/CX30, proceed as follows:
2 Remove unit case (refer to Section 3).
3 Disconnect keyboard/main PCB flying connector (jumper cable from
PL4) at vendor side of case.
4 Release plastic bezel covering keyboard by pulling upper edge away
from case.
5 Disconnect earth strap from inside case by removing the screw and two
washers (either side of earth strap): retain earth braid (case to power
utility bracket).
6 Peel off keyboard (with plastic sheet) from cover and completely
remove by pulling keyboard connector and earth strap through slot in
cover.

14 — Keyboard
14.3.2 Fitting a keyboard (CX20/CX30)

To fit a keyboard to CX20/CX30, proceed as follows:
1 Clean case surface.
2 Remove backing paper from rear of new keyboard to reveal
self–adhesive material (do not press keyboard pads until keyboard is
fitted to case of unit: to do so will distort permanently keyboard
laminates).
3 Check that keyboard is correct way up (ribbon cable to bottom) and
position in case aperture, with ribbon cable and earth strap located
through slot in case aperture. Lightly press keyboard to make good
contact with unit case.
4 Fit overlay.
5 Fit plastic bezel covering keyboard by locating upper edge and then
snap–fitting lower edge into position on case.
6 Connect earth strap to inside case with the screw and two washers:
washer either side of earth strap and earth braid nearest cover.
7 Connect keyboard/main PCB flying connector (jumper cable from PL4)
at vendor side of case.
8 Fit unit case (refer to Section 3).
14.3.3 Removing a keyboard (CX34)

To remove a keyboard from CX34, proceed as follows:
3 Remove rubber securing strips from top and bottom of keyboard.
4 Disconnect earth strap from inside case by removing the screw and two
washers (plain and shakeproof) and earth braid (case to power utility
bracket).
5 Remove the connector at the end of the keyboard’s acetate ribbon
cable.
6 Peel off keyboard (with plastic sheet) from cover and completely
remove by pulling keyboard connector and earth strap through slot in
cover.

14 — Keyboard
14.3.4 Fitting a keyboard (CX34)

To fit a keyboard to CX34, proceed as follows:
1 Clean case surface.
2 Remove backing paper from rear of new keyboard to reveal
self–adhesive material (do not press keyboard pads until keyboard is
fitted to case of unit: to do so will distort permanently keyboard
laminates).
3 Check that keyboard is correct way up (ribbon cable to bottom) and
position in case aperture, with ribbon cable and earth strap located
through slot in case aperture. Lightly press keyboard to make good
contact with unit case.
4 Fit rubber strips, top and bottom of keyboard.
Figure 14.2 Keyboard Earthing Arrangement
Screw
Shakeproof
washer
Keyboard earth strap

(with metal strip insert)
Keyboard earth braid
Bare surface of metal

strip inside earth strap
Washer
Pillar (behind keyboard, inside
(display housing top)
5 Connect earth strap to inside case with the screw, two washers and
earth braid. See Figure 14.2 for configuration.
6 Fit connector to end of keyboard’s acetate ribbon cable.
7 Re–assemble unit (refer to Section 3).

Section 15
CX30 TK Machine
Table of Contents:
15.1 General 15–3
15.4 Keyboard Controller PCB 15–4
15.4.1 Circuit description 15–4
15.4.2 Power Supplies 15–4
15.4.3 Links 15–5
15.5.1 Removing the customer keyboard 15–8
15.5.2 Replacing the customer keyboard 15–8
15.5.3 Removing the keyboard controller PCB 15–8
15.5.4 Fitting the keyboard controller PCB 15–9
15.5.5 Removing the keyboard assembly 15–9
15.5.6 Fitting the keyboard assembly 15–9
15.5.7 Removing the switch PCB loom 15–10
15.5.8 Fitting the switch PCB loom 15–10

15 — CX30 TK Machine
15.1 General
The CX30 TK machine is a customer self–service, label only machine. The
CX30 TK is based on the CX30 LS but has a large keyboard, in place of the
vendor keyboard, for customer self–service. The customer self–service
keyboard can be column or remotely mounted and each machine can have
either, or both together. The keyboard keys are supplied in two sizes, small and
large. On machines fitted with a single keyboard there is the option of 64 large
keys or any combination of small and large keys (128 maximum). On machines
with two keyboards the keyboards must have 64 large keys each.
On the remote version of the CX30 TK machine the customer self–service
keyboard is mounted on a stand and is connected to the machine externally via
a cable which is plugged into the machine’s DCU socket.
On the column mounted version of the CX30 TK the keyboard is fitted to the
front of the column. This version incorporates a taller column than the CX30
range of machines to accommodate the self–service keyboard which is mounted
on the vendor’s side. There are also two additional feet, fitted to a bracket at
the rear of the machine, to support the keyboard. The printer door has a key
operated lock to deny unauthorised access to the printer compartment.
Connection between machine and self–service keyboard is via internal looms
routed from the main PCB and DCU socket, up through the column and into the
back of the keyboard. The column mounted version of the CX30 TK is supplied
in kit form and is fitted retrospectively.
For the fitting instructions for the column mounted TK keyboard kit, see
Page xvii in the Overview section.
15.2 Mechanical Description

The keyboard comprises: rear moulding, keyboard controller PCB,
communications loom, keyboard assembly, earth lead, plastic keys and front
moulding.
The keyboard assembly comprises: a steel plate, switch PCB, 256 switches,
connecting loom (to keyboard controller PCB) and four pillars for securing the
keyboard controller PCB. The switches are soldered to the switch PCB. Each
switch fits through a cut-out in the steel plate and is secured at the other side of
the plate via an integral plastic clip. The connecting loom is fixed to the
left–hand side of switch PCB. The four pillars protrude from the rear of the
switch PCB adjacent to the connecting loom.
An earth lead clips onto the switch PCB and is connected to the rear moulding
securing screw.
The rear moulding, which is secured to the display column or stand by two
screws, houses the keyboard controller PCB and keyboard assembly.
The keyboard controller PCB is secured to the rear of the keyboard assembly by
four plastic pillars. Connections to the keyboard controller PCB are the
communications loom and the switch PCB loom.
On the remote keyboard the communications loom exits the customer
self–service keyboard through a hole in the bottom left–hand corner of the rear
moulding and is terminated in a D–type plug. The communications loom on the
column mounted keyboard exits the keyboard through the centre of the rear
moulding and enters the column; it then goes down through the column and into
the machine where it is connected to the main PCB and DCU socket.

The keyboard assembly is secured to the rear moulding by four plastic,

two–piece rivets.
The front moulding clips onto the rear moulding and is held in place by two lips
(25 mm long) at the front of the rear moulding (top and bottom outside edges).
There are two sizes of key, the full key and half key, which encompass four and
two switches respectively when fitted on the keyboard assembly. Both sizes of
key comprise a plastic base and clear plastic cover. The base and cover are
clipped together: a key legend can be inserted between them. The base is a
push fit onto the switches.
The printer door has a key–operated lock to prevent unauthorised access to the
printer compartment.
NOTE: On the column mounted version of the machine, when the DCU
socket is used the customer self–service keyboard is disabled.
15.3 Electrical Description

The keyboard controller PCB provides remote or external keyboard facilities for
the CX30 TK customer self–service keyboard.
This controller PCB will drive and scan a keyboard of up to 128 keys arranged
on a matrix of 16 drive and 8 scan lines. Communication with the host machine
is performed by a serial interface.
15.4 Keyboard Controller PCB

The keyboard controller PCB provides facility for the CX30 TK self–service
keyboard. It will drive and scan a keyboard of up to 128 keys arranged on a
matrix of 16 drive and eight scan lines. The keyboard controller communicates
with the host machine is performed by a serial interface.
15.4.1 Circuit description

The keyboard controller circuit is operated by a microprocessor, driven by a
3.684MHz crystal. The sequence of operation is controlled by the firmware
resident in the EPROM.
The drive for the target keyboard employs a 4 to 16 demultiplexer driven by the
microprocessor. Keyboard scanning is accomplished by cycling the 16 outputs
of the demultiplexer, the eight keyboard return lines are then read by the
microprocessor.
The keyboard controller communicates with its host via a 5V serial channel
employing a two wire link
The watchdog/power reset circuit provides low power detection and software
watchdog facilities. There are two power RESET circuits selected by link LK1.
15.4.2 Power Supplies

The keyboard and controller require a 5V regulated supply capable of providing
a current of 20mA maximum.

15.4.3 Links
There are four links on the keyboard controller PCB:
LK1: selects/disables power rest circuit.
LK2: connects FRAME GND to 0Vd.
LK3: selects numbers of keys – 64 large or up to 128 in any combination.
LK4: allows use of two 64–key keyboards. Used with LK3.
Figure 15.1 Keyboard Controller PCB – Communication Loom Connections
Remote Keyboard
LK2
TB2
FRAMEGND 1 SCREEN
n/a 2 GN
DO NOT CONNECT THIS PIN (TB2 PIN 3) 3 BU
n/a 4 BK
+5VD 1 WH
HOST 0VD 2 RD
COMMUNICATIONS TXD 3 OR
RXD 4 YL
TB1 PL3
PL4
Column Mounted Keyboard
LK2
TB2
+5VD 1
9 WAY RIBBON LOOM
1 SCREEN
n/a 2
2 GN
0VD 3
3 BU
n/a 4
4 BK
TXD 5
1 WH
DCU SENSE 6 RD
2
RXD 7
3 OR
n/a 8
4 YL
n/a 9
TB1
PL3
PL4

Figure 15.2 Keyboard Controller PCB – Links
Two keyboards (column and

remote) – 64 large keys only
PL2 PL1 on both keyboards
B A
A
LK4
LK3
B
LK3: must be in LK4: must be in

LK2: for same position (posi- opposite position
connecting LK2
tion A) on PCB on (position B) on PCB
FRAME GND other keyboard. on other keyboard
to 0Vd TB2
SCREEN
GN
B A
BU
A A
LK4
LK1
BK LK3 Single keyboard (column or

WH B B
remote) – 64 large keys only
RD
OR
YL
PL4
TB1 PL3 B A
A
LK4
Jumper connected LK3

in position B B
Not selected Selected
(IC6 disabled) (IC6 active)
LK4: can be in
either position.
A A
LK1
LK1
B B
Single keyboard (column or

Power reset circuits remote) – 128 keys maximum
B A
in any combination
LK4: has no effect with LK3 in
LK3 position B

Figure 15.3 Keyboard Controller PCB – Pin Signals
1 FRAMGND
PL1 is a 25–way, 2 DRIVE 16
PL2 is not used molex type connector
3 DRIVE 15
4 DRIVE 14
5 DRIVE 13
6 DRIVE 12
PL2 PL1 7 DRIVE 11
8 DRIVE 10
9 DRIVE 09
10 DRIVE 08
11 DRIVE 07
12 DRIVE 06
13 DRIVE 05
14 DRIVE 04
15 DRIVE 03
16 DRIVE 02
17 DRIVE 01
18 RETURN 08
LK2 19 RETURN 07
20 RETURN 06
TB2
21 RETURN 05
SCREEN
22 RETURN 04
GN
B A 23 RETURN 03
BU
A A
LK4
LK1
BK 24 RETURN 02
LK3
WH B B 25 RETURN 01
RD
OR
YL PL4 is a 1/4” PC mounting blade
PL4 connected to FRAME GND
TB1 PL3
1 +5VD
2 0VD
3 TXD
PL3 is a 4 RXD
9–way, 5 n/a
D–type
connector 6 n/a
7 n/a
8 DISABLE SIGNAL INPUT
9 n/a

15.5 Servicing
WARNING

15.5.1 Removing the customer keyboard

To remove the front moulding and gain general access to the keyboard interior,
proceed as follows:
2 Prise off the front moulding .
3 Remove the four, two–piece snap rivets holding the keyboard assembly
to the rear moulding.
15.5.2 Replacing the customer keyboard

To fit front moulding and close–up the unit, proceed as follows:
1 Offer up the keyboard assembly to the rear moulding and fit the four,
two–piece snap rivets.
2 Push the front moulding onto the rear moulding, ensuring it is clipped in
position.
15.5.3 Removing the keyboard controller PCB

To remove the keyboard controller PCB, proceed as follows:
2 Remove the front moulding and keyboard assembly (refer to Section
15.5.1).
3 On the keyboard controller PCB disconnect:
keyboard switch PCB loom from PL1
host communications loom from TB1 and TB2
4 Lift the keyboard controller PCB off the four pillars.

15.5.4 Fitting the keyboard controller PCB

To fit a new keyboard controller PCB, proceed as follows:
1 Push the new keyboard controller PCB onto the four pillars at the rear
of the new TK keyboard assembly.
2 On the keyboard controller PCB connect the following:
keyboard switch PCB loom to PL1
host communications loom TB1 and TB2
3 Check that keyboard assembly is correct way up before fitting to the
rear moulding, then complete the assembly (refer to Section 15.5.2).
15.5.5 Removing the keyboard assembly

To remove the keyboard assembly, proceed as follows:
15.5.1).
3 Disconnect the earth lead from the switch PCB.
4 On the keyboard controller PCB disconnect:
keyboard switch PCB loom from PL1
communications loom from TB1 and TB2
5 Lift the keyboard controller PCB off the four pillars.
15.5.6 Fitting the keyboard assembly

To fit a new keyboard assembly, proceed as follows:
1 Push the keyboard controller PCB onto the four pillars at the rear of the
new keyboard assembly until it clicks into position.
2 Connect the earth lead to the switch PCB.
3 On the keyboard controller PCB connect the following:
keyboard switch PCB loom to PL1
communications loom TB1 and TB2
4 Check that new keyboard assembly is correct way up before fitting to
the rear moulding, then complete the assembly (refer to Section
15.5.2).

15.5.7 Removing the switch PCB loom

To remove the switch PCB loom, proceed as follows:
15.5.1).
3 Disconnect the switch PCB loom from the keyboard controller PCB and
the switch PCB.
15.5.8 Fitting the switch PCB loom

To fit a new switch PCB loom, proceed as follows:
1 Connect the new switch PCB loom to the keyboard controller PCB and
the switch PCB.
2 Check that keyboard assembly is the correct way up before fitting to the
rear moulding, then complete the assembly (refer to Section 15.5.2).

Section 16
Power Supply Unit
Table of Contents:
16.2.1 Gaining access to the power supply unit (CX20/CX30) 16–5
16.2.2 Gaining access to the power supply unit (CX34) 16–6
16.2.3 Replacing a fuse 16–7

16 — Power Supply Unit
16.1 Description
The power supply unit transforms, rectifies and smooths the mains electricity
supply into several lower–voltage outputs. The input voltage varies according to
market and may be either 240 Vac or 110 Vac (determined by type of mains
transformer and not selectable in service). The output voltages are:
+5 Vdc
+10/0/–10 Vdc
+46 Vdc
+12/0/–12 Vdc
+22 Vdc
9.6 Vac
Figure 16.1 Power Supply PCB – Component Highlight
* *
*
*
NOTE: The test points (TP#s) are not used during servicing, they are only
provided for manufacturing purposes.
The power supply unit consists of a switched–mode power supply (SMPS)

installed on a power supply PCB. The PCB has printed circuit tracks on both
sides and includes two electrical connectors (SK1 and PL1) and two fuses (FS1
and FS2).
The mains supply is received at socket SK1 and is decoupled from the source
by an isolating transformer. Fuse FS1 (2A) protects the input circuitry of the
SMPS.

The output of the SMPS is protected by fuse FS2 (6.3A). The various power
outputs are made available at PL1.
When installed in a unit, the power supply is covered by a ventilated shroud.
The shroud is fabricated from sheet aluminium.
Table 16.1 Power Supply Unit – Specifications
Type Switched mode power supply

Input voltage 110Vac
Input frequency 50 to 60Hz
Input current 2 Amperes (maximum) surge
Power output (total) 150 Watts
Output voltages +5 Vdc
+10/0/–10Vdc
+46Vdc
9.6Vac (frequency at input
frequency)
+12/0/–12Vdc
+22Vdc
16.2 Servicing
WARNING 1
THE POWER SUPPLY UNIT AND ITS CONNECTING

CABLES CARRY LETHAL VOLTAGES. WHEN TESTING
OR FAULT–FINDING THE UNIT, EXERCISE EXTREME
CARE. ENSURE THAT ANY TEST EQUIPMENT USED IS
IN GOOD CONDITION AND CAPABLE OF WITHSTANDING
THE VOLTAGES EXISTING. TOOLS USED MUST HAVE
INSULATED HAND GRIPS. TEST PROBES AND JUMPER
LEADS MUST BE IN GOOD CONDITION AND MUST HAVE
ADEQUATE INSULATION. TEST PROBES WITH CLAW
ENDS AND JUMPER LEADS MUST NOT HAVE INSECURE
PARTS WHICH MAY FAIL DURING USE.
WARNING 2

CABLES CARRY LETHAL VOLTAGES. WHEN TESTING
THE POWER SUPPLY UNIT: USE A WORKBENCH THAT
HAS A RUBBER SURFACE; STAND ON A RUBBER
SURFACE; DO NOT WEAR AN EARTH STRAP; WEAR
EYE PROTECTION; DO NOT WORK ALONE.

WARNING 3

CABLES CARRY LETHAL VOLTAGES. THE HEATSINKS
OF COMPONENTS V2 AND V3 ARE AT MAINS VOLTAGE
(NEGATIVE RECTIFIED). THE BODIES OF OTHER
COMPONENTS OF THE POWER SUPPLY UNIT ARE ALSO
AT LETHAL VOLTAGES. NEVER ASSUME THAT A
COMPONENT IS SAFE TO BE TOUCHED.
WARNING 4
THE CAPACITORS IN THE POWER SUPPLY UNIT WILL

HOLD A CHARGE FOR A PERIOD OF UP TO SIX
MINUTES AFTER THE POWER SUPPLY UNIT IS
SWITCHED OFF. DURING THIS TIME, DO NOT TOUCH
THE UNIT. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO DISCHARGE THE
CAPACITORS BY SHORTING THEIR TERMINALS.
WARNING 5
OBSERVE THE UNIT THROUGHOUT THE TEST. IF, AT

ANY TIME, THE POWER SUPPLY MAKES A LOUD NOISE
OR THERE IS ANY SIGN OF OVERHEATING OR OTHER
ELECTRICAL STRESS, IMMEDIATELY SET THE MAINS
SUPPLY OFF, DISCONNECT THE MAINS SUPPLY AND
ABANDON THE TEST.
16.2.1 Gaining access to the power supply unit (CX20/CX30)

To gain access to the power supply unit on the CX20/CX30 for test, to change
fuses or to change the power supply unit, proceed as follows:
3 Release main PCB as necessary to gain access for the following
operations (refer to Section 11).
4 Remove washer on top of pillar (lift off).
5 Remove shroud covering power supply PCB by removing two sets of
Posidrive screws and shakeproof washers.
6 Identify locations of FS1 (2A) and FS2 (6.3A).
7 To replace a fuse see Section 16.2.3.
8 If complete removal of power supply is required, proceed as follows,
otherwise proceed to Step 17.

9 Disconnect 4–pole mains supply from SK1 on power supply PCB.

10 Disconnect 16–pole power outlet harness from PL1 on power supply
PCB.
11 Remove two hexagonal, stand–off pillars from rear corners of power
supply PCB.
12 Remove power supply PCB by easing out (towards back of unit) from
under the three securing tabs. Disassembly is complete.
13 Insert power supply PCB and engage two cut–outs in front edge of
power supply PCB with two spigots at unit chassis.
14 Fit two hexagonal, stand–off pillars at rear corners of power supply
PCB.
15 Connect 16–pole power outlet harness to PL1 on power supply PCB.
16 Connect 4–pole mains supply to SK1 on power supply PCB.
17 Taking care not to bend either of two upright resistors near to rear, left
edge of power supply PCB and so cause either of them to contact
shroud when fitted, fit shroud covering power supply PCB using two
sets of Posidrive screws and shakeproof washers. Check that
grommets around wire harnesses are correctly located in slots of
shroud.
18 Place washer on pillar (above shroud).
19 Fit main PCB (refer to Section 11).
16.2.2 Gaining access to the power supply unit (CX34)

To gain access to the power supply unit on the CX34 for test, to change fuses or
to change the power supply unit, proceed as follows:
3 Remove power supply unit shroud by removing the two screws and
shakeproof washers from the top and carefully lift off. Remove cable
ties as necessary.
4 Identify locations of FS1 (1A) and FS2 (4A).
5 To replace a fuse see Section 16.2.3.
6 If complete removal of power supply is required, proceed as follows,
otherwise proceed to Step 14.
7 Disconnect 4–pole mains supply from SK1 on power supply PCB.
8 Disconnect 16–pole power outlet harness from PL1 on power supply
PCB.

9 Remove two hexagonal, stand–off pillars from right–hand side of power

supply PCB.
10 Completely remove power supply PCB by removing two screws and
washers from left–hand side and lifting off.
11 Place power supply PCB over chassis pillars and secure using two
screws and shakeproof washers (left–hand side) and two hexagonal
stand–off pillars (right–hand side).
12 Connect 16–pole power outlet harness to PL1 to power supply PCB.
13 Connect 4–pole mains supply to SK1 to power supply PCB.
14 Fit shroud covering power supply PCB using two sets of Posidrive
screws and shakeproof washers. Check that grommets around wire
harnesses are correctly located in slots of shroud.
16.2.3 Replacing a fuse

To remove a fuse for checking or to fit a new item, proceed as follows:
1 Isolate power supply.
2 Grasp top of fuse firmly and pull away from base (attached to PCB).
3 To fit new fuse, align fuse wires with holes in fuse base and push fuse
directly and firmly into fuse base.

Section 17
Transducer
Table of Contents:
17.1.1 Transducer Assembly CX20/CX30 17–3
17.1.2 Transducer Assembly CX34 17–4
17.1.3 Suspension Assembly CX34 17–4
17.2 Testing 17–6
17.3 A/D PCB 17–6
17.4.1 Removing the transducer (CX20/CX30) 17–7
17.4.2 Fitting the transducer (CX20/CX30) 17–7
17.4.3 Removing the transducer (CX34) 17–7
17.4.4 Fitting the transducer (CX34) 17–8

17 — Transducer
17.1 Description
17.1.1 Transducer Assembly CX20/CX30

On the CX20/CX30 machines the transducer is fitted centrally, in the the base of
the machine to the chassis. The CX20 W does not have an internal transducer,
it is connected to a remote weighing patform, the CX9/A702. For further details
of the CX9/A702 see Section 18.
The transducer assembly comprises a base, a transducer housing, a mounting
block and an overload stop.
The base is made of cast metal and enables the transducer to be attached to a
unit at four fixing positions. The mounting block is also made of cast metal and
has four threaded holes. Two of these holes are to attach the mounting block to
the transducer housing, the other two holes are to attach a cross assembly on
which load will be placed.
The transducer housing is machined to precision tolerances and is attached to
the base at one end by two socket–head screws. The mounting block is
attached at the other end of the transducer housing by two socket–head screws.
Any weight on the mounting block is transmitted through the transducer housing
to the base, causing the transducer housing to distort physically.
The core of the transducer housing is hollow, and several grooves are machined
on the outer surface. The grooves and hollow housing are provided so that
applied weight causes the transducer housing to distort by a large amount in a
predictable manner.
Four self–adhesive, strain pads are attached to the transducer housing around
its inner wall. Each pad is connected by wire to a circuit PCB, which partly
covers the hollow housing at one side. The other side of the hollow housing is
partly covered by a protective aluminium plate.
Figure 17.1 Transducer Assembly (CX20/CX30)

17 — Transducer
Each strain pad contains a series of fine wires which change in electrical
resistance according to the mechanical strain across them. Movement of the
transducer wall, caused by a weight being applied, will strain the pads and
cause them to change resistance. The pads form part of a Wheatstone Bridge
circuit, and any change of resistance in them causes a change in the electrical
balance of that circuit: this change is detected as an electrical measure of the
weight applied.
The strain pads, their attachment to the wall of the transducer housing and their
connecting wires are extremely delicate and must not be handled or disturbed in
any way.
17.1.2 Transducer Assembly CX34

The transducer assembly, which forms the intermediate part of the suspension
assembly, comprises a top mounting bracket, transducer housing, lower
mounting bracket and two overload stops.
Both mounting brackets are made of mild steel and have fixing holes for fitting to
the suspension assembly. Two holes in the top bracket are for securing the
connecting block and one in the lower bracket (centre) takes the connecting rod.
The top mounting bracket is fitted to the top, right–hand side of the transducer
housing with two socket screws. At the other end there is a hole, through which
a bolt passes and is screwed into the transducer housing. Adjacent to this is a
threaded hole through which is screwed a socket grub screw (adjustable).
Together these provide overload protection: an overload clearance gap between
grub screw and transducer housing is factory set. A threaded hole, right of
centre provides an earthing point (bolt and shakeproof washer).
The lower mounting bracket is fixed to the underside of the transducer housing
with two socket screws at the left–hand side. At the other end overload
protection is as for the top of the transducer housing. A threaded hole in the
underside of the bracket, centrally positioned, takes the connecting rod.
The transducer housing is machined to precision tolerances. Any weight on the
scoop, directly below the transducer, is transmitted through the cradle and lower
suspension assemblies to the transducer assembly, causing the transducer
housing to distort physically. The transducer housing is the same as that used
on the CX20/CX30 (refer to Section 17.1.1).
17.1.3 Suspension Assembly CX34

The suspension assembly supports the cradle assembly and scoop. It has three
main sections: the upper assembly, transducer assembly (refer to
Section 17.1.2) and lower assembly. The top of the suspension assembly,
which is connected to a customer fixing, supports the whole unit.
The upper assembly comprises a mounting boss, suspension hook, suspension
yoke (with gimbal) and connecting block. The mounting boss fits through a hole
in the top of the chassis and is secured to it along with a suspension hook
underneath. The mounting boss supports the chassis. The suspension hook
has a gimbal fitted in the base of its hook over which a suspension yoke rests.
The gimbal is made of white plastic and has four pieces, two narrow and two

17 — Transducer
wide. The suspension yoke is fitted to the end of a connecting block, the base
of which is connected to the left–hand end of the transducer assembly.
The lower assembly comprises a connecting rod, insulating spigot, insulating
washer and lower suspension bracket. The top of the connecting, which is
threaded at both ends, is screwed into the underside of the transducer assembly
and is secured with locking nut and washer. The bottom is fixed through a hole
in the top of the lower suspension bracket using the insulating spigot and
insulating washer, which fit over the rod above and below the hole. In the
vertical portion of the lower suspension bracket there is a hole with a small
cut-out in the bottom to take another gimbal. This gimbal takes the cradle
assembly with scoop.
Figure 17.2 Suspension Assembly (CX34)
Mounting boss (63271–705)
Suspension hook (66116–510)
Gimbal assembly, four–piece

(70112–109)
Suspension yoke (65533–112)
Top transducer mounting

Connecting block bracket (63666–107)
(63652–408)
Transducer, T103 (70714–313)
Bottom transducer mounting

bracket (63666–108)
Connecting rod
(63153–415) Insulating spigot (63228–113)
Lower suspension
bracket (66256–171) Insulating washer (63138–147)
Gimbal assembly, four–piece

(70112–109)

17 — Transducer
17.2 Testing
The transducer cannot be tested as a separate part and must be tested as part
of the unit.
17.3 A/D PCB

The A/D PCB receives the analogue signal from the transducer when weight is
applied to it. This signal is the change in resistance detected by the
transducer’s strain gauges. The A/D PCB converts this signal to digital form and
sends it to the main PCB.
Figure 17.3 A/D PCB Connections (component side)

17 — Transducer
17.4 Servicing
Caution
When handling the transducer housing be careful not to

touch any of its internal components as they are
extremely sensitive and are easily damaged.
The transducer is assembled and adjusted at manufacture to precision

tolerances and must not be further disassembled. If any part of the transducer
is unfit for further service, the complete transducer assembly must be changed.
17.4.1 Removing the transducer (CX20/CX30)

To remove the transducer, proceed as follows:
3 Release main PCB as necessary to gain access for following
4 Disconnect 4–wire harness from transducer at terminal block on A/D
PCB (detached from main PCB). To disconnect each wire, release
terminal screw, slide small screwdriver blade over top of wire in block
(to release barbed tongue of terminal) and gently remove wire.
5 Remove transducer by removing four sets of bolts and plain washers.
17.4.2 Fitting the transducer (CX20/CX30)

To fit the transducer, proceed as follows:
1 Fit transducer using four sets of bolts and plain washers.
2 Refer to Figure 17.3 and connect 4–wire harness to transducer at
terminal block on A/D PCB (detached from main PCB).
4 If new transducer has been fitted, unit must be re–calibrated (refer to
Section 7).
17.4.3 Removing the transducer (CX34)

To remove the transducer, proceed as follows:
3 Disconnect the transducer cable from the terminal block on the
A/D PCB (refer to Section 11).

17 — Transducer
4 Gain access to the suspension assembly at the front of the chassis and
remove the suspension assembly (without mounting boss) by
disconnecting the chassis earth wire from the transducer assembly and
detaching the suspension hook by removing the two nuts over chassis
studs (leave mounting in place). Suspension assembly is now free.
5 Remove transducer assembly by removing the two socket screws in the
connecting block (top of assembly) and, on the underside, loosen
connecting rod locking nut and unscrew connecting rod.
17.4.4 Fitting the transducer (CX34)

To fit the transducer, proceed as follows:
1 Re–assemble suspension assembly.
2 Fit suspension assembly to chassis by attaching the suspension hook
to underside of mounting boss, over chassis studs, and securing with
two nuts.
3 Gain access to the main PCB and connect transducer cable to terminal
block TB1 on the A/D PCB.

Section 18
CX9/A702 Remote
Weighing Platform
Table of Contents:
18.2 Specifications 18–5
18.3.1 Special Tool (15221) 18–5
18.3.2 Removing a transducer 18–5
18.3.3 Fitting the transducer 18–6
18.3.4 Using the C117 Special Tool 18–8

18 — CX9/A702 Remote Weighing Platform
18.1 Description
The CX9/A702 Remote Weighing Platform is used in conjunction with the
CX20 W on ULMA wrapping machines. The CX9/A702 houses a transducer
and is connected to the CX20 W via a transducer cable.
Figure 18.1 CX9/A702 Remote Weighing Platform
Weighplate
Stamping plate Transducer cable

Spirit level
The basic CX9/A702 machine is built on a moulded ABS base with provision for
a panel to be fitted in each of its four sides. A rigid, one–piece ABS cover fits
over the panels and is secured to the base by four instrument head screws. A
dimpled stainless steel weight plate is provided to support the goods to be
weighed.
The base provides a housing for the transducer assembly, spirit level and
stamping plate. Four levelling feet screwed into the underside of the moulded
base provide a means of adjusting the level of the machine.
The transducer assembly is a T103 transducer with associated circuitry and
fixing brackets, top and bottom. The transducer is protected against overload by
a central stop under the weigh cell. Protection against eccentric loading is
provided by four corner stops which are an integral part of the base. Collars
placed over the corner stops reduce the clearance when a 6kg transducer is
fitted.
A plastic cross assembly, with a fitting support at each corner, fits over the
transducer. The four fitting supports protrude through holes in the moulded
plastic cover. A stainless steel weight plate fits over the cover and into inserts in
the fitting supports.
A circular spirit level fits into the base moulding and the stamping plate is
screwed in position next to it.
The four panels are identical in size, three of them are blank and may be fitted in
any position. The fourth is for the transducer termination panel.

Figure 18.2 CX9/A702 – Exploded View
Weighplate
Instrument screw
Cover
Cross
Cover
Transducer retainer
Transducer assembly
Blanking panel
Base
Output plate
Stamping plate
Spirit level Adjustable levelling foot

18.2 Specifications
Table 18.1 Specifications

Dimensions 100 high x 280 wide x 350 deep
(mm)
Operating temperature –10_C to +40_C
range
Storage temperature –20_C to +70_C
range
Operating humidity range 0% to 95% (non–condensing)
Storage humidity range 0% to 98% (non–condensing)
18.3 Servicing
18.3.1 Special Tool (15221)

To remove or replace the transducer and cross assembly a special tool, part
number 15221, is required.
Figure 18.3 Special Tool (15221)
18.3.2 Removing a transducer

1 Disconnect the transducer cable from the CX9/A702.
2 Lift the weighplate clear of the housing.
3 Undo the four instrument head screws securing the top housing to the
base. Lift the top housing clear.
4 Using a thin–bladed screwdriver remove the two cross assembly
retainers from their slots. Insert the screwdriver in the slots of the cross
assembly retainers, tap the adhesive strips and base retainers from the
base moulding.

5 Locate the 15221 in to the slots of the cross assembly (Figure 18.4)
and remove the cross assembly from the transducer by holding the
bottom arm securely and easing the top arm towards the bottom arm,
releasing the cross assembly from the transducer.
Figure 18.4 Removing the transducer using the 15221
Retainer
6 Note the position of the wires from the transducer to the connector then
disconnect the transducer leads.
7 Turn the scale upside down so that it rests on the securing pillars.
Remove the base cover, locate the bottom arm of the 15221 into the
transducer locating lugs (Figure 18.4). Holding the bottom arm securely,
ease the top arm towards the bottom arm and release the transducer
from its locating lugs.
8 Lift the housing clear of the transducer assembly.
18.3.3 Fitting the transducer

1 Place the transducer in its approximate position in the base, turn the
scale over to rest on the cross mounting plate.
2 Locate the bottom arm of the 15221 in the forward slot with top arm in
the locating pin.
3 Hold the bottom arm firmly and pull the top arm until the transducer is
located in the correct position. Replace the two retainers and adhesive
strips and replace base cover.
NOTE: If the transducer is not located correctly the retainers will not
fit in position.
4 Turn the scale so that it is back on its base and connect the transducer
cable to the connector.
5 Place the cross assembly over the transducer.

6 Locate the bottom arm of the 15221 in the forward slot with top arm in
the locating pin as shown in Figure 18.3.
7 Hold the bottom arm firmly and pull the top arm until the cross assembly
is in position. Replace the two retainers.
8 Replace the top housing and secure to the base with the four
instrument head screws.
9 Locate the weighplate in its correct position.
10 Carry out the configuration and calibration routines as detailed in
Sections 6 and 7.
Figure 18.5 Fitting the transducer using a 15221
Retainer

18.3.4 Using the C117 Special Tool

The special tool C117 can also be used for removing or replacing the transducer
and cross assembly.
Figure 18.6 Special Tool (C117)
Handle
Handle securing screw

(behind handle)
Base
Pivot pin
The C117 is in two pieces, a base and handle. When not in use the handle is
clamped to the base with a screw fitted through the middle of the base. When in
use the end of the handle is fitted over the pivot pin in the base, on the opposite
side to the screw. The way in which the handle is fitted to the base depends on
whether you are fitting or removing the cross/transducer – see Figure 18.7.
Figure 18.7 Using the Special Tool (C117)
Cross/transducer removal Cross/transducer fitting

Section 19
Receipt Printer
Table of Contents:
19.3.7 Changing the microswitch 19–7
19.3.8 Disassembling the printer 19–7
19.3.9 Assembling the printer 19–7

19 — Receipt Printer
Figure 19.1 Ticket Printer (CX20/CX30)
Ribbon cable (data)

Microswitch assembly
Printer assembly
Screw (for securing

microswitch assembly)
Screw and shakeproof

and plain washers (for
securing printer assembly
and mounting bracket)
Mounting bracket
Spigot
Bolt (for securing Spine

spigot)
Washer
19.1 Description
The printer described in this section is complete with unit spine and top plate.
On the CX20/CX30 the unit spine also carries two of the four corner stops,
which act as asymmetric overload stops for the cross assembly of the unit.
The printer is a self–contained unit, having a thermal print head and a print roller
which, driven by an integral 24Vdc motor, also acts as a paper feed.
The ticket printer prints receipt and report tickets on a thermal paper roll. The
paper roll is carried on a plastic spigot attached to the unit spine. Another
identical spigot is attached to the spine: this spigot guides the paper into the
printer and isolates the printer from any physical surging of the paper roll.
The printer is attached to the unit spine by two brackets. The printer is secured
to one bracket (printer bracket) at four fixing positions; this bracket is then
secured to the other bracket (spine bracket) at two fixing positions. The spine
bracket is formed as a bent tongue of the spine.
A tongue microswitch is attached to the printer case and is positioned to detect
the presence of paper in the printer feed. The microswitch includes a flying lead
terminated with a connector.
The printer has a flying lead and an electrical connector. The flying lead
connects a power supply to the printer motor. The electrical connector accepts
a ribbon cable for the supply of formatted print data from an external printer
driver.

The paper tractor mechanism consists of a rubber friction roller (print roller), and
a reduction gear train of two–stage spur gears. The print head is spring–loaded
to contact the friction roller, which then grips the paper. The firm contact of the
print head against the friction roller, with the paper trapped between them, also
enables thermal printing.
The print head prints by thermal means and does not require any maintenance.
The print head must not be disassembled or cleaned. The print head itself is
made of precision–manufactured materials and must not be scratched or
scored: avoid any contact with metal objects (such as a screwdriver blade).
19.2 Test and Adjustment

The printer is scanned at power–up and will print a test ticket provided the
keyswitch is in supervisor mode position. The printer cannot be tested when not
installed in a unit.
To adjust the current drawn by the stepper motor, which is controlled by a
potentiometer on the main PCB (refer to Section 11), proceed as follows:
1 Using a DVM, measure operating voltage across connections of

two–pin connector SK1 on main PCB when printer is operating.
Voltage should be 2V (Axiom receipt printer). If necessary, adjust
voltage by adjusting RV3 on main PCB.
19.3 Servicing
Caution
The print head is made of precision–manufactured

materials and must not be scratched or scored. Avoid
any contact with metal objects (such as a screwdriver
blade).
IMPORTANT:
While the print head is under warranty do not dismantle print
head as this will invalidate the warranty.
19.3.1 Removing the printer (CX20/CX30)

To remove the printer complete with unit spine, proceed as follows:
3 Release main PCB as necessary to gain access for following


4 If not already disconnected, disconnect following electrical connections

on main PCB:
PL3, printer data supply
PL7, printer motor supply
PL16, microswitch
5 Remove printer and unit spine by removing two sets of Posidrive

screws, shakeproof washers and plain washers securing spine to
chassis.
19.3.2 Fitting the printer (CX20/CX30)

To fit the printer complete with unit spine, proceed as follows:
1 Fit printer and unit spine by fitting two sets of Posidrive screws,
shakeproof washers and plain washers securing spine to chassis.
2 When fitting main PCB (Step 3), connect following electrical

connections on main PCB and ensure a natural positioning of all cables
without mechanical strain:
PL16, microswitch
4 Two overload stops below cross assembly have been disturbed by

these procedures, so unit must be adjusted (refer to Section 7.2.1).
19.3.3 Removing the printer (CX34)

To remove the printer complete with unit spine, proceed as follows:
2 Remove front housing (refer to Section NO TAG).
3 Disconnect the following electrical connections on main PCB:
PL16, microswitch
4 Ease free end of electrical looms and cables through hole in chassis (to
printer side).
5 Remove printer and unit spine by removing two bolts, shakeproof

washers and plain washers securing spine to chassis.

19.3.4 Fitting the printer (CX34)

To fit the printer complete with unit spine, proceed as follows:
1 Fit printer and unit spine to chassis by fitting two bolts, shakeproof
washers and plain washers.
2 Carefully ease free end of electrical looms and cables through hole in
chassis (to main PCB side).
3 Connect following electrical connections on main PCB and ensure a
natural positioning of all cables without mechanical strain:
PL16, microswitch
19.3.5 Cleaning the print head

To clean the print head use the special cleaning kit (see Parts List for Part
Number) and carefully follow the instructions provided with the kit.
19.3.6 Changing the print head
Caution

blade).
IMPORTANT:
While the print head is under warranty do not dismantle print
head as this will invalidate the warranty.
To change the print head, proceed as follows:
1 Remove printer complete with spine from unit as detail in Sections
19.3.1 and 19.3.3, as appropriate.
2 If fitted, remove paper roll.
3 Remove printer complete with printer bracket from spine bracket by
removing two nuts (with integral shakeproof washers).
4 Remove printer from printer bracket by removing four sets of screws,
shakeproof washers and plain washers.
5 At each side of printer case, detach springs from retaining rod (use
snipe–nose pliers, spring loops are located in grooves of retaining rod).

6 Remove print head by removing retaining rod (press out).

7 Assemble in reverse order, applying two spots of locking paint between
retaining rod and printer case.
8 When installed in unit, print quality must be checked.
19.3.7 Changing the microswitch

To change the microswitch, proceed as follows:
1 Detach microswitch by removing Posidrive screw securing it to printer
case.
2 If installed in unit, microswitch can be changed only by desoldering wire
connections and transferring existing wires to new microswitch. If this
option is preferred, check that green wire attaches to centre terminal of
microswitch, and that black wire attaches to rear terminal.
3 Fit microswitch using Posidrive screw and, before tightening screw,
adjust so that microswitch tongue just contacts edge of hole in printer
case.
19.3.8 Disassembling the printer

To disassemble printer, proceed as follows:
1 Remove print head (refer to Section 19.3.6).
2 Remove microswitch (refer to Section 19.3.7).
3 Gaining access through holes in opposite side of printer case, remove
drive motor by removing two Posidrive screws attaching drive motor to
inside face of printer case.
19.3.9 Assembling the printer

To assemble printer, proceed as follows:
1 Fit drive motor using two Posidrive screws (this is easier if a magnetized
or screw–gripper screwdriver is used).
2 Fit and adjust microswitch (refer to Section 19.3.7).
3 Fit print head (refer to Section 19.3.6).

Section 20
Label and Receipt
Printer
Table of Contents:
20.3.6 Changing the take–up motor 20–7
20.3.7 Changing the stepper motor 20–8
20.3.8 Changing the friction roller 20–8
20.3.10 Changing the photodetector 20–10
20.3.11 Changing the printer mechanism 20–10

20 — Label and Receipt Printer
Figure 20.1 Label and Receipt Printer (CX20/CX30)
Screw (for secur-

ing retaining plate)
Spring (take–up
spool)
Label (paper feed
instructions)
Printer assembly
(Rohm)
Retaining
Cross protection plate
plate
2–off corner stops

(CX20/CX30 only)
Take–up
spool
Spine
Loom (print
head)
Cassette
Pillar (take–up
motor)
Roller (print head)
Motor and gearbox assembly

(take–up motor) Sensor (optical photodetector)
Stepper motor and

Pulley (print head roller)
loom assembly
Drive belt
Screw (securing pillar
to stepper motor)
Pillar (stepper motor)
20.1 Description
The printer described in this section is complete with unit spine and top plate.
On the CX20/CX30 the unit spine also carries two of the four corner stops,
which act as asymmetric overload stops for the cross assembly of the unit: these
are adjusted as part of the unit calibration (refer to Section 7).
The printer is a versatile unit, being able to print thermal paper tickets and
self–adhesive, thermal labels in a variety of sizes. It uses a thermal print head,
two electric motors, and a photodetector sensor mechanism. A plastic cassette
provides a housing for a ticket roll.
The cassette is interchangeable, so that an operator may carry a number of
cassettes each loaded with different types of ticket roll. For example, one might
carry a roll of self–adhesive labels and another might carry continuous paper.
This enables an operator to change the printing function quickly and easily,
without any need to unload the existing paper roll from the cassette.

The cassette carries the loaded ticket roll on a fixed drum. The drum has
splines at its upper edge and is sized to allow the paper roll to rotate with a
small amount of friction when pulled by the tractor mechanism. The cassette
has an anvil at the dispensing edge to encourage self–adhesive labels to detach
easily from their backing paper.
The cassette also has a loose–fitted take–up roller. The take–up roller
comprises a plastic moulding which is trapped against the side of the cassette
by a metal keep plate, which is held in position by three countersunk, Posidrive
screws. The outer side of the take–up roller is hollow and is splined internally to
accept a drive from a motor unit. The inner side of the take–up roller comprises
three functional elements:
the core (effectively solid)
two outer tongues (effectively flexible)
a rotary wedge, trapped on a spigot of the core by a clamp washer.
The rotary wedge has two flats on its periphery. When these flats are aligned
with the flat, inner faces of the tongues, they are not in contact and the tongues
are relaxed. When the rounded faces of the rotary wedge are aligned with the
tongues, they are in contact and the tongues are forced outwards by a small
amount, so enlarging the effective diameter of the roller. The backing paper is
wound around the roller in its enlarged size. When the paper roll is exhausted,
the rotary wedge is rotated to align its flats with the tongues and the effective
diameter of the roller is made smaller: this enables the backing paper to be
removed easily from the take–up roller.
The motor which drives the take–up roller is a 24V, 3–pole, can type. It drives
through an integral reduction gearbox mounted on a plate supported from the
printer spine by three stand–off pillars and two stand–off spacers. The output
from the gearbox is transmitted through a rotary shaft on which is mounted a
plastic drive cone having external splines. The drive cone interfaces with the
hollow, splined core of the take–up roller. The output shaft of the gearbox has a
flat machined on to its surface and a threaded hole set axially in the end of the
shaft. The drive cone is attached to the threaded hole of the shaft by a screw
and shakeproof washer in the hollow bore of the cone: the cone can therefore
be changed easily when installed in the unit. The electrical supply to the motor
is connected to a loom interconnection and then to the wiring harness of the
printer, which is connected to PL7 on the main PCB.
The paper tractor mechanism consists of a rubber friction roller, a drive belt
arrangement, and a stepper motor. The friction roller is carried between a hole
in the printer spine and a hole in a bracket at its free end. The bracket is also
attached to the printer spine by two stand–off pillars. The spine end of the roller
is carried in a ball bearing, and the bracket end of the roller is carried in a
phosphor bronze bush. The spine–end of the friction roller carries a splined
drive gear, attached to the shaft of the friction roller by a socket–head, recessed,
grub screw. The extended shaft of the friction roller has a flat machined on to a
surface below the grub screw.
The drive is transmitted to the drive gear of the friction roller by a flexible,
toothed drive belt made of textile–reinforced, rubberized plastic. This is driven
by the stepper motor. The overall gear ratio of the arrangement is approximately
5:1 step–down.

The stepper motor is a two–coil unit and is mounted on the printer spine by two
stand–off pillars. The motor is supplied with power by two integral pairs of wires
which connect directly to the wiring harness of the printer. The drive from the
motor is transmitted through a rotary output shaft, on which is mounted a
splined, drive gear. The splined drive gear is secured in position by a
socket–headed, recessed, grub screw.
The print head is trapped between the printer spine and a bracket attached to
the spine by three stand–off pillars. A spring–loaded catch (operated by lever
outside bracket) also is carried between the spine and the bracket and, when
applied (by pushing lever fully down), brings the print head into contact with the
rubber drive roller, where the paper is carried. When in contact with the drive
roller, there is sufficient paper contact to allow printing and, also, the entrapment
of the paper between the roller and the print head enables sufficient friction grip
for the roller to draw the paper off the paper roll.
The print head prints by thermal means and has a life expectancy of 50
kilometres (30 miles) of paper. It is driven by power supplies and data received
from an external source through a ribbon cable. Its assembly makes use of
holes positioned in its carrying equipment (the bracket and printer spine), and it
cannot function nor be installed otherwise. Other than removal for maintenance
or exchange, the print head must not be further disassembled. The print head
itself is made of precision–manufactured materials and must not be scratched or
scored: avoid any contact with metal objects (such as a screwdriver blade).
A photodetector is attached to a bracket on the printer spine by a screw and a
shakeproof and plain washer. The bracket is attached to the printer spine by a
nut and shakeproof washer on its stud and also utilises the photodetector
attachment. The photodetector consists of an optical transmitter and receiver:
the transmitter transmits light directly to the receiver. Paper, from the paper roll,
is passed through a gap between the transmitter and receiver. Under the
control of software on the main PCB, the photodetector is able to detect when
there is translucent paper (backing roll) and ticket in the gap, and when
translucent paper only is in the gap. By this method, the software is able to
interpret the position and length of each label as it passes through the
photodetector, to ensure correct print positioning.
The photodetector is connected by two pairs of wires to a flying lead. Its
position is adjustable: its unsecured end is cradled in a bracket secured to the
spine, and the bracket can be rotated to reposition the photodetector through a
limited range of movement.
20.2 Test and Adjustment

The printer is scanned at power–up and will print a test ticket (or labels)
provided the keyswitch is switched to supervisor mode. The printer cannot be
tested when not installed in a unit.
To adjust the current drawn by the stepper motor, which is controlled by a
potentiometer on the main PCB (refer to Section 11), proceed as follows:
1 Using a DVM, measure operating voltage across connections of

two–pin connector SK1 on main PCB when printer is operating.
Voltage should be 3.7V (Rohm label and receipt printer). If necessary,
adjust voltage by adjusting RV3 on main PCB.

20.3 Servicing
Caution

blade).
20.3.1 Removing the printer (CX20/CX30)

To remove printer complete with unit spine, proceed as follows:
1 Switch off machine and isolate it from the power supply.
3 Remove main PCB as necessary to gain access for following
4 If not already disconnected, disconnect following electrical connections
on main PCB:
PL16, photodetector
5 Remove printer and unit spine by removing two sets of Posidrive
screws, shakeproof washers and plain washers securing spine to
chassis.
20.3.2 Fitting the printer (CX20/CX30)

To fit printer complete with unit spine, proceed as follows:
1 Fit printer and unit spine by fitting two sets of Posidrive screws,
shakeproof washers and plain washers securing spine to chassis.
2 When fitting main PCB (Step 3), connect following electrical
connections on main PCB and ensure a natural positioning of all cables
without mechanical strain:
PL16, photodetector
5 Two overload stops below cross assembly have been disturbed by
these procedures, so unit must be adjusted (refer to Section 7.2.1).

20.3.3 Removing the printer (CX34)

To remove printer complete with unit spine, proceed as follows:
3 Disconnect the following electrical connections on main PCB:
PL16, microswitch
4 Ease free end of electrical looms and cables through hole in chassis (to
printer side).
5 Remove printer and unit spine by removing two bolts, shakeproof
washers and plain washers securing spine to chassis.
20.3.4 Fitting the printer (CX34)

To fit printer complete with unit spine, proceed as follows:
1 Fit printer and unit spine to chassis by fitting two bolts, shakeproof
washers and plain washers.
2 Carefully ease free end of electrical looms and cables through hole in
chassis (to main PCB side).
3 Connect following electrical connections on main PCB and ensure a
natural positioning of all cables without mechanical strain:
PL16, microswitch
20.3.5 Cleaning the print head

To clean the print head use the special cleaning kit (see Parts List for Part
Number of kit) and carefully follow the instructions provided with the kit.
20.3.6 Changing the take–up motor

To change the take–up motor, proceed as follows:
1 Remove printer as detailed in Sections 20.3.1 and 20.3.3, as
appropriate.
2 Remove drive cone by removing Posidrive screw and shakeproof
washer set within bore of drive cone.
3 Disconnect take–up motor loom at the interconnection.
4 Remove take–up motor/gearbox by removing three sets of Posidrive
screws and shakeproof washers from stand–off pillars.

5 Fit new take–up motor/gearbox complete with drive cone using three
sets of Posidrive screws and shakeproof washers.
6 Connect take–up motor loom at interconnection.
7 Fit drive cone to motor drive shaft using Posidrive screw and
shakeproof washer through bore of drive shaft.
8 Fit printer as detailed in Sections 20.3.2 and 20.3.4, as appropriate.
20.3.7 Changing the stepper motor

To change the stepper motor and drive belt, proceed as follows:
appropriate.
2 Disconnect take–up motor loom at the interconnection: this prevents
damage when stepper motor is removed.
3 Cut cable ties attaching stepper motor loom to stand–off pillar, noting
their position.
4 Remove stepper motor by removing the hexagon headed screws,
shakeproof washers and plain washers securing stepper motor to
stand–off pillars: drive belt will fall away.
5 If necessary, remove drive gear from shaft of stepper motor by
removing grub screw from outer rim.
6 If necessary, fit drive gear to shaft of new stepper motor using grub
screw in outer rim. Check that stepper motor turns freely and that drive
gear is not too near motor casing.
7 Using new drive belt, fit stepper motor to three stand–off pillars
ensuring that wiring harness outlet of stepper motor faces drive gear on
friction roller.
8 Adjust position of stepper motor so that drive belt is tight. Secure
stepper motor using the two of hexagon headed screws, and four
shakeproof washers and plain washers (two washers either side motor
brackets).
9 Connect the take–up motor loom at the interconnection. Attach loom to
stand–off pillar using a cable tie.
11 When installed in unit, current drawn by stepper motor must be checked
and, if necessary, adjusted (refer to Section 20.2).
20.3.8 Changing the friction roller

To change the friction roller, proceed as follows:
appropriate.
2 Remove paper cassette by setting print head arm upwards (so lifting
print head) and pulling cassette outwards. Print head is to remain lifted
throughout following procedure.

3 Remove toothed belt from friction roller’s drive gear by loosening the
tension on the toothed belt by undoing (but not removing) the two
screws securing the stepper motor to the stand–up pillars.
4 Remove friction roller by removing the two sets of Posidrive screws and
shakeproof washers from end of bracket: thrust washer will fall away
and friction roller can be pulled out of spine.
5 Insert new friction roller in spine and fit thrust washer onto end of spine.
Secure to bracket using two Posidrive screws and shakeproof washers.
6 Fit drive gear to spigot of friction roller using grub screw at rim of drive
gear, ensuring grub screw contacts with machined flat on spindle.
7 Re–fit toothed belt.
8 Tension belt then tighten stepper motor securing screws.
10 Fit paper cassette (push–fit) and secure by setting print head arm
downwards (so setting print head).
11 When installed in a unit, print density and current drawn by stepper
motor must be checked and, if necessary, adjusted (refer to
Section 20.2).
20.3.9 Changing the print head

To change the print head only (which can be accomplished with printer installed
in a unit), proceed as follows:
1 Remove cover (CX20/CX30) or front housing (CX34) as detailed in
Section 3.
print head) and pulling cassette outwards: you may have tear off the
label or ticket roll at mouth of printer first. Print head is to remain lifted
3 If fitted to unit, remove ticket mouth (pull out).
4 Disconnect ribbon cable from rear of print head.
5 Remove print head by removing two sets of Posidrive screws and
shakeproof washers (if fitted to unit, gain access through ticket mouth
aperture).
6 Fit new print head and secure using two sets of Posidrive screws and
shakeproof washers.
7 Connect ribbon cable to rear of print head.
8 Fit cover (CX20/CX30) or front housing (CX34) as detailed in Section 3.
10 When installed in a unit, print density, print alignment and current drawn
by stepper motor must be checked and, if necessary, adjusted (refer to
Section 20.3).

20.3.10 Changing the photodetector

To change photodetector, proceed as follows:
appropriate.
2 Detach stepper motor from printer spine (refer to Section 20.3.7): there
is no need to cut the cable tie.
print head) and pulling cassette outwards.
4 Remove photodetector and bracket by removing nut (with integral
shakeproof washer) from bracket, then removing the screw with
shakeproof and plain washers, from the nut which is attached to the
spine: photodetector and bracket are now free.
5 Cut the cable tie securing the photodetector loom to the stand–off pillar.
6 Withdraw photodetector complete with flying connector by pulling
through aperture in printer spine.
7 Insert new photodetector in aperture in printer spine.
8 Fit bracket to printer spine by positioning over stud (in printer spine) and
securing with nut with integral shakeproof washer.
9 Locate new photodetector over stud in printer spine and secure to
bracket with screw and shakeproof and plain washers: this also helps to
secure bracket to spine.
10 Attach the photodetector loom to stand–off pillar (adjacent to slot) with
a cable tie.
11 Attach stepper motor to printer spine (refer to Section 20.3.7).
14 When installed in a unit, adjustment of photodetector must be checked
by printing a variety of tickets and labels.
20.3.11 Changing the printer mechanism
Caution
When pulling out printer head mechanism, be careful to

keep the print head away from the roller and thrust
bearing.
To change the printer mechanism (head, case and rollers, but excluding motors),
proceed as follows:
print head) and pulling cassette outwards. Print head is to remain lifted

2 Free the printer ribbon cable loom from top of printer spine.
3 Release but do not remove print head bracket by removing three sets
of Posidrive screws and shakeproof washers.
4 Carefully remove bracket, noting position of two shafts (one
spring–loaded) which locate within bracket: bracket must be
disengaged from print head arm.
5 Remove the thin flexible washer at the end of the non–spring loaded
shaft.
6 Remove print head lever (noting its position) by unscrewing slotted
screw at spring end.
7 Carefully withdraw print head assembly, complete with two shafts, and
withdraw ribbon cable through aperture over printer spine.
8 Printer should not require further disassembly.
9 Before fitting new printer, carefully fold ribbon cable such that electrical
receptacle faces outwards from stepper motor side (red trace colour to
outside of bend): do not fold too tightly.
10 Position printer assembly over print head arm (in raised position) and
engage two shafts (one spring loaded) in applicable holes in printer
spine.
11 Feed ribbon loom through slot in top of spine.
12 Fit thin flexible washer onto spindle (non–spring loaded).
13 Engage bracket to print head arm and to two shafts of print head
assembly.
14 Secure bracket using three sets of Posidrive screws and shakeproof
washers.
15 Replace arm.
16 Secure ribbon loom to T and B connector on top of printer spine.
downwards, so setting print head.
18 When installed in a unit, adjustment of print density must be checked,
and adjusted if necessary (refer to Section 20.3).

Section 21
Networking
Table of Contents:
21.1.1 Network cabling 21–4

21 — Networking
21.1 Networking
IMPORTANT (1):
The network’s cable screen MUST be connected to the chassis
of each network machine.
IMPORTANT (2):
An ISC link between machines with Phase 1.3 software release
and machines with pre–Phase 1.3 software release is not
possible.
NOTE: The ISC map, held in a slave, will revert to ’stand alone’ map when
the slave scale is disconnected from a system.
The CX20/CX30/CX34 machines can be included in a network. Each unit is

capable of being networked as either a Master or a Slave unit. The Master
supplies the current source for the system (unless a communications controller
is fitted – see Section 22). All units communicate with the network through
optical isolators.
Figure 21.1 Network Connections
Screen Network Cable shielded
Conductor 1
Conductor 2
Lead
1 3 1 3 1 3
Single
twisted
pair
6 7 6 7 6 7
MASTER SLAVE SLAVE
Machine’s Earth 9–way D–type plugs
Cable screen connected to chassis

(at each machine)
All units on the network can transmit certain data, such as transaction details,
totals, and operator–identifying codes; this data is acquired and processed by
the Master unit. If there is a large amount of network traffic being controlled by
the Master unit, the operation of the Master unit is slowed because of the
processor work load: the communications controller (comms PCB) option can
help with this (refer to Section NO TAG22). The Master unit is the only unit
enabled to transmit PLU data updates to all machines on the network.

21 — Networking
Nomination of Master or Slave identity is by way of a wire link in the external

plug which connects the unit to the network: pins 1–6 = Master; pins 3–7 =
Slave (see Figure 21.1) . The use of an external link means that changes are
not required to any unit to make it work as a Master. If the Master fails, another
unit can be plugged in to its network connection and this then becomes the
Master.
All network machines must have their chassis connected to the cable screen
(see Figure 21.2).
Figure 21.2 Cable Screen Connection
Ring tongue terminal (Part

Number 28135–402)
9 WAY D–TYPE PLUG
Connected to scale via

the fixing screw
Shield – cover with PVC insulating

sleeve (Part Number 4310410)
21.1.1 Network cabling

The following tables give the network conductor cabling types for up to 1 km of
cable, and their colour coding.
Table 21.1 Cable Type/Distance
Cable Type Distance (metres)

Belden 9501 or Alphawire 5471C Up to 500
Belden 8102 (low capacitance) 500 to 1000
Table 21.2 Cable Colour Coding
Cable Type Conductor 1 Conductor 2

Belden 9501 Red Black
Alphawire 5471C Red Black
Belden 8102 Blue/White Stripe White/Blue Stripe

Section 22
Communications
Controller
Table of Contents:
22.2 Network Connections 22–4
22.2.1 Dual comms controller operation 22–5
22.3 Comms PCB – Main Components 22–6

22 — Communications Controller
22.1 Description
IMPORTANT:
On systems fitted with a communications controller (comms
PCB), if the master machine fails it is essential that the
slaves/satellites are placed in to local mode and NOT powered
down and made stand alone.
NOTE 1: The communications controller is sometimes referred to as the data

processing engine (DPE).
NOTE 2: On systems using communications controllers, when a slave is

disconnected it will reset the service system configuration on power
up to show no communications controller fitted.
The communications controller (comms PCB) is an optional extra. When fitted,

it supplies the current source for the system and controls the ISC and
Host/Master communications interface, storing and totalising all transactions
occurring on the system.
The comms PCB utilises an 8MHz microprocessor with an 8 or 16 bit external
data bus. It can be fitted to one or more scales and communicates via three
bi–directional serial channels:
a) The Avery Berkel interscale communications multidrop network (ISC)
current loop. (The ISC channel is always present on comms PCB.)
b) An RS232 channel. This allows point–to–point Host/Master channel or
interface.
c) A Host master current loop network comprising up to 32 sub–masters.
NOTE: Options b) and c) are mutually exclusive.
The comms PCB is powered by the host machine’s power supply. The power
monitor and ISC signals are on a single connector from the main PCB. The
comms PCB provides its own battery back–up supply for its data RAM.
The following power supplies enter the comms PCB via PL1:
Voltage Current
+12VI 50mA maximum
–12VI 50mA maximum
0VI
+10VI (Unregulated) 750mA maximum
–10VI (Unregulated) 300mA maximum
The comms PCB has a 7805, 5V regulator (VR2) to provide +5VD for the main
logic supply and a 7805 regulator (VR1) which provides +5VI for use in the
RS232 interface.

22.1.1 C918 external comms controller unit

The comms controller PCB can be housed in a C918 external comms controller
unit.
22.2 Network Connections
IMPORTANT (1):
The network’s cable screen MUST be connected to the chassis
of each network machine.
IMPORTANT (2):
The link on the MASTER unit, between pins 1 and 6, is not used
on networks fitted with communications controllers. See
Figure 22.1.
Refer to Section 21 Networking.
The connections for MASTER and SLAVE units on networks using a
communications controller are detailed in Figure 22.1.
Figure 22.1 Network Connections (with Communications Controller)
Screen Network Cable shielded
Conductor 1
Conductor 2
Lead
1 3 1 3 1 3
Single
twisted
pair
6 7 6 7 6 7
MASTER SLAVE SLAVE
Machine’s Earth 9–way D–type plugs
Cable screen connected to chassis

(at each machine)

22.2.1 Dual comms controller operation
IMPORTANT:
Dual controller operation is only available on networks with
Phase 1.3 software release and above.
Networks with dual comms controller operation have two comms controller
PCBs. One PCB operates as in a normal, single comms controller network.
The other operates as a back up by taking over from it if it fails.
The dual comms controller PCBs are modified versions of the single comms
controller PCBs and can be identified by the following:
diode between the collector of TR1 and D4
link between IC24 pin 5 and D16
CHANGE REFERENCE label with 0 & 1 highlighted – this shows that
modification has been done
The part numbers of the PCBs available for dual controller operation are:
71014–395 Mod.5 and above.
71014–512 Mod.4 and above.
NOTE 1: The following PCBs, when suitably modified, can be used for dual
controller operation prior to the above PCBs becoming available:
71014–395 Mods.2, 3 and 4
71014–512 Mods.2 and 3.
NOTE 2: Comms controller PCBs with Mod.1 copperwork can not be modified
for dual controller operation.

22.3 Comms PCB – Main Components
Figure 22.2 Comms PCB – Component Highlight
SW2 D17
PL1
SW2
PL1
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
BAT1
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
BAT1
PL5
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
D17
IC1
TP13 TP15
PL5
TP2 TP3
TP15
TP3
TP4
TP1
TP13 TP1
TP4
TP2
LK1
LK1 LK6 IC16
TP14 TP16
SW3 TP16
LK7 SW1
LK6
LK7
IC31 TO IC38
INCLUSIVE
SW1 SW3 TP14 IC14

Table 22.1 Comms PCB – Main Components
Batteries
BAT1 For RAM back–up.
Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)
D17 The LED flashes to indicate software error or failure. The
number of flashes represent an error number (printed on TEST
REPORT instead of comms controller software number) which
represents a software error. See Section 10.
Integrated Circuits
IC1 Microprocessor
IC16 DUART
IC14 EPROM: the following types are available (selectable by setting
Links 6 and 7 – refer to Figure 22.3): 27512 (64k x 8); 27C101
(128k x 8); 27C020 (256k x 8); and 27C401 (512k x 8)
IC31 TO RAM: battery–backed static, maximum capacity 1Mb (8 x 128
IC38 Kbyte SMT devices)
INCLUSIVE
Links
LK1 Selects either 20mA current loop host/master or RS232
channel (see Figure 22.3)
LK6
LK7 EPROM program memory size
i selection
l ti ((see Fi
Figure 22
22.3)
3)
Electrical Connections
PL1 16–way right–angle IDC header. Provides the power supplies
and the ISC communications to the comms PCB.
PL5 10–way IDC header
Test Points
TP1 Host channel receive signal.
TP2 Host channel transmit signal.
TP3 ISC channel receive signal.
TP4 ISC channel transmit signal.
TP13 TO Not used.
TP16
INCLUSIVE
Switches
SW1 Not used (see Figure 22.4)
SW2 Battery ON or OFF (see Figure 22.4)
SW3 Selects main or back–up controller (see Figure 22.4)

Figure 22.3 Comms PCB – Links LK1, LK6, LK7
27C020 (256k x 8) 27512 (64k x 8) and 27C101

EPROM (128k x 8) EPROMs
LK1 LK1 Link LK6
1
1
1 1
1 1
27C401 (512k x 8)
EPROM
LK1
Link LK7
Links are in the
1
1–2 position
1 1
SW2
ÍÍÍÍ
PL1
BAT1
ÍÍÍÍ
D17
PL5
TP15
20mA (talking to computer) TP3
TP1
TP13
TP4
TP2
LK1
Link LK1 LK6
TP16
SW3TP14
LK1 LK7 SW1
1
1 1
RS232
LK1
1
1 1

Figure 22.4 Comms PCB – Switch Settings
Battery ON/OFF
(Switch SW2 is
in the Battery ON
position)
SW2
ÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍ
SW3
SW1
SW1: not used (always

set in this position)
SW2
ÍÍÍÍ
PL1
BAT1
ÍÍÍÍ
SW3: main controller selected D17
PL5
TP15
TP3
TP1
TP13
TP4
TP2
LK1
LK6
SW3 SW3TP14
TP16
LK7 SW1
SW1
SW3: back–up SW3

controller selected
SW1

22.4 Servicing
22.4.1 C918 external comms controller unit

For servicing details of the of the C918 refer to Page xvii in the Overview
section.

Section 23
RS232 Interface PCB
(CX20 W)
Table of Contents:
23.1 General 23–3
23.2 Circuit Description 23–4
23.2.1 RS232 interface 23–4
23.2.2 Wrapper control signal interface 23–4
23.2.3 Wrapper ready signal (control interface version 2 only) 23–4
23.2.4 Scale in control signal (control interface version 2 only) 23–5
23.2.5 Analogue interface 23–5
23.2.6 ”Wrapper Start” relay control 23–5
23.2.7 Label taken detection 23–5
23.2.8 ULMA 200 series wrapper protocol 23–6
23.2.9 Serial interface devices 23–6
23.3.1 Replacing the RS232 interface PCB 23–7

23 — RS232 Interface PCB (CX20 W)
23.1 General
The RS232 interface PCB provides an interface with a wide range of wrapping
machines. It supplies RS232 ASCII serial data for the ULMA 200 Series which
enables selection of an internal wrapper program or initialising the wrapper start
cycle. The RS232 interface PCB also provides a bi–directional interface which
allows communication with an external printer for an Italian ADF type machine.
The RS232 interface PCB has the following features:
filtering for the remote load cell
label taken detection
’Wrapper Start’ output
RS232 serial interface for communication with the ULMA UL200 Series of
machines
all ’outside world’ signals are electrically isolated by relay or optocouplers
analogue input filter
RTS and CTS provide the optional controls of ’Wrapper Ready’ and ’Scale
in Control’.
Figure 23.1 RS232 Interface PCB
PL1: 16–way IDC to CX20 W PL5: 2–way molex to PL2: 3–way molex to CX20 W
PL14 comms controller CX20 W PL12 – label PL9 – cash drawer
taken relay
PL3: 3 pin DIN to old style

wrapper – only 1 and 2 used
PL4: 4–way molex – label

PL8: 14–way IDC to taken reflective photocell
TB1: to A/D PCB
9–way D–type plug RS232
TB2: to remote transducer serial channel ULMA or
ADF printer PL7: 10–way IDC to CX20 W PL18
Label taken detection is provided by a reflective photocell, connected to the

RS232 interface PCB, which detects when a label has not been taken.
Operation of the wrapper is then inhibited.
Wrapper start output is provided by a relay contact closure which initiates a
wrapper start. (Only for old style wrapper systems, for example, ULMA Chikit.)

An RS232 serial interface transmits data .at 2400 Baud to the ULMA UL200
Series of machines.
23.2 Circuit Description

The RS232 interface PCB provides an RS232 serial channel by automatically
multiplexing the DCU channel.
23.2.1 RS232 interface

The DCU has a hard–wire link inside the D–type shell. The main PCB drives
one end of the link with a multiplexed scan pulse and reads the other via a
buffer to establish when the DCU is connected.
The ’switched’ DCU channel on the RS232 interface PCB also checks for the
presence of this scan pulse to disable the RS232 channel when the DCU is
connected. When present, the scan pulse is used to trigger a re–triggerable
monostable (IC3). This produces a high signal that then disables tri–state
buffers (IC4 A–B) disconnecting the RS232 Rxd and RTS signals.
The default condition when no external device is connected to the DCU port is
such that all four RS232 signals are enabled. These signals are opto–isolated
using 6N139 opto–couplers and then converted to RS232 levels via a 75154
(IC10) and a 75150 (IC11).
23.2.2 Wrapper control signal interface

The RS232 interface PCB has two versions of hardware handshaking control to
make it more flexible for future alternative applications. Both control interface
versions use the same control lines and are, therefore, mutually exclusive.
Control interface version 1 is implemented as one standard RS232 RTS output
signal and one standard CTS input signal if at some stage in the future they are
required. For this version 0R resistors R40, R42 and R43 are fitted and R39,
R41 and R44 omitted from the RS232 interface PCB.
Control interface version 2 is implemented specifically for the ULMA machine
and consists of one input signal (Wrapper Ready) and one output signal (Scale
In Control). Voltage levels 0V and +24V are supplied from the ULMA wrapping
machine. For this version 0R resistors R39, R41 and R44 are fitted and R40,
R42 and R43 omitted from the RS232 interface PCB.
NOTE: The standard RS232 interface PCB assembly will be built to

version 2, namely ”Wrapper Ready” and ”Scale In Control” signals.
23.2.3 Wrapper ready signal (control interface version 2 only)

This signal is an input to the scale and is used by the scale’s software to
determine when the wrapper is switched on and setup in the correct operating
mode. The scale’s software will detect 0V on DUART CTS channel B input pin
when the wrapper is ready for use.

23.2.4 Scale in control signal (control interface version 2

only)
This signal is an output from the scale to the wrapping machine to show the
scale is in wrapping mode and the wrapping machine needs to take control of
the wrapping system. The scale software writes a 0 to the DUART RTS channel
B pin to assert ”Scale In Control” true.
To drive these isolated signals the interface circuit makes use of the ULMA +24V
to act as the current source.
23.2.5 Analogue interface

As the weighing platform is remote, an LC filter is included on the RS232
interface PCB that filters external noise.
23.2.6 ”Wrapper Start” relay control

For the older style of wrapper the RS232 interface is not used, instead a relay
closure initiates the wrap cycle. The main PCB cash drawer output is used to
close the relay. To do this the microprocessor on the main PCB checks for a
steady weight and also label removed. When this condition is true the scale
signals the printer microprocessor to start the wrapper. The printer
microprocessor then switches on a transistor to close the relay on the RS232
interface PCB.
The relay current is approximately 10mA, the contact closure time is 100ms.
The LED D2 (on the interface PCB) flashes momentarily when the wrapper
signal is fired.
23.2.7 Label taken detection

A reflective photocell is used to determine whether the previous label has been
removed. An LM393 comparator is used to generate a logic output from the
phototransistor collector signal. As the RS232 interface PCB has to work with
no changes to the main PCB the only main PCB input is in a switch matrix. This
means that a ’voltage free’ contact closure is needed, hence relay RL2 is used.
LED D3 gives a visible indication of what state the photocell is in, LED
illuminated means a label is present, in this state RL2 will be closed.

23.2.8 ULMA 200 series wrapper protocol

The ULMA 200 Series machine enables a remote device to select any of 99
preset wrapper programs via a program reference number transmitted serially.
The program number has film dimensions and tension parameters stored in the
wrapper.
As the ULMA RS232 channel is receive only the scale has to transmit a small
range of ASCII control strings:
String ’S’ starts a wrapper cycle.
String ’P, Digit low, Digit high’ selects a wrapper program (for example,
’P, 1, 4’ selects program number 41).

23.2.9 Serial interface devices

There are now a large number of devices that can that be connected to channel
B of the 82530 DUART on the main PCB. In a typical application not all devices
will be required. There are a number of invalid combinations of devices. In
addition to the ULMA wrapper the possible serial peripheral devices are:
DCU
Plugs into front of machine, detect link present within DCU. This device can be
used with the ULMA interface PCB, the RS232 interface PCB is temporarily
disabled.
Remote programming keyboard
This plugs into the front of the machine, detect link present within keyboard.
This device can be used with the ULMA interface PCB, the RS232 interface
PCB is temporarily disabled.
Remote operators keyboard
Plugs into front of machine, no detect link. This device cannot be used with the
ULMA interface PCB.
TK keyboard (internal or external versions)
The internal version plugs into a TK connector within the machine, this
connector is effectively in parallel with the DCU socket. The TK keyboard has
no detect link. This device cannot be used with the ULMA interface PCB.
External printer
This plugs into the new RS232 connector. If an ULMA wrapper is required with
an external printer, the ULMA now plugs into another RS232 channel built into
the remote printer.
23.3 Servicing
23.3.1 Replacing the RS232 interface PCB

To remove the RS232 PCB, proceed as follows:
use of the DCU).
4 Remove main PCB, with display PCB and rear plate still attached (refer
to Section 11).
5 Disconnect all electrical connections from the RS232 interface PCB.
6 Remove the six screws with integral shakeproof washers securing the
RS232 interface PCB to the pillars in the base. If necessary, unscrew
and remove the plastic pillar protruding through the hole in the RS232
interface PCB. Lift out RS232 PCB.
7 Fit the RS232 interface PCB in the reverse order.

Section 24
Wiring
Interconnections
Table of Contents:
24.1 CX20/CX30 24–3
24.2 CX20 W 24–8

24 — Wiring Interconnections
24.1 CX20/CX30
Figure 24.1 Connector Pins on Main PCB – PL6, PL8 and PL13
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ ROHM-
ÇÇÇÇÇ
34 0VP PRINTER
33 24V HEAD
31
32
30
0VP
24V
0VP
ÇÇÇÇÇ SERIAL–DATA–CLK
SERIAL–DATA–IN 13
14
24V SC2 12 A/D PCB

29
0VP SC1 11
28
24V CAL 10 PL1
27
n/a 0VD 9
26
DATA FROM HEAD XOVER 8
25
n/a INTO(DRDY) 7
24
DATA CLOCK ZERO–PERIOD 6
23
n/a RAMP–DOWN 5
22
LATCH ANALOGUE CHECK 4
21
STROBES +10V 3
20
n/a 0VA 2
19
STROBES –10V 1
18
17 TH2
16 STROBES
15 TH1
14 STROBES
13 n/a
12 STROBES
11 +5VD PL13
10 0VD
PL6
9 DATA TO HEAD
8 0VP
7 24V
6 0VP
5 24V PL8
4 0VP
3 24V
2 0VP
1 24V
ËË
PL8
ËË
È
SK1
24Vdc PRINTER (Black) 9 1 24Vdc PRINTER (Blue)
Ê
0VP (Red) 10 2 0VMM (Brown)
FIL1 9.6ac (Brown) 11 3 FIL2 9.6ac (Blue)
46Vdc DISPLAY (Green) 12 4 0VA (Black) SMPS
0VI (Blue) 13 5 +12VI (Brown) PCB
–12VI (Purple) 14 6 0VDIS (Red)
ËË
ËË
0VD (Grey) 15 7 +10V (Orange)
È
+5VD (White) 16 8 –10V (Yellow)
È PL1

Figure 24.2 Connector Pins on Main PCB – PL2, PL9, PL12 and PL15
40 FIL2
39 FIL2 NETWORK ISC
10 n/a
38 FIL1
9 n/a
37 FIL1
8 n/a
36 0VDIS
7 n/a
35 0VDIS
6 n/a
34 0VDIS
5 MS SENSE
33 0VDIS
4 0VI
32 DSI
3 n/a
31 DATA OUT
2 SIGNAL
30 +VDIS
1 I SOURCE
29 +VUN
28 DSO
27 CUST. A110 DSO
26 CLK
25 0VDIS
24 STROBE
DISPLAY 23 +5VD
PCB 22 INH
21 LED5
20 LED4
19 LED3
18 LED2 PL2
CON1 LED1
17
16 DB15
PL9 PL15
15 DB14
14 DB13
13 DB12
12 DB11
11 DB10
10 G09
9 G08
8 G07
7 G06 PL12
6 G05
ËËËË
5 G04
4 G03 PL4
3 G02
ËËËË
ËËËË
2 G01
ËËËË
1 G00
ËËËË
ËËËË
CASHDRAWER
CONTROL 3
SOCKET
SENSE 2 KEYBOARD
24VDC 1
PRINTER Signal input (0V enable

ENABLE/DISABLE 2 printer, 5V disable printer)
SWITCH GRD09
1

Figure 24.3 Connector Pins on Main PCB – PL7, PL14, PL17, PL18 and SK1
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
6 Control signal 0V to run
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
DC MOTOR
5 24VDC
4 OUT B
COMMS PCB 3 OUT B STEPPER
2 OUT A MOTOR
1 OUT A
2 Set to 3.7V
TEST CONNECTOR
1 0VD
16 –10V
15 0VD
14 +10V
13 +10V
SK1
12 0VD
11 –12VI PL7
10 0VI
9 +12VI
8 0VI
7 SIGNAL
6 0VD
5 RESET
4 0VD
PL14
3 RESET PL18
2 0VD
1 0VD PL17
16 0VD
15 0VD
14 G1
16 0VD
13 G2
15 0VD
KEYSWITCH
12 G3
14 D07
11 G4
13 D06
10 RETURN
LCD PCB
12 D05
9 CTS
11 D04
8 GRD09
10 D03
7 TXD
9 D02
6 0VD
8 D01
5 RXD
7 D00
4 DCD
6 0VD
3 0VD
5 LCD_RW
2 RTS
4 LCD_RS
1 +5VDCU
3 CONTRAST
2 +5VD
1 0VD

Figure 24.4 Connector Pins on Main PCB – PL20, PL19 and PL16
40 FIL1
39 FIL1
38 FIL1
37 1c
36 1g
35 1f
34 1b
33 1a
32 1e
31 1d
30 DP1
29 F17G
28 COM1
27 1h
26 F16G
25 0VDIS
REAR
DISPLAY 24 STROBE
PCB 23 F12G
22 F11G
21 0VDIS
20 0VDIS
19 F8G
18 F7G PL20
17 F6G
16 2h
15 F3G
14 COM2
13 DP2
12 2d
11 2e
10 2a
PL16
9 2b
8 2f
7 F2G
6 2g
5 2c
4 F15G PL19
3 FIL2
2 FIL2
1 FIL2
PHOTOSENSOR
AND SWITCHES
8 SWITCH 2 0VD
Pin signals are the same as
7 SWITCH 2 SENSE for PL20.
6 SWITCH 1 RETURN
5 SWITCH 1 DRIVE
4 PHOTO TRANS
EMITTER FRONT DISPLAY PCB
3 0VD
PHOTO TRANS
2 COLLECTOR
1 PHOTOCODE +

Figure 24.5 Connector Pins on Main PCB – PL3
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
AXIOM-
PRINTER
ÇÇÇÇÇ
HEAD
26 24V
25 DATA TO HEAD
24 24V
23 0VP
22 0VP
21 0VP
20 +5VD
19 STROBES
18 STROBES
17 TH2
16 n/a
15 TH1
14 0VD
13 0VP
12 STROBES
11 DATA CLOCK
10 DATA RETURN
9 LATCH
8 +5VD PL3
7 STROBES
6 0VP
5 0VP
4 24V
3 0VD
2 24V
1 STROBES

24.2 CX20 W
Figure 24.6 PCB Interconnection Diagram (CX20 W)
To comms controller (70734–522)
ÍÍÍ
PL1
PL1
ÍÍÍ
To remote
transducer
connector
on
connector
plate COMMS PCB
assembly RS232 PCB Wrapper output
(70734–526)
(70734–551)
PL5 PL2 PL3 PL4

TB2 TB1 PL8
PL7
Label taken output (70734–523)
Wrapper input (0734–524)
RS232 output (70734–665) To reflective photocell (70734–527)

To output plate
To A/D (70734–525)
(70734–565)
PL20 PL2
PL15 ISC interface
SK1
A/D PCB
PL9
PL13
Printer
motor PL6
PL7
Printer PL3
MAIN PCB
PL16
PL14
PL8
PL12 PL17
PL4
PL19
PL18
DISPLAY PCB
PL1
È
È ËËË Keyboard
ËËË ÊÊ ËË
SMPS PCB
ËËË ÊÊÈ
SK1
PL1 LCD DISPLAY PCB

Figure 24.7 Connector Pins on RS232 PCB (CX20 W) – PL1, PL2 and PL5
16 n/a
15 0VD
14 +10V
13 +10V
12 0VD
11 –12VI
10 0VI
9 +12VI
8 n/a
7 n/a
6 n/a
5 n/a
4 n/a
3 n/a
2 n/a
1 n/a
ÍÍÍ
PL1
PL1
ÍÍÍ
RS232 PCB COMMS PCB
PL5 PL2 PL3 PL4

TB2 TB1 PL8
PL7
Refer to PL9 on
main PCB. See
SIGNAL RETURN
Figure 24.2.
1 SIGNAL +VE
CONTROL
CONTROL
A/D
RELAY OUTPUT
2
RELAY OUTPUT
PL9 PCB
PL1
3
MAIN PCB
PL14
2
PL12

Figure 24.8 Connector Pins on RS232 PCB (CX20 W) – PL3, PL4, PL7, PL8,
TB1 and TB2
CX9/A702 REMOTE ’OLD STYLE’

WEIGHING PLATFORM WRAPPER
5–way DIN Connects to

(Green) Excit. +
(Yellow) Signal –
on connector
RELAY OUTPUT
RELAY OUTPUT
3–way DIN
(Red) Signal +
(Blue) Excit. –
plate connector on
RS232 PCB
assembly output plate
PL3 PL4
TB2 TB1 PL8
4
2
PL7
3
REFLECTIVE PHOTOCELL
1
4 (Yellow) Signal –
PHOTODIODE
3 (Red) Signal + 1 ANODE
2 (Blue) Excit. – PHOTRANSISTOR
(Green) Excit. + 2 COLLECTOR
1
PHOTODIODE
3 CATHODE
14 n/a PHOTRANSISTOR
Connects to n/a 4 EMITTER
13
14–way IDC 12 n/a 4–way molex.
connector on n/a Connects to the
11 10 n/a
output plate n/a label–taken
10 9 CTS
1 photocell
9 ULMA +24V 8 DC2
6 8 n/a 7 TXD
OR ADF PRINTER
ULMA WRAPPER
2 7 RX 6 DC1
7 6 RTS 5 RXD
3 5 TX 4 n/a
8 4 CTS 3 n/a
4 3 SCALE IN CONTROL 2 RTS
9 2 WRAPPER READY 1 n/a
5 1 0V
IDC pins
D–type pins A/D

(output plate) PCB
PL1
3TB1
MAIN PCB
CONNECTOR
DCU D–TYPE
PL18

Section 25
Appendices
Table of Contents:
25.1 Configuration Option Tables for Old Software 25–3
25.1.1 Option Tables for Mod.3 Software Release 25–3
25.1.2 Option Tables for Pre–Phase 1.2 Software Release 25–7
25.2 Label Formatting 25–17
25.2.1 Calculating the offset 25–17
25.2.2 Field data tables 25–18

25 — Appendices
25.1 Configuration Option Tables for Old Software

The following sub–sections give the configuration option tables, used during
machine configuration (see Section 6), on machines with software prior to Phase
1.3 software release.
25.1.1 Option Tables for Mod.3 Software Release

The following option tables are for Mod.3 software release.
Table 25.1 Machine Configuration
0 30 kg x 5 g E 300 kg 100 g
1 25 lb x 1/8 oz F Spare
2 30 lb x 0.01 lb G Spare
3 15 kg x 5g H Spare
4 6 kg x 2 g I Spare
5 30 kg AVR J 5.2 kg x 2 g (string cell)
8 6 kg x 1 g M 12 kg x 2 g (string cell)
A 30 kg x 10 g O 30 kg x 5 g (string cell)
B 60 kg x 20 g P 60 kg x 10 g (string cell)
C 60 lb AVR Q 120 kg x 20 g (string cell)
D 150 kg x 50 g R 150 kg AVR (string cell)
4 Cumulative free tare; stored tare; grad- 9 Cumulative free tare; stored tare; all these
uated tare tare modes retained
5 Free tare only

25 — Appendices

1 No reference to tax value on receipt 2 Tax value shown on receipt
Digit 9 — Weight Reading Freeze
1 Weight reading freeze OFF 1 Weight reading freeze OFF
2 Weight reading freeze ON 2 Weight reading freeze ON
3 Ten division weight filter 3 Ten division weight filter
items
items
3 Add nonweighed items only
1 Selectable from Machine Z menu 2 Permanently enabled
Table 25.2 System Configuration

Country options are fixed A to N: if a soft option is required select X (refer to Table
25.3).
A United Kingdom I Australia
B Holland J New Zealand
C France K Belgium
D Germany L Austria
E Canada M Italy
F Mexico N Denmark
G USA X COUNTRY OVERRIDE
H South Africa

25 — Appendices

1 No communications controller fitted 3 Communications controller fitted; no sys-
tem menus
Digit 4 — Voids
not active)
operator totals
operator totals
security totals
2 System mode
1 1200 Baud 3 4800 Baud
2 2400 Baud 4 9600 Baud
Digit 14 — UNDEFINED

25 — Appendices
Table 25.3 Country Override Configuration
The country override option is selected by choosing X option in Digit 1 in System

Configuration (refer to Table 25.2).
1 0 to 99999 3 0 to 999990
2 0 to 999999
Digit 2 — Price Rounding
2 To nearest 2.5
0 No currency A Swiss Franc (Fr)
1 Pound sterling (£) B Currency P
2 Dollar ($) C Currency E
3 Rand (R) D Currency K
4 Franc (F) E Currency M
5 Austrian shilling (S) F Currency L
6 Krona (Kr) G Currency D
7 Deutschmark (DM) H Peso (N$)
8 Guilder (ƒ) I Lira (Lit)
9 Finnish mark (mk)

25 — Appendices
25.1.2 Option Tables for Pre–Phase 1.2 Software Release

The following option tables are for pre–Phase 1.2 software release.
Table 25.4 Machine Configuration for the LS/ECR Machines
0 30 kg x 5 g E 300 kg 100 g
5 Free tare only

25 — Appendices

1 Weight reading freeze OFF 2 Weight reading freeze ON
items
items
Note: This option is not available on machines with software 0.42F or
before.
Table 25.5 System Configuration for the LS/ECR Machines

Country options are fixed A to M: if a soft option is required select X (refer to Table
25.6).
A United Kingdom H South Africa
B Holland I Australia
C France J New Zealand
D Germany K Belgium
E Canada L Austria
F Mexico M Switzerland
1 No comms controller fitted 3 Comms controller fitted; no system menus
2 Comms controller fitted
Digit 4 — Voids

25 — Appendices

25 — Appendices

1 Only trading mode active 2 Trading and training modes active
1 Sub totals and totals 2 Sub totals only
operator totals
operator totals
security totals
2 System mode
Digit 12 — Host Comms Baud Rate
1 1200 Baud 3 4800 Baud
2 2400 Baud 4 9600 Baud
Note: This option is not available on machines with software prior to
mod. 2.

25 — Appendices
Table 25.6 Country Override Configuration for the LS/ECR Machines


1 0 to 99999 3 0 to 999990
2 0 to 999999
2 To nearest 2.5
0 No currency 9 Finnish mark (mk)
1 Pound sterling A Swiss Franc (Fr)
2 Dollar ($) B Currency P
3 Rand (R) C Currency E
4 Franc (F) D Currency K
5 Austrian shilling (S) E Currency M
6 Krona (Kr) F Currency L
7 Deutschmark (DM) G Currency D
8 Guilder (ƒ)
Table 25.7 Machine Configuration for the LS and TK Machines
0 30 kg x 5 g E 300 kg x 100 g

25 — Appendices

5 Free tare only
items
2 Add weighed goods and nonweighed 5
items

25 — Appendices
Table 25.8 System Configuration for the LS and TK Machines

25.9).
D Germany K Belgium
E Canada L Austria
Digit 4 — Voids
operator totals
operator totals
security totals
2 System mode

25 — Appendices

1 1200 Baud 3 1200 Baud
2 2400 Baud 4 2400 Baud
mod. 2.
Table 25.9 Country Override Configuration for the LS and TK Machines

1 0 to 99999 3 0 to 999990
2 0 to 999999
2 To nearest 2.5
8 Guilder (ƒ)

25 — Appendices
Table 25.10 Machine Configuration for the R and ECR Machines
0 30 kg x 5 g E 300 kg 100 g
5 Free tare only
Inclusive tax systems only:

25 — Appendices

Table 25.11 System Configuration for the R and ECR Machines

25.12).
D Germany K Belgium
E Canada L Austria
Digit 4 — Voids
operator totals

25 — Appendices

operator totals
security totals
2 System mode
1 1200 Baud 3 4800 Baud
2 2400 Baud 4 9600 Baud
mod. 2.
Table 25.12 Country Override Configuration for the R and ECR Machines
1 0 to 99999 3 0 to 999990
2 0 to 999999
2 To nearest 2.5
8 Guilder (ƒ)

25 — Appendices
25.2 Label Formatting
25.2.1 Calculating the offset

To calculate the offset value a (in co–ordinates) use the following formula:
Equation (1) a = c – (d x b)
Where: a = offset value (co–ordinate)
b = width of label (mm)
c = total number of dots across print head
d = print head dots per millimetre
As there are a total of 160 dots across the print head and there are three dots
per millimetre, we can simplify the equation:
Equation (2) a = 160 – 3b
Example:
You are creating a new label format for a 38 mm wide label. The offset
value is determined as follows:
Using Equation (2), where b equals 38:
a = 160 – 3b
a = 160 – (3 x 38)
a = 160 – 114
a = 46
Therefore, offset value is 046 co–ordinates.

25 — Appendices
25.2.2 Field data tables

It is recommended that, for each new label format, Tables 25.13 and 25.14 be
photocopied, filled in and kept, giving a copy to the customer, for record
purposes.
Table 25.13 Field Measurements
Name Code x1 (→) y1 (↑) x2 (→) y2 (↑)
TEXT 1 0
TEXT 2 1
TEXT 3 2
SALES TEXT 1 8
DATE 1 4
DATE 2 3
UNIT PRICE 5
WEIGHT/ITEMS 6
TOTAL PRICE 7
BARCODE F
LEGEND 1 9
LEGEND 2 A
LEGEND 3 B
UNIT PRICE SYMBOL C
WEIGHT/ITEM SYMBOL D
TARE G
TARE SYMBOLS H
UNIT PRICE 2 I
UNIT PRICE 2 SYMBOL J
TOTAL PRICE 2 K
TOTAL PRICE 2 SYMBOL L
OPERATOR NAME M
SALES TEXT 2 N

25 — Appendices
Table 25.14 Programmed Data
Customer: Format Reference Number:

Machine Type: Rotation (0°, 90° or 180°) :
Date:
Font Ref
Ref.
TEXT 1 0
TEXT 2 1
TEXT 3 2
SALES TEXT 1 8
DATE 1 4
DATE 2 3
UNIT PRICE 5
WEIGHT/ITEMS 6
TOTAL PRICE 7
BARCODE F
LEGEND 1 9
LEGEND 2 A
LEGEND 3 B
UNIT PRICE SYMBOL C
WEIGHT/ITEM SYMBOL D
TARE G
TARE SYMBOLS H
UNIT PRICE 2 I
UNIT PRICE 2 SYMBOL J
TOTAL PRICE 2 K
TOTAL PRICE 2 SYMBOL L
OPERATOR NAME M
SALES TEXT 2 N

Section PL
Parts List
CX20/CX30/CX34 Service Manual PL–1

PL – Parts List
Figure PL.1 CX20 Series
430
310
170
270
110
790
400
690 610, 620
140, 150, 260,

70 60
330, 340
350
630
320
240
90 120, 780
10
130 770 300
710
290 40
640
470
280, 760
490, 600
490, 600 180, 680, 700
510 30
190, 440,
530 450 20
230
500
170 160, 540, 550, 560, 570, 960
380
410
360, 370 50, 390, 590
250
PL–2 CX20/CX30/CX34 Service Manual

PL – Parts List
Figure PL.1 ITEMS – CX20 Series

Item numbers preceded with ’N’ are not illustrated.
Item Description Part Number
10 PCB, A/D Converter 71014–646
20 Base 61661–176
30 Skirt, Base:
UK: RFI Coated 61661–181
Non–UK: Non–RFI Coated 61661–175
40 Spacer, Transducer Block 63644–430
50 Cover, For Switch Mode PSU 61226–188
60 Protection Plug, Cross 18137–552
70 Cross 68481–138
N80 Rubber Adhesive Pad, Cross 18166–009
90 Bracket, Rear Display (integral rear display only) 63673–110
N100 Blank Panel, Rear, Cover (tower display only) 62328–107
110 Housing Case:
UK only: RFI Coated 61333–207
120 PCB, Display, Vendor, In–line, Plug In 71014–434
130 Nut, Instrument Head 65522–403
140 Bezel, Keyboard *68773–631
* Part Number of Keyboard Bezel for new Membrane Keyboard and Backplate Assembly is 68772–407.
150 Cover, Keyboard 65618–119
160 Keyswitch Assembly 70627–120
170 Screw, No.4 x 12: Rec Pan Hd S/Tap 13831–057
180 Housing, LCD 61778–106
190 Foot, Levelling 61664–151
N200 Loom (Earth), Keyboard 70611–337
N210 Loom, Keyboard/Main PCB 70734–287
N220 Loom, Power Supply/Main PCB 70734–537
N230 Loom, Display/Keyswitch/DCU 70734–439
240 PCB, Main 71014–696
250 Mains Plug/IEC Connector Assembly:
UK 70611–847
Canada, USA, Mexico 70611–846
Italy 70611–871
Germany, Holland, France, Belgium, Austria 70611–850
Switzerland 70611–848
260 **Membrane Keyboard:
All machines except USA, Canada, Mexico 70785–698
USA, Canada, Mexico only *70785–558
* Note 1: Part Number 70785–558 will be used while stocks last – then transfer to 70785–698.
** Note 2: Part Number of new Membrane Keyboard and Backplate Assembly is 70785–751.
270 Screw, Instrument Head, M4 63871–102
280 Screw, M5x16, Securing, Printer Spine 13758–544

PL – Parts List

290 Pillar, Long Bumper Stop 63547–406
300 Pillar, Short Bumper Stop 63547–407
310 Printer Door Assembly: 70228–248
Door, Printer Lower 62348–106
Door, Printer Upper 62348–108
320 PCB, Display, Customer, Plug In (integral display only) 71014–434
330 Overlay, Keyboard, Operator’s:
UK (Prog/Oper Overlay) 65379–163
UK: LS, R 65378–976
UK: ECR, ECR/LS 65378–977
Canada 65379–161 and
65378–999
Belgium 65379–112
Mexico 65379–127
USA 65378–973
Holland 65378–982
France 65378–986
Germany, Austria, Switzerland 65378–975
340 Overlay, Keyboard, Programming:
UK 65379–197
Canada 65379–236
USA 65379–231
Italy 65379–229
Holland 65379–239
France 65379–237
Belgium 65379–194
Mexico 65379–238
350 Cup, Rubber, Conductive (For Cross) 63228–108
360 Spirit Level 70075–104
370 Boot, Spirit Level 61355–125
380 Stamping Plate Assembnly Kit (CX20/CX30): 70421–226
Plate Assembly, Stamping 70085–701
Screw, No.6 x 20, Rec, Csk Hd, Self–tapper 13831–465
Plug, Lead 66421–106
390 PCB, Switch Mode Power Supply Assembly
240V 71014–457
110V 71014–461
400 Ticket Mouth:
No printer 70076–715
With printer 70076–713

PL – Parts List

410 Transducer:
T103 + Fitt: 15 kg; Unsealed 70717–432
T103 + Fitt: 15 kg; Sealed 70717–434
T103 + Fitt; 6 kg; Unselaed 70717–431
T103 + Fitt; 15 kg AVR; Unselaed 70717–481
N420 Ferrite Sleeve: 13 I/D 24 0/D 8 Lg 18136–855
430 Weigh Plate 68412–541
440 Rubber Foot (’BUMPON’), Adhesive 18166–001
450 Plate Assembly, Mains Input 70785–580
N460 Fuse, 2A, Anti–surge, 20 mm 70662–157
470 Loom, Cash Drawer 70734–289
N480 Loom, Mains Input/PSU 70734–302
490 Loom, Host/Master 70734–374
500 Socket and EMI Filter, Mains Input 70785–414
510 Switch, Rocker (Mains Off/On) 70625–533
N520 Screw Lock–pin Kit 18136–073
530 Nut, M8, Hexagon, Full 13828–815
540 Screw, No.4 x 1/4”, Pan Head, Self–tapper 23818–428
550 Plate, Switch 65376–180
560 Nut and Captive Shakeproof Washer, M3 13828–804
570 Pillars, SMPS Cover Support 63526–170
N580 Rating Plate:
UK 67815–874
USA: 30 lb 67815–885
Mexico: 15 kg 67815–935
Canada: 15 kg 67815–942
Austria: 15 kg AVR 67815–976
Italy: 12 kg 67853–203
Holland: 15 kg AVR 67853–235
Germany: 15 kg 67853–237
Germany: 6 kg AVR 67853–239
Italy: 6 kg 67853–266
Italy: 30 kg x 5 g 67853–290
Canada: 30 lb 67853–318
CX20W: 15 kg 67853–359
CX20W: 30 lb 67853–362
CX20W: 23 lb 67853–365
590 Warning Label: Power Supply Cover 67835–389
600 Ferrite Core, Hinged, Split (UK only) 18136–866
610 Screw, M6 x 25, Skt, Hd Cap – for Cross 13811–141

PL – Parts List

620 Washer, M6, Plain – for Cross 15711–206
630 Support, PCB; Reverse Locking (Comms Controller) 18136–718
640 Printer Assembly:
Label/Receipt – see Figure PL.6 70588–520
Receipt – see Figure PL.5 70588–521
N650 Printer Cassette Assembly 70583–111
N670 Comms Controller Kit (includes fixings):
640K: Home CX300K00000000
1024K: Home CX300L00000000
640K: Export CX300M00000000
1024K: Export CX300N00000000
680 Screen, LCD:
Printed 67872–560
Blank 62328–109
690 Screen, Display:
R, LS/ECR, LS: Col/Mult; 25lb; UK 67872–682
E: Col/Int, Col/Mult; 30kg; Italy 67873–380
LS/ECR: Multi: 15kg AVR; Austria 67873–395
LS: 15 kg AVR: Col/Int; Met; Tower 67872–847
R, LS/ECR: Multi; 15kg AVR: Mexico 67873–120
LS/ECR: 12kg: Multi; Italy 67873–207
700 LCD Display Assembly 70785–582
710 Bracket, Front, Display 63673–111
N720 Back Plate, RFI Coated (Column Aperture):
N730 Label, Product: CX20W 67814–810
N740 Label, Weighpos: CX20 67814–801
N750 Spine, Printer, Blank (no printer) 66176–121
760 Washer, M5, Plain 15711–205
770 Plate, Cross Protector 66212–120
780 Loom, In–line Display 70734–303
790 Side, Cover:
UK only: RFI coated 62348–116
Non–UK: Non–RFI coated 62348–109
N800 PCB, Wrapper Interface 71014–676
N810 Column Dislay Kit: CX20 70421–233
N820 Column 61656–146
N830 Casting, Column 61656–144
N840 Plate, Column Casting 66211–513
N850 Back Plate, (Column), RFI 66254–121

PL – Parts List

N860 PCB, Display, Avoir, Multi–line (Customer and Vendor) 71014–353
N870 PCB, Display, Metric, Multi–line (Customer and Vendor) 71014–373
N880 PCB, Display, In–line, Head Up 71014–408
N890 Loom, Head Up Display 70734–548
N900 Loom, Wraper Connector 70734–526
N910 Loom, Wrapper Control 70734–524
N920 Loom, Photocell Switch 70734–523
N940 Loom, A/D PCB 70734–525
N950 Loom, Display External 70734–435
960 Set of Keys, Keyring and Fob; Avery Berkel:
Export (White) 13846–019
Home (Red) 13846–018
N970 Strip, Keyboard Support – for new Membrane Keyboard and Backplate 65318–886
Assembly only

PL – Parts List
Figure PL.2 CX20 W
270
310
110 170
790
400
140, 340, 260
630
130 240
1030
430
710
320
120, 780 770
10 300
90
1020
1040
290 1050
470 1060
280, 760 640

490
490 180, 680, 700
510 30
450 20
230
500
160, 540, 550, 560, 570, 960
380
170
50, 390, 590
250

PL – Parts List
Figure PL.2 ITEMS – CX20 W

10 PCB, A/D Converter 71014–646
20 Sub Base Casting 61661–176
30 Skirt, Base:
UK: RFI Coated 61661–181
60 Protection Plug, Cross 18137–552
90 Bracket, Rear Display 63673–110
N100 Blank Screen, Cover 62328–107
110 Housing Case:
120 PCB, Display, Vendor, In–line, Plug In 71014–434
180 Housing, LCD 61778–106
230 Loom, Display/Keyswitch/DCU 70734–439
240 PCB, Main 71014–696
UK 70611–847
Italy 70611–871
320 Rear Blank Plate 66124–111

PL – Parts List

UK 65379–197
Canada 65379–236
USA 65379–231
Italy 65379–229
Holland 65379–239
France 65379–237
Belgium 65379–194
Mexico 65379–238
380 Stamping Plate Assembnly Kit (CX20/CX30): 70421–226
Plate Assembly, Stamping 70085–701
Screw, No.6 x 20, Rec, Csk Hd, Self–tapper 13831–465
Plug, Lead 66421–106
390 PCB, Switch Mode Power Supply Assembly
240V 71014–457
110V 71014–461
400 Ticket Mouth 62261–164
430 Weigh Plate 68412–541
N580 Rating Plate:
Italy: 12 kg 67853–546
630 Support, PCB; Reverse Locking (Comms Controller) 18136–718
640 Printer Assembly: Label/Receipt – see Figure PL.6 70588–520
N650 Printer Cassette Assembly 70583–111
680 Screen, LCD, Printed 67873–512
700 LCD Display Assembly 70785–582

PL – Parts List

710 Bracket, Front, Display 63673–111
N730 Label, Product: CX20W 67814–810
760 Washer, M5, Plain 15711–205
780 Loom, In–line Display 70734–303
790 Side, Cover:
UK only: RFI coated 62348–116
Non–UK: Non–RFI coated 62348–109
N800 PCB, Wrapper Interface 71014–676
N900 Loom, Wraper Connector 70734–526
N910 Loom, Wrapper Control 70734–524
N920 Loom, Photocell Switch 70734–523
N940 Loom, A/D PCB 70734–525
Home (Red) 13846–018
N970 Load Cell Cable Assembly 70734–551
N980 Loom, Printer Sensor 70734–321
N990 Loom, Printer Sensor 70734–285
N1000 Loom, Reflective Photocell 70734–527
N1010 Loom, Comms controller 70734–522
1020 PCB, RS232 Interface 71014–752
1030 Bracket, Housing Support 66245–108
1040 Washer, M8, Plain 15711–207
1050 Connector Plate 66226–122
1060 Loom, Label Taken Reflective Photocell 70734–527

PL – Parts List
Figure PL.3 CX30
410
310
170
270
110
690
380
140, 150, 260,

320, 330 620, 630
60
70
90
130 120
640
240
300
10
290
40
650
450
470, 610
180
470, 610
490 680, 280

30
190, 420, 20
510 430
230
480
160, 520, 530, 540, 700
390 360, 580,
170 590 50, 370, 550, 570
340, 350
250

PL – Parts List

10 A/D Converter PCB Assembly – Non–secure 71014–646
20 Base 61661–176
30 Skirt, Base 61661–175
40 Spacer, Transducer Block 63644–430
60 Cup, Rubber, Conductive (For Cross) 63228–108
70 Cross 68481–138
N80 Rubber Adhesive Pad, Cross 18166–009
90 Head–up Display Assembly– See Figure PL.4 —
N100 Panel, Blank (Rear) – for Cover 62328–107
110 Housing Case: 61333–191
120 Cassette Assembly 70583–111
* Part Number of Keyboard Bezel for new Membrane Keyboard and Backplate Assembly is 68772–406.
150 Cover, Keyboard 65618–120
180 Housing, LCD 61778–106
190 Foot, Levelling 61664–151
230 Loom, Display/Keyswitch/DCU 70734–439
240 PCB, Main 71014–696
Italy 70611–871
* Note 1: Part Number 70785–557 will be used while stocks last – then transfer
to 70785–699.
** Note 2: Part Number of new Membrane Keyboard and Backplate Assembly
is 70785–750.
280 Washer, M5, Plain 15711–205

PL – Parts List

320 Overlay, Keyboard, Operator’s:
Holland 65378–968
USA 65378–971
France 65378–987
Canada 65379–101 and
65379–160
Mexico 65379–130
Belgium 65379–113
Germany 65379–143
Germany 65379–187
Belgium 65379–193
USA 65379–230
Italy 65379–233
Holland 65379–240
France 65379–241
Canada 65379–242
Mexico 65379–243
340 Level, Spirit 70075–104
350 Boot, Spirit Level 61355–125
360 Plate Assembly, Stamping 70085–701
370 Power Supply Assembly, Switch Mode:
240V 71014–457
110V 71014–461
380 Ticket Mouth:
With Printer 70076–713
No rinter 70076–715
390 Transducer:
T103 + Fitt: 15 kg; Unsealed 70717–432
T103 + Fitt: 15 kg; Sealed 70717–434
T103 + Fitt; 15 kg AVR; Unselaed 70717–481
410 Goods Fitting:
Weigh Plate (as illustrated) 68412–509
L2 Scoop, 16” 38434–121
G Pan, 9 1/4” x 13” 38435–408

PL – Parts List

510 Nut, M8, Nylon, Hexagon, Full 13828–815
N560 Rating Plate:
UK: 25 lb 67815–875
USA: 30 lb 67815–886
Mexico: 15 kg 67815–938
Canada: 15 kg AVR 67815–943
Switzerland: 15 kg AVR 67853–188
12 kg: EC 67853–204
15 kg AVR: EC 67853–236
15 kg: EC 67853–238
6 kg AVR: EC 67853–240
6 kg: EC 67853–280
Canada: 30 lb 67853–317
30 kg x 5 g: EC 67853–338
580 Screw, No.6 x 20, Rec, Csk Hd, Self–tapper 13831–465
590 Plug, Lead 66421–106
N600 Wire Sealing Kit. (Only South Africa and Australia) 70421–244
610 Ferrite Core, Hinged, Split (UK only) 18136–866
620 Screw, M6 x 25, Skt, Hd Cap – for Cross 13811–141
630 Washer, M6, Plain – for Cross 15711–206
640 Support, PCB; Reverse Locking 18136–718
650 Printer Assembly:
Label/Receipt – see Figure PL.6 70588–520
Receipt – see Figure PL.5 70588–521

PL – Parts List

N660 Comms Controller Kit (includes fixings):
640K: Home CX300K00000000
1024K: Home CX300L00000000
640K: Export CX300M00000000
1024K: Export CX300N00000000
690 Cover, Side 62348–109
Home (Red) 13846–018
N710 Strip, Keyboard Support – for new Membrane Keyboard and Backplate 65318–886
Assembly only

PL – Parts List
Figure PL.4 Head–up Display Assembly (CX30)
30, 40
50
70
120, 40
100
90
20
10
110
60
130
150, 160
120, 40
140
Figure PL.4 ITEMS – Head Up Display Assembly (CX30)

10 Column 61656–146
20 Plate, Masking, Headwork 65336–177
30 Nut, Full, M6 13821–106
40 Washer, Shakeproof, M6 15713–120
50 Housing, Display 61253–196
60 Loom, Display, External 70734–435

PL – Parts List
Figure PL.4 ITEMS – Head Up Display Assembly (CX30)

70 PCB, Display:
Avoir: Price Base LEDs 71014–353
Metric: Price Base LEDs 71014–372
Metric: Tare LEDs 71014–373
N80 Loom, Head–up Display 70734–437
90 Screw, Pan Hd, No.4x12, Self–tapper 13831–057
100 Screen, Display, Printed:
USA: 30 lb 67872–622
UK: 25 lb 67872–626
Canada: kg 67872–678
Mexico: 15 kg 67872–725
Switzerland: 15 kg AVR 67872–950
Italy: 12 kg 67872–984
Mexico: 15 kg 67873–121
France: 15 kg AVR 67873–150
France: 15 kg 67873–152
France: 6 kg AVR 67873–153
Eire: 15 kg AVR 67873–239
Eire: 15 kg AVR 67873–240
Germany: 6 kg 67873–269
Germany: 15 kg 67873–270
Belgium: 15 kg AVR 67873–289
Holland: 15 kg AVR 67873–315
Canada: lb 67873–404
Italy: 30 kg 67873–452
Italy: 15 kg 67873–453
Italy: 6 kg 67873–454
110 Casting, Column 61656–144
120 Screw, Pan, M6x20 13755–147
130 Plate, Column Casting 66211–513
140 Screw, M4x8 13758–530
150 Screw, M6x30, Rec, Pand Hd, SS 13765–049
160 Washer, M6, Int Shakeproof 15713–120
N170 Blank, Display Screen. (Only on column/integral machines.) 61254–143

PL – Parts List
Figure PL.5 Receipt Printer
30
10
60
50
40
20
Figure PL.5 ITEMS – Receipt Printer

Receipt Printer Assembly (Axiom) 70588–521
10 Axiom Printer with Microswitch 70555–115
20 Spine, Printer 66176–122
30 Loom, Printer Unit 70734–286
40 Pillar, Support, Tally Roll 63228–110
50 Plate Assembly, Mounting, Printer 66264–151
N70 Label, Instruction 67833–408
N80 Tally Roll, Thermal 62258–132

PL – Parts List
Figure PL.6 Label and Receipt Printer
90,190
250
30
140
70
150
270
40
60
290
310
210
110
10
120
280
80
300
200
260
170
20 160

PL – Parts List
Figure PL.6 ITEMS – Label and Receipt Printer

Printer Assembly, Label And Receipt (Rohm) 70588–520
10 Moulding, Cassette 61355–122
20 Belt, Drive, XB2 66872–121
30 Label, Paper Feed 67833–407
40 Knob, Locking, Take–up Spool 68718–136
N50 Lever, Locking, Print Head 64313–111
60 Spiderfix, Capped, Push On 18137–559
70 Loom, Print Head 70734–285
80 Motor And Gearbox Assembly 70672–112
90 Washer, Shakeproof, M6 (Take–up Spool) 15718–305
N100 Guide, Paper (Cassette) 63672–181
110 Bracket, Peel–off 66232–113
120 Head, Print, Thermal 18167–026
N130 Carrier, Lower, Print Head 63672–179
140 Carrier, Upper, Print Head 63672–178
150 Sensor And Loom Assembly 70734–321
160 Pulley, Print Head Roller 62654–110
170 Pulley, Stepper Motor, XB2 62655–132
N180 Lever, Retaining, Ticket Roll 63658–120
190 Plate, Retaining, Take–up Spool 65152–706
200 Roller, Print Head 63848–118
210 Spine 66176–510
N220 Spring, Leaf, Print Head 66242–114
N230 Spring, Tension, Print Head 64433–117
N240 Spring, Print Head Locking Lever 64413–506
250 Spring, Take–up Spool 64412–708
260 Stepper Motor And Loom Assembly 70785–585
270 Bracket, Support, Photocell 66216–141
280 Plate, Support, Rubber Roller 65641–114
290 Moulding, Spool, Take–up 62657–101
300 Spline, Spool, Take–up 62657–102

PL – Parts List
Figure PL.7 Head–up Display Assembly (CX30 TK – Column Mounted Version)
50
40
10
20
30
Figure PL.7 ITEMS – Head–up Display Assembly (CX30 TK –

Column Mounted Version)
Refer to Figure PL.3 for parts not listed below.
10 Casting, Column 61656–143
20 Plate, Column Casting 66211–513
30 Screw, M6 x 8, Rec. Pan Hd. (Semi–Shakeproof) 13758–530
40 Loom, TK Keyboard 70734–410
50 Head Up Display Loom 70734–438
N60 Screw, M6 x 30, Rec. Pan Hd. (Semi–Shakeproof) 13758–549
N70 Screw, M6 x 40, Rec. Pan Hd. (Semi–Shakeproof) 13758–550

PL – Parts List
Figure PL.8 Column and Keyboard Support (CX30 TK – Column Mounted Version)
50
40
30
20
10
Figure PL.8 ITEMS – Column and Keyboard Support (CX30 TK –

Column Mounted Version)
Refer to Figure PL.3 for parts not listed below.
10 Bracket, Support, Fifth Foot (10 mm thick) 66233–103
20 Foot 61664–151
30 Nut, M8, Full, Brzn. 13821–107
40 Column 61656–153
50 Screw, Instrument Head 63871–142
N60 Hole Plugs, Column 18137–551
N70 Gromet, Column 18136–238
N80 Screw, M6 x 20, Hex. Sock. Button Hd. 13818–406
N90 Screw, M6 x 12, Soc. Hd. Cap 13811–138
N100 Washer, M6, Plain 15711–206
N110 Plate, Suport, Fifth Foot, (6 mm thick) 65352–519
N120 Screw, M8 x 16, Hex. Hd. 13712–121
N130 ”Bumpon’ Adhesive Rubber 18166–006
N120 Spacer, Head Up Display 63658–123
N130 Overlay, Keyboard, Blank 65318–873
N140 Door, Printer Compartment 70228–250

PL – Parts List
Figure PL.9 Keyboard Assembly (CX30 TK – Column Mounted Version)
70, 80, 90, 100

60
110
10
40, 50
30
2
0
Figure PL.9 ITEMS – Keyboard Assembly (CX30 TK – Column

Mounted Version)
10 Keyboard Assembly 71014–540
20 Front Moulding 61337–106
30 Connecting Loom 70734–391
40 PCB, Keyboard Controller 71014–537
50 Support, Keyboard Controller PCB, Miniature 18137–343
60 Rear Moulding 61334–198
70 Key, Top, Large 66548–225
80 Key, Top, Small 66548–224
90 Key, Top, Window, Large 65318–869
100 Key, Top, Window, Small 65318–868
110 Rivet, Two–piece 13858–274
N120 Tool, Key Top Removal 18167–081
N130 End Cap: Modified 66538–199
N120 Earthing Cable 70611–433
N130 Nut, M3, Full 13821–103
N140 Washer, M3, Plain 15711–203
N150 Support, Bracket 61723–134

PL – Parts List
Figure PL.10 CX9/A702
10
110
30
40
20
90
130
50 200
50
60
50
50
210
80
70

PL – Parts List
Figure PL.10 ITEMS – CX9/A7027

10 Weighplate 68431–123
20 Cross Rubber 63348–102
30 Top Cover 66538–181
40 Cross 68478–515
50 Blanking Panel 66538–175
60 Base 61662–262
70 Spirit Level Bulb 68777–106
80 Levelling Foot: 61664–151
Rubber Bumper 18166–001
Foot Spring 64413–108
Washer, M8, Plain 15711–207
90 Transducer Retainer 61724–114
100 Transducer:
T103, 25 lb, 30 lb and 15 kg, Unsealed 71014–157
110 Instrument Screw 63871–141
N120 Heyco Dome Plug 18136–448
N130 Black Plastic Plug 18136–411
N140 Blanking Plate 65331–533
N150 Base Cover 65368–127
N160 Communications Bracket 66236–138
N170 Communications Panel 66538–177
N180 Interface Cable Assembly 70734–552
N190 M5 Starlock Fixing Washer 15718–304
200 Terminal block 70614–353
210 Load Cell Cable 70734–552

Address of local service branch:
Avery Berkel Weighing Products

The right is reserved to vary or modify any specification without prior notice.
A Company
Addendum A
Phase 1.4
and
CX34 Parts List
This Addendum is for the Service Manual for the CX20, CX30
and CX34 Series of Retail Scales, Part Number 76101–452.
76102–584 Issue 1/01.02.96

Addendum A
Phase 1.4 and CX34
Parts List
Table of Contents:
A.1 Introduction A–3
A.2 Print Density (Menu Option) A–4
A.2.1 Rohm print head – 7.52 dots/mm A–4
A.2.2 Axiohm print head – 7.52 dots/mm A–5
A.3 Configuration Option Tables A–6
A.4 Label formatting A–11
A.5 Error messages A–11
A.6 Main PCB and wiring interconnections A–12
A.7 Parts List A–17
A.7.1 Main PCB A–17
A.7.2 Label and Receipt Printer – Rohm 7.52 Dots/mm A–17
A.7.3 Receipt Printer – Axiohm 7.52 Dots/mm A–19
A.8 Parts list for the CX34 hanging scale A–20
List of Illustrations
Figure A.1 Connector Pins on Main PCB – PL22 A–12
Figure A.2 Main PCB – DIL Switches and Potentiometers A–13
Figure A.3 Main PCB – Location of Links A–15
Figure A.4 Label and Receipt Printer – Rohm 7.52 Dots/mm A–17
Figure A.5 Receipt Printer – Axiohm 7.52 Dots/mm A–19
Figure A.6 Main Assembly A–20
Figure A.7 Suspension Assembly A–21
Figure A.8 Connector Assembly A–22
A–1 CX20/CX30/CX34 Addendum A

Contents
Figure A.9 Chassis Assembly – Filter and Comms Connectors A–22

Figure A.10 Chassis Assembly – Filter Looms A–23
Figure A.11 Chassis Assembly –SMPS PCB Assembly A–23
Figure A.12 Chassis Assembly – SMPS PCB Cover A–24
Figure A.13 Chassis Assembly – Printer Spine Assembly A–24
Figure A.14 Chassis Assembly – Top End A–25
Figure A.15 Connector Plate Assembly A–25
Figure A.16 Main PCB Assembly A–26
Figure A.17 Looms A–26
Figure A.18 Chassis Support A–27
Figure A.19 Printers A–27
Figure A.20 Screen Plate A–28
Figure A.21 Goods Fitting Assembly A–29
CX20/CX30/CX34 Addendum A A–2

Addendum A — Phase 1.4 and CX34 Parts List
A.1 Introduction
This addendum to be read in conjunction with the Service Manual for the CX20,
CX30 and CX34 Series of Retail Scales, Part Number 76101–452.
This addendum reflects the upgrade to Phase 1.4 and includes the Parts List for
the CX34. The upgrade consists chiefly of:
new Axiohm and Rohm print heads – 7.52 dots per millimetre
new main PCB with new microprocessors (compatible only with Phase 1.3
machines) and links
new software
new configuration code
new label format field (number 24).

A.2 Print Density (Menu Option)

Refer to Section 5 in the manual.
There are new high resolution Rohm and Axiohm print heads at 7.52
dots/millimetre.
Refer to the manual for information on changing the print density.
A.2.1 Rohm print head – 7.52 dots/mm

Table 5.2 in the manual refers to the Rohm 3 dots per millimetre print head. The
following table gives the density setting information for the 7.52 dots per
millimetre print head.
as a guide.
Table A.1 Print Head Density Setting Information – Rohm 7.52 dots/mm

720 – 732 0
733 – 745 1
746 – 758 2
759 – 771 3
772 – 784 4
785 – 797 5
798 – 810 6
811 – 823 7
824 – 836 8
837 – 849 9
850 – 862 10
863 – 875 11
876 – 890 12

A.2.2 Axiohm print head – 7.52 dots/mm
IMPORTANT:
This printer will be available from mid 1996 onwards.
Table 5.1 in the manual refers to the Axiohm 3 dots per millimetre print head.
The following table gives the density setting information for the 7.52 dots per
millimetre print head.
as a guide.
Table A.2 Print Head Density Setting Information – Axiohm

7.52 dots/mm

585 – 604 0
605 – 624 1
625 – 644 2
645 – 664 3
665 – 684 4
685 – 704 5
705 – 725 6
726 – 747 7
748 – 769 8
770 – 791 9
792 – 820 10

A.3 Configuration Option Tables

Table A.3 Machine Configuration
D 150 kg x 50 g S 600 kg x 200 g (string cell)
E 300 kg x 100 g
5 Free tare only
Digit 5 — Weight Behind Zero/Label Feed Error
1 No bleep behind zero; No bleep on label 3 No bleep behind zero; Bleep on label feed
feed error error
2 Bleep behind zero; No bleep on label feed 4 Bleep behind zero; Bleep on label feed
error error


1 No reference to tax value on receipt 3 Itemised tax printing on receipt
items;
items;
Digit 13 — Spare
1 Selectable from Machine Z menu 3 Selectable from Machine Z menu and
compulsory amount tendered
2 Permanently enabled 4 Permanently enabled and compulsory
amount tendered

Table A.4 System Configuration

A United Kingdom K Belgium
B Holland L Austria
C France M Switzerland
D Germany N Italy
E Canada P Denmark
F Mexico Q Norway
G USA R Portugal
H South Africa S Greece
I Australia T Spain
J New Zealand
system menus
Digit 4 — Voids
not active)
operator totals
operator totals
security reports
2 System mode


1 1200 Baud 3 4800 Baud
2 2400 Baud 4 9600 Baud
Table A.5 Country Override Configuration

1 0 to 99999 3 0 to 999990
2 0 to 999999
1 To nearest 1 4 To nearest 20
0 No currency I Italian lira (Lit)
1 Pound sterling (£) J Drachma (∆PX)
2 Dollar ($) K Currency (RM)
3 Rand (R) L Currency (SR)
4 Franc (F) M Currency (Pts)
5 Austrian shilling (S) N Currency (Rp)
6 Krona (Kr) P Currency (zt)
7 Deutschmark (DM) Q Currency (Kc)
8 Dutch guilder (ƒ) R Currency (SK)
9 Finnish mark (mk) S Currency (kr)
A Swiss franc (Fr) T Currency (Dhs)
B Currency P U Currency (Won)
C Currency E V Currency (bt)
D Currency K W Currency (Esc)
E Currency M X Maltese lira (Lm)
F Currency L Y Spare
G Currency D Z Spare
H Mexican dollar – peso (N$)


1 No acknowledge 3 Accepted message acknowledge
2 Recall sub–total acknowledge
Digit 8 — Transaction Network Response
1 Normal 2 Enhanced
Digit 9 — Operator Sub–total Recall
1 Recall off 2 Recall on

A.4 Label formatting

There is a new label field, number 24, which is for the new safe handling logo.
The new high resolution printer provides new fonts, 1 to 8, shown below (full
size):
A.5 Error messages

See Table 10.1.

AUDIT 90% FULL The total number of transactions in the system has almost
reached the maximum permitted. You must either clear
audit transactions after printing audit totals or clear them.
NO PRINTER VOLTS Machine fault.
NO TARE SELECTED Tare interlock has been set on at the machine and you are
trying to print a label without first selecting a tare. Weigh
the goods in a container.
NOT AVAILABLE The function cannot be used at the machine.
OP. LOGGED OFF The operator key is switched off. Re–program the status of
the operator.
PRINT AUDIT You cannot continue using the machine because the
number of transactions has reached the maximum
permitted. You must either clear audit transactions after
printing audit totals or clear them.

A.6 Main PCB and wiring interconnections

Refer to Sections 11 (Main PCB) and 24 (Wiring Interconnections) in the
manual.
Addition of PL22.
Figure A.1 Connector Pins on Main PCB – PL22
30 N/C
29 N/C
28 N/C
27 N/C
26 0VP
25 24V
24 0VP
23 24V
22 0VP
21 24V
20 DATA RETURN
19 DATA CLOCK
18 +5VD
17 N/C
16 TH2
15 TH1
14 STROBES
13 STROBES
12 STROBES
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
11 STROBES
10 STROBES
9 N/C
8 DATA TO HEAD ROHM AXIOHM 7.52
7 LATCH PRINTER DOTS/MM
HEAD (7.52 PRINTER
6 0VP
DOTS/MM)
24V HEAD
5
4 0VP
3 24V
2 0VP
1 24V
PL22
Note:
PL6 is for the Rohm 3
dots/mm printer and PL3
for the Axiohm 3 dots/mm
printer. Refer to the
manual for their pin PL3
signals.
PL6

Figure A.2 Main PCB – DIL Switches and Potentiometers
RV3

Table A.6 Main PCB – DIL Switch and Potentiometer Functions
BIT
SW1 1 Printer test initiate
(momentarily on = generate test print)
2 Roman/Greek characters
(on = Greek; off = Roman)
3 Take–up spool
(on = will run in receipt mode)
4 Print head resolution
(off = 3 dots/mm; on = 7.52 dots/mm)
5 Paper out enable/disable
(off = enabled; on = disabled)
6 Bar code length
(off = short; on = long)
7 Dark pre–printed labels (label positioning algo-
rithm)
(off = standard position; on = dark pre–printed
labels)
8 Axiohm (receipt)/Rohm (label and receipt) select
(off = Rohm; on = Axiohm)
SW4 1 (should not be used)
2 Service configuration mode
(on = service configuration mode)
3 Flash memory write (for future use)
(off = disabled; on = enabled)
4 Battery
(on = battery on)
RV3 – Adjust current supply to stepper motor of printer

Figure A.3 Main PCB – Location of Links
Note:
In this diagram, Pin 1 of each link is identified by a shaded area with a “1” adjacent to it.
1
1
LK3 LK17
1 1 1
1
LK1 1
1 LK12
LK6
1
LK1
1
1 1
LK19
1
1
LINK CONFIGURATION – TYPICAL

There are two types of links: links with straight pins and links with pins
bent at right–angles. Set links according to configuration for unit.
Pin 1 of each link is indicated by an
Pin 1 of each link is indicated by an adjacent adjacent box printed on the main PCB.
shaded area printed on the main PCB.
LINK 1–2 MADE

LINK 1–2 MADE
Straight Pins
LINK 2–3 MADE LINK 2–3 MADE Bent Pins

Table A.7 Main PCB – Link Functions
Link Type Description

LK1 2–way DC motor boost
(1–2 = selected)
(1–2 = 2 x 128K standard fit or 2 x 256K; 2–3 = 2 x 512K)
LK3 2–way Printer software select
(1–2 = Phase 1.3; 2–3 = Phase 1.4)
LK4 2–way Printer software select
(1–2 = Phase 1.3; 2–3 = Phase 1.4)
LK5 2–way Rohm (label and receipt)/Axiohm print head select
Rohm: 1–2 = 3 dots/mm; 2–3 = 7.52 dots/mm
Axiohm: 3 dot = not fitted; 1–2 = 7.52 dots/mm
LK6 2–way Printer XTAL frequency select
(1–2 = 16MHz; 2–3 = 24MHz)
LK7 2–way In–line display metric/avoir grid select (CX20 only)
(1–2 = metric display; 2–3 = avoir display)
(1–2 = 27 512 standard fit or 27C101 or 27C020; 2–3 =
27C040)
LK9 – Not used.
(1–2 = 27 512 standard fit or 27C101; 2–3 = 27C020 or
27C040)
LK11 2–way Display CX20/CX30 mode select
LK12 2–way Scale RAM select
(1–2 = 128K; 2–3 = 512K)
LK13 2–way Metric/Avoir grid select – CX20 plug–in, integral displays only
(1–2 = avoir display; 2–3 metric display)
LK14 1–way Switch 1 disable
(normally omitted)
LK15 – Not used.
LK16 – Not used.
LK17 1–way A/D interface select
(fitted for dual slope A/D convertor, standard fit)
LK19 2–way Axiohm (receipt)/Rohm (label and receipt) printer select
(1–2 = Rohm printer; 2–3 = Axiohm)
NOTE: The values for 27C101, 27C020 and 27C040 are 128K x 8, 256K x 8
and 512K x 8, respectively.

A.7 Parts List

A.7.1 Main PCB
Refer to Figure PL.1 (CX20) in the manual.
240 PCB, Main 71014–812
Refer to Figure PL.2 (CX20W) in the manual.

240 PCB, Main 71014–812
Refer to Figure PL.3 (CX30) in the manual.

240 PCB, Main 71014–812
A.7.2 Label and Receipt Printer – Rohm 7.52 Dots/mm

Refer to Figure PL.6 in the manual.
Figure A.4 Label and Receipt Printer – Rohm 7.52 Dots/mm
70
140
210
120
280
20 160

Figure A.4 ITEMS – Label and Receipt Printer (Rohm – 7.52

Dots/mm)
Printer Assembly, Label And Receipt (Rohm – 7.52 dots/mm) 70588–534
20 Belt, Drive, XB2 18121–303
70 Loom, Print Head 70734–715
120 Head, Print, Thermal See N320
140 Extrusion, Upper Head Carrier 63672–184
160 Pulley, Print Head Roller 62654–111
210 Spine 66176–513
N220 Spring, Headwork 64413–109
N221 Screw, Print Head Pressure 63263–206
280 Plate, Support, Rubber Roller 65641–117
N320 Friction Piece, Print Head Sub–assembly: 70588–539
Friction Piece, Print Head 61225–135
Head, Print, Thermal 18167–036
Block, Mounting 65352–110
Plate, Mounting 66123–119
Screw, No4 x 12, Rec. Pan Hd. Self Tap 13831–057
Loctite Adhesive No. IS415 4905014
Washer, M3, Dished Tension Spring 15718–353
Screw, M3 x 10, Rec. Pan Hd. 13755–105

A.7.3 Receipt Printer – Axiohm 7.52 Dots/mm
Figure A.5 Receipt Printer – Axiohm 7.52 Dots/mm
30
10
60
50
40
20
Figure A.5 ITEMS – Receipt Printer (Axiohm – 7.52 Dots/mm)

(Available Mid 1996 Onwards)
Receipt Printer Assembly (Axiohm) 70588–541
10 Axiohm Printer with Microswitch 70555–117
20 Spine, Printer 66176–122
30 Loom, Printer Unit 70734–715
40 Pillar, Support, Tally Roll 63228–110
50 Plate Assembly, Mounting, Printer 66264–151
N70 Label, Instruction 67833–408
N80 Tally Roll, Thermal 62258–132

A.8 Parts list for the CX34 hanging scale
Figure A.6 Main Assembly
Transducer Support fixing

Rear cover assembly
(61225–133) Printer spine
Printer cassette assembly
(70588–527)
Printer door
(61227–110)
Customer
display Front cover
(61225–134)
Vendor
display
Customer
display
PCB
Comms PCB
Main PCB
Power supply
cover
Chassis
Suspension
assembly
Keyboard protective
film (65318–885)
Membrane keyboard
Bracket (70785–701)
Cradle assembly
Printer assembly

Figure A.7 Suspension Assembly
Suspension hook
(66116–510)
Suspension yoke
(65533–112)
Gimbal assembly
(70112–109)
M5 x 20 skt. hd. cap

screw (13811–029) M5 x 10 hex.
hd. sems
Connecting block (13718–009)
(63652–408)
NOTE: M5 holes in the M5 plain washer

front of block to be to- (15711–205)
wards the top.
T/D earth lead

(70611–442) Ferrite sleeve
(18136–617)
T103 transducer assembly

(see Parts List in Service
Manual)
M6 plain washer (15711–206)

NOTE: Short end.
Insulok cable tie
(28135–266)
M6 nut (13828–811)
Connecting rod
(63153–415)
M6 nut (13828–811)
M6 plain washer
Insulating spigot (15711–206)
(63228–113)
Lower suspension bracket

(66256–171)
Gimbal assembly
(70112–109) M3 x 8 rec. pan hd.
sems (13758–522)
Insulating washer
(63138–147) M6 nyloc nut
(13821–148)

Figure A.8 Connector Assembly
Data collector keyswitch loom

(70734–534)
Screw lock pin kit

(18136–073)
Keyed switch
(70627–120)
Connector plate
(65376–194)
No.4 x 1/4” pan hd.
self tap screw
(23818–428)
Mains rocker switch
(70625–527)
Not Illustrated:
Keyring with fob and keys (13846–019)
Figure A.9 Chassis Assembly – Filter and Comms Connectors
IEC connector filter

(70668–414) Chassis (66266–149)
Fuse (see Service Comms loom

Manual) (70734–530)
M3 x 8 sl csk hd Screw lock pin

screw (13731–118) kit (18136–073)
Fuse label (see Service
Manual)

Figure A.10 Chassis Assembly – Filter Looms
Mains switch/filter loom (70734–533)
Brown
M5 full nut
(13821–105) Blue
M5 plain washer Mains earth lead

(15711–205) (70611–440)
Earth warning label

(67835–394)
Figure A.11 Chassis Assembly –SMPS PCB Assembly
Rubber grommet (28135–130)

Main PCB loom (70734–529)
Mains loom (70734–535)
M4 x 8 rec pan hd
sems (13758–530)
Chassis
SMPS cover pillars
(63526–170)
SMPS PCB assembly
(see Service Manual)
CX20/CX30/CX34 Addendum A–23

Figure A.12 Chassis Assembly – SMPS PCB Cover
M8 x 8 rec pan hd
sems (13758–530)
SMPS cover warning
label (67835–389)
Quick connect terminal

(18136–087)
SMPS cover (61226–188)
Figure A.13 Chassis Assembly – Printer Spine Assembly
Display protection plate

(66226–119) Adhesive backed flat cable
clamp (18136–130)
M8 x 8 rec pan hd
sems (13758–530)
M3 dished tension
Connecting joggle spring (15718–353)
bracket (66222–109)
M3 full nut
(13821–103)
M5 x 10 hex hd screw
sems (13718–009)
M5 plain washer
(15711–205)
A–24 CX20/CX30/CX34 Addendum

Figure A.14 Chassis Assembly – Top End
Transducer assembly
M5 shakeproof washer
Mounting boss (15713–119)
(63271–706)
Support bracket
(66127–161)
M4 x 8 rec pan hd
sems (13758–530)
M5 full nut
(13821–105)
M5 plain washer
(15711–205)
M5 full nut
(13821–105)
Mains loom earth

(70734–535)
Cable tie (28135–266) M5 plain washer

(15711–205)
Cable mounting T/D earth lead
cradle (70611–511) (70611–442)
Figure A.15 Connector Plate Assembly
M8 x 8 rec pan hd screw

sems (13758–522)
Connector plate as-

sembly
CX20/CX30/CX34 Addendum A–25

Figure A.16 Main PCB Assembly
A/D convertor PCB (71014–646)
Reverse locking PCB

Green support (18136–718)
White M3 x 8 rec pan hd

Black screw (13758–522)
Red
Main PCB assembly

(71014–696)
Figure A.17 Looms
Hinged split ferrite

Mains switch/filter loom
core (18136–865)
(70734–533)
Cable mounting cradle

(70611–511) and insulok
cable tie (28135–266)
Mains loom
(70734–535) Display loom
(70734–532)
Mains switch/filter loom

(70734–533) Main PCB loom
(70734–529)
Blue Brown
Blue Brown
Mains loom
(70734–535)

Figure A.18 Chassis Support
Keyboard extension
loom (70734–287)
M5 plain washer Chassis support

(15711–205) (66127–157)
M5 x 10 hex hd screw sems
(13718–009)
Figure A.19 Printers
Cassette label printer assembly

(70588–535) – all parts as Axiohm receipt printer assembly (70588–541)
detailed in Section A.7.2 except
Item 70, Printer Loom, which is
70734–728
Printer warning label

Paper feed label

(67833–408)
Paper warning label


Figure A.20 Screen Plate
A/D PCB assembly

Main PCB assembly
Chassis
M4 x 8 rec pan hd sems

(13758–530)
Screen plate
(66232–115)

Figure A.21 Goods Fitting Assembly
Rubber tip
(38488–101)
010
020
030
Cross support
(61642–102B)
040
050
Suspension frame
(68452–505)
Not Illustrated:
G oblong scoop (38435–411)
Item Mild Steel Stainless Steel
010 G pan cross (38471–566) G pan cross (38471–567)
020 M6 x 20 rec pan hd screw (13755–147) M6 x 20 rec pan hd screw (13722–006)
030 M6 x 20 skt hd cap screw (13811–040) M6 x 20 skt hd cap screw (13818–321)
040 M6 nut (13828–811) M6 nyloc nut s.s. (13828–207)
050 Distance piece (63131–711) Distance piece s.s. (63131–715)


Avery Berkel Weighing

A Company
Addendum B
Phase 1.5/1.5.3 and

New Main PCB
This Addendum is for the following Service Manuals:
A210, A410 and A510 Series of Retail Scales, Part Number 76101–605.
CX20, CX30 and CX34 Series of Retail Scales, Part Number 76101–452.
CX/Advantage Range of Retail Scales, Part Number 76101–863.
172 and 175 Retail Scales, Part Number 76101–975.
76102–586 Issue 4/21.09.98

Addendum B
Phase 1.5/1.5.3 and
New Main PCB
Table of Contents:
B.1 Introduction B–3
B.2 Configuration Options B–3
B.2.1 Configuration Option Tables B–3
B.2.2 Printer attached options added B–9
B.2.3 Multimedia interface B–9
B.2.4 ADF wrapper B–9
B.3 Test report B–10
B.4 Nutritional labels B–10
B.5 ADF printer B–10
B.6 Printers B–10
B.7 Wrappers B–10
B.8 Comms PCB – Link LK7 B–11
B.9 Main PCB B–12
B.9.1 Increased memory Phase 1.5.3 B–12
B.10 Barcode Scanner B–12
B.11 Euro currency B–12
B.11.1 Euro receipt B–12
B.11.2 Setting the rate B–12
B.11.3 Programming euro price information B–12
B.11.4 Assigning euro keys B–13
B.11.5 Euro conversion B–13
B.12 Firmware numbers B–14
B.12.1 Main core B–14
B.13.2 Firmware numbers – by country B–15
B–1 Addendum B
Contents
Addendum B B–2
Addendum B — Phase 1.5/1.5.3 and New Main PCB
B.1 Introduction
This addendum, which is meant to be read in conjunction with the Service
Manuals listed on the title page, reflects the software upgrade to Phase 1.5 and
gives details of the new main PCB. For further details of the Phase 1.5 changes
refer to the user handbooks.
B.2 Configuration Options
B.2.1 Configuration Option Tables

Table B.1 Machine Configuration
D 150 kg x 50 g S 600 kg x 200 g (string cell)
E 300 kg x 100 g
5 Free tare only
Digit 5 — Weight Behind Zero/Label Feed Error
1 No bleep behind zero; no bleep on label 3 No bleep behind zero; bleep on label feed
feed error error
2 Bleep behind zero; no bleep on label feed 4 Bleep behind zero; bleep on label feed
error error
Addendum B B–3

3 0.6 seconds 7 PLU number concatenation
4 0.8 seconds
1 No reference to tax value on receipt 3 Full itemised tax value shown on receipt
items;
items;
Digit 12 — Printers Connected
1 Printer attached 4 Internal and external printer attached
2 No printer attached 5 External 1 and external 2 printers
attached
3 External printer attached 6 Internal, external 1 and external 2 printers
attached
Digit 13 — Multimedia Interface
1 Not connected 9 Connected
1 Weighing OFF 2 Attached
1 Selectable from Machine Z menu 3 Selectable from Machine Z menu and
compulsory amount tendered
2 Permanently enabled 4 Permanently enabled and compulsory
amount tendered
Digit 17 — Wrapper
Ph 1.5: No ADF wrapper Ph 1.5: ADF wrapper
0 1
Ph 1.5.3: Ph 1.5.3:
1 2
B–4 Addendum B
Digit 18 — Wrapper Program Override

Ph 1.5: Disabled Ph 1.5: Enabled
0 1
Ph 1.5.3: Ph 1.5.3:
1 2
Phase 1.5.3 only Digit 19 — Euro Label
Phase 1.5.3 only Digit 20 — Barcode Scanner
Addendum B B–5
Table B.2 System Configuration

A United Kingdom L Austria
B Holland M Switzerland
C France N Italy
D Germany P Denmark
E Canada Q Norway
F Mexico R Portugal
G USA S Greece
H South Africa T Spain
I Australia U Finland
J New Zealand V Sweden
K Belgium W Eastern Europe
system menus
Digit 4 — Voids
not active)
operator totals
operator totals
security reports
2 System mode
B–6 Addendum B

1 1200 Baud 3 4800 Baud
2 2400 Baud 4 9600 Baud
3 Suppress printing (receipts)
Addendum B B–7
Table B.3 Country Override Configuration

1 0 to 99999 3 0 to 999990
2 0 to 999999
0 No currency I Italian lira (Lit)
1 Pound sterling (£) J Drachma (∆PX)
2 Dollar ($) K Currency (RM)
3 Rand (R) L Currency (SR)
4 Franc (F) M Currency (Pts)
5 Austrian shilling (S) N Currency (Rp)
6 Krona (Kr) P Currency (zt)
7 Deutschmark (DM) Q Currency (Kc)
8 Dutch guilder (ƒ) R Currency (SK)
9 Finnish mark (mk) S Currency (kr)
A Swiss franc (Fr) T Currency (Dhs)
B Currency P U Currency (Won)
C Currency E V Currency (bt)
D Currency K W Currency (Esc)
E Currency M X Maltese lira (Lm)
F Currency L Y Currency (Euro)
G Currency D Z Euro symbol ( )
H Mexican dollar – peso (N$)
1 No acknowledge 3 Accepted message acknowledge
2 Recall sub–total acknowledge
Digit 8 — Transaction Network Response
1 Normal 2 Enhanced
Digit 9 — Operator Sub–total Recall
1 Recall OFF 2 Recall ON
Digit 10 — Manual Weight Entry
B–8 Addendum B
B.2.2 Printer attached options added

See Table B.1: Machine Configuration, Digit 12 – Printer Attached.
Options 3, 4, 5 and 6 have been added to cater for the improved ‘polling‘ of the
connected printers. This ‘polling’ informs the scale of the type of printers
attached so that it can use the correct scale/printer communications protocol.
From Phase 1.3 onwards, CX/Advantage scales have been able to
communicate with up to three printers, one internal and two external. During
this time printer types have changed and, therefore, so has their scale/printer
communications protocol. To ensure scale/printer type compatibility scales have
to know the type of each printer attached.
Previously the scale has found out the printer type by interrogating them only
when the power was switched on – if a printer had not been switched on the
scale would display an appropriate error message and would stop functioning.
Now, if a printer has not responded when the scale is switched on, the scale
carries on working and this printer is ‘polled’ until it switched on. A message is
displayed if the operator attempts to use an off–line printer.
The ’polling’, which is approximately once every second, has no apparent
detrimental affect on the functioning of the scale and ceases when all the
printers are on–line.
B.2.3 Multimedia interface

See Table B.1: Machine Configuration, Digit 13 – Multimedia Interface.
This option (UK only) is for a multimedia PC.
B.2.4 ADF wrapper

See Table B.1: Machine Configuration, Digit 17 – Wrapper.
An applied direct to film (ADF) wrapper can be connected to the scale.
Note the differences in digits 17 and 18 in Phase 1.5 and 1.5.3.
Addendum B B–9
B.3 Test report

The test report now shows both comms controllers. The comms controller ‘in
charge’ is printed first.
B.4 Nutritional labels

When printing labels and nutritional labels together, wrapper signals are only
sent with the second of these labels to be printed.
NOTE: When printing only on the external printer the standard label is
printed. To overcome this, change the PLU so that nutritional labels
are printed first.
Nutritional labels can be printed on an ADF printer.

The message “LABEL NOT TAKEN” disappears automatically after a nutritional
label is removed.
B.5 ADF printer

Continuous Paper Mode is no longer permitted and is overridden with Separate
Label Mode.
When selecting a PLU for an ADF printer the scale will always display
“REMOVE WEIGHT” if a weight has already been placed on the weighplate.
B.6 Printers
If Printer Select soft key is disabled, the scale uses as its default printer the first
configured printer from, in order, the integral printer, external printer 1 or external
printer 2.
On selecting a PLU with the Printer Select soft key disabled the scale will use
the printer programmed in the PLU.
The scale’s communications timeout for high resolution printers has been
increased to allow the printer’s microprocessor time to cope with complex labels.
To compensate for this the number of timeouts has been decreased.
B.7 Wrappers
The scale now transmits the LAST PACK signal (X) immediately and without
delay whenever the LAST PACK key is pressed. This is to avoid time delays
when printing a label which have caused the LAST PACK key to timeout
resulting in the X signal not being sent. This has caused problems with ULMA
wrappers.
B–10 Addendum B
B.8 Comms PCB – Link LK7

The jumper fitted to link LK7 must always be set in position 2–3, as shown in
Figure 22.3. If you are installing a new machine with a comms PCB fitted or are
fitting a new comms PCB, the jumper may be set in position 1–2 which is
incorrect. This must be changed to position 2–3 before fitting the comms PCB
in the machine or switching the machine on.
27C401 (512k x 8) 27C020 (256k x 8)

EPROM EPROM
LK1 LK1 Link LK6
1
1
1 1
1 1
Links are in the

Link LK7
2–3 position
SW2
ÍÍÍÍ
PL1
BAT1
ÍÍÍÍ
D17
PL5
TP15
TP3
TP1
TP13
TP4
TP2
LK1
LK6
TP16
SW3TP14
LK7 SW1
Figure B.1 Comms PCB – Link, LK7
Addendum B B–11
B.9 Main PCB
NOTE: The new main PCB has not been developed as part of Phase 1.5
but for improved EMC performance.
The new 71014–949 main PCB is a six–layer version of the 71014–812. For
servicing purposes all details are the same as for the 71014–812, therefore the
only change to the service manual is the new part number in the Parts List.
Service Manual Machines New Main PCB

Part Number Part Number
76101–605 A210, A410 and A510 Series 71014–949
76101–452 CX20, CX30 and CX34 Series 71014–949
76101–863 CX/Advantage Range Does not change
76101–975 172 and 175 71014–949
B.9.1 Increased memory, Phase 1.5.3

Phase 1.5.3 DOES NOT require a new mainboard/RAM chips. It supports
1.5Mb of RAM which can be fitted as follows:
At machines containing 71014–812 or 71014–949 mainboard
remove the current RAMs
fit 3 new 4Mbit RAMs (part number IED/KM684000ALP)
change LK12 to position 2–3
At machines containing 71014–814 or 71014–816 the board must be replaced
because the RAM chips are soldered to the board.
fit replacement board (part number 71014–994)
change LK20 to position 2–3
B.10 Barcode Scanner

See Table B.1: Machine Configuration, Digit 20 – Barcode Scanner
This option must be enabled if the scale has an attached scanner.
Create barcode formats before creating PLUs.
For more information efer to chapter 3 in Issue 3 of the User Instructions, Part 1.
B.11 Euro currency
B.11.1 Euro label

See Table B.1: Machine Configuration, Digit 19 – Euro Label
This option must be enabled if euro price information is to be printed on labels.
You must also configure label formats with second price fields.
B–12 Addendum B
B.11.2 Setting the rate

Select the function SET RATE in service mode. Enter the appropriate data.
The euro currency symbol is number 35.
The SET RATE function is reserved exclusively for the euro rate and is currency
reference 5. Users can only program rates 1 to 4 in Phase 1.5.3 and should not
program the euro rate in SYSTEM X, CURRENCY.
B.11.3 Programming euro price information

The euro price information can be printed in the following format on a receipt:
each transaction price and the total price printed in euro at the end of the
receipt
total price only printed in euro after the local currency total price
the message DUPLICATE FOR GUIDANCE ONLY can be printed or
suppressed
Euro printing must be enabled for labels.
The printed euro information is programmed in PRINTER SETUP, EURO
PRINTING.
B.11.4 Assigning euro keys

Assign currency 5 to a soft key. This is the euro payment key.
Assign the EURO PRINT key to a soft key. This enables operators to print euro
price information on request when euro printing is disabled on the receipt.
B.11.5 Euro conversion

When the national currency ceases to be legal tender you will need to change
all prices to the euro equivalent.
Enter the official rate in SET RATE. Then select the function EURO
CONVERSION. The message SURE ? Y/N appears. Only press Y if you are
absolutely certain that you have entered the official rate and the euro is now
legal tender as this function converts the entire product file.
***IMPORTANT***
Ensure you are absolutely certain that you wish to convert prices. If you
make a mistake all prices in the entire product file will be wrong.
Addendum B B–13
B.12 Firmware numbers
B.12.1 Main core
DESCRIPTION PHASE 1.3 PHASE 1.3.1 PHASE 1.4 PHASE 1.5 PHASE 1.5.3
General Main Core
CX22/30/A210 etc 32K IC20 407B12CX22 926B12CX30 827B12CX30 ~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~
IC19 407B22CX22 926B22CX30 827B22CX30 ~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~
CX30/A210 etc 64K IC20 408B12CX30 837B12CX30 828B12CX30 ~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~
IC19 408B22CX39 837B22CX30 828B22CX30 ~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~
CX30/A210 etc 128K IC20 409B12CX30 566B12CX30 833B12CX30 ~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~
IC19 409B22CX30 566B22CX30 833B22CX30 ~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~
CX30/A210 etc 576K IC20 410B12CX30 567B12CX30 834B12CX30 194C12CX30 346C12CX30
IC19 410B22CX30 567B22CX30 834B22CX30 194C22CX30 346C22CX30
CX20/A410 32K IC20 403B12CX20 928B12CX20 831B12CX20 ~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~
IC19 403B22CX20 928B22CX20 831B22CX20 ~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~
IC19 404B22CX20 927B22CX20 832B22CX20 ~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~
IC19 405B22CX20 568B22CX20 829B22CX20 ~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~
CX20/A410 576K IC20 406B12CX20 569B12CX20 830B12CX20 202C12CX20 347C12CX20
IC19 406B22CX20 569B22CX20 830B22CX20 202C22CX20 347C22CX20
CX30 Multi : 32K ~~~~~~~~~~ 479B12CX22 856B12CX30 ~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~
Greece 479B22CX22 856B22CX30 ~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~
CX30 etc : 64K ~~~~~~~~~~ 519B12CX30 857B12CX30 ~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~
Greece 519B22CX30 857B22CX30 ~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~
CX30 etc : 576K ~~~~~~~~~~ 520B12CX30 858B12CX30 ~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~
Greece 520B22CX30 858B22CX30 ~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~
CX20 etc : 32K ~~~~~~~~~~ 495B12CX20 855B12CX20 ~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~
Greece 495B22CX20 855B22CX20 ~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~
CX20 etc : 32K ~~~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~~~ 264C12CX20 ~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~
Poland 264C22CX20 ~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~
CX20 etc : 64K ~~~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~~~ 254C12CX20 ~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~
Poland 254C22CX20 ~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~
CX20 etc : 128K ~~~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~~~ 249C12CX20 ~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~
Poland 249C22CX20 ~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~
CX20 etc : 576K ~~~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~~~ 257C12CX20 ~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~
Poland 257C22CX20 ~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~
CX30 etc : 64K ~~~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~~~ 255C12CX30 ~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~
Poland 255C22CX30 ~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~
CX30 etc : 576K ~~~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~~~ 250C12CX30 ~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~
Poland 250C22CX30 ~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~
Communications Controller
Avery 161B11CX20 859B11CX20 239C 11 CX20 522C 11 CX20
Berkel 247B11CX20 860B11CX20 ~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~
Printer
665B11CX20 665B11CX20 665B11CX20
B–14 Addendum B
B.13.2 Firmware numbers – by country
COUNTRY FUNCTION S/W COMPILATION KEYS PHASE_1.3 PHASE_1.4 PHASE_1.5 PHASE_1.5.3

R=RECEIPT PARAMETER
LS=LS AVERY BERKEL
Addendum B
AUSSIE ECR + LS scale A215 CX30ECR/LS 125 KEY 190B 11 A215 677B 11 A215 950B 11 A215 348C 11 A215
AUSSIE ECR + LS scale A415 CX20ECR/LS 69 KEY 191B 11 A415 683B 11 A415 951B 11 A415 349C 11 A415
AUSSIE R only scale A412 CX20R 69 KEY 391B 11 A412 685B 11 A412 952B 11 A412 350C 11 A412
AUSSIE 2 piece ECR + LS scale A225 CX31ECR/LS 80 KEY 187B 11 A225 680B 11 A225 953B 11 A225 351C 11 A225
AUSSIE R only scale A212 CX30R 125 KEY 273B 11 A212 679B 11 A212 954B 11 A212 352C 11 A212
AUSSIE ECR + LS scale (multi–line) A415 CX30ECR/LS 69 KEY 369B 11 A415 682B 11 A415 955B 11 A415 353C 11 A415
AUSSIE 2 piece R only scale A222 CX32R 80 KEY 222B 11 A222 681B 11 A222 956B 11 A222 354C 11 A222
AUSSIE LS only scale A410 CX20LS 69 KEY 241B 11 A410 678B 11 A410 957B 11 A410 355C 11 A410
AUSSIE LS only scale A210 CX30LS 125 KEY 276B 11 A210 686B 11 A210 958B 11 A210 356C 11 A210
AUSSIE 2 piece R only scale A210 CX31LS 80 KEY 188B 11 A220 684B 11 A220 959B 11 A220 357C 11 A220
AUSTRIA ECR + LS scale A415 CX20ECR/LS 69 KEY 198B 11 CX20 687B 11 CX20 960B 11 CX20 358C 11 CX20
AUSTRIA 2 piece R only scale A222 CX32R 80 KEY 277B 11 CX32 691B 11 CX32 962B 11 CX32 360C 11 CX32
AUSTRIA 2 piece ECR only scale A224 CX32ECR 80 KEY 291B 11 CX32 689B 11 CX32 963B 11 CX32 361C 11 CX32
AUSTRIA LS only scale A210 CX30LS 125 KEY 192B 11 CX30 690B 11 CX30 964B 11 CX30 362C 11 CX30
AUSTRIA R only scale A422 CX22R 69 KEY 278B 11 CX22 692B 11 CX22 965B 11 CX22 363C 11 CX22
CANADAE ECR + LS scale A215 CX30ECR/LS 125 KEY 364B 11 CX30 709B 11 CX30 967B 11 CX30 365C 11CX30
CANADAE ECR + LS scale A415 CX20ECR/LS 69 KEY 363B 11 CX20 710B 11 CX20 968B 11 CX20 366C 11 CX20
CANADAE LS only scale A210 CX31LS 80 KEY 388B 11 CX31 708B 11 CX31 969B 11 CX31 367C 11 CX31
CANADAE 2 piece ECR + LS scale A225 CX31ECR/LS 80 KEY 496B 11 CX31 711B 11 CX31 970B 11 CX31 368C 11 CX31
CANADAF ECR + LS scale A415 CX20ECR/LS 69 KEY 375B 11 CX20 714B 11 CX20 971B 11 CX20 369C 11 CX20
CANADAF ECR + LS scale A215 CX30ECR/LS 125 KEY 374B 11 CX30 713B 11 CX30 972B 11 CX30 370C 11 CX30
CANADAF LS only scale A210 CX31LS 80 KEY 387B 11 CX31 712B 11 CX31 973B 11 CX31 371C 11 CX31
CROATIA ECR + LS scale A415 CX20ECR/LS 69 KEY ~~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~~~ 262C 11 A415 372C 11 A415
B–15
R=RECEIPT PARAMETER
B–16
LS=LS AVERY BERKEL
CROATIA LS only scale A210 CX30LS 125 KEY ~~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~~~ 263C 11 A210 373C 11 A210
DENMARK LS only scale A410 CX20LS 69 KEY 217B 11 A410 721B 11 A410 974B 11 A410 374C 11 A410
DENMARK ECR + LS scale A215 CX30ECR/LS 125 KEY 315B 11 A215 718B 11 A215 975B 11 A215 375C 11 A215
DENMARK ECR + LS scale (multi–line) A415 CX30ECR/LS 69 KEY 541B 11 A415 716B 11 A415 976B 11 A415 376C 11 A415
DENMARK ECR only scale A414 CX20ECR 69 KEY 338B 11 A414 723B 11 A414 977B 11 A414 377C 11 A414
DENMARK ECR only scale A214 CX30ECR 125 KEY 337B 11 A214 720B 11 A214 978B 11 A214 378C 11 A214
DENMARK LS only scale (multi–line) A410 CX30LS 69 KEY 355B 11 A410 722B 11 A410 979B 11 A410 379C 11 A410
DENMARK ECR only scale (multi–line) A414 CX30ECR 69 KEY 371B 11 A414 724B 11 A414 980B 11 A414 380C 11 A414
DENMARK LS only scale A210 CX30LS 125 KEY 225B 11 A210 727B 11 A210 981B 11 A210 381C 11 A210
DENMARK R only scale (multi–line) A412 CX30R 69 KEY 370B 11 A212 725B 11 A412 982B 11 A412 382C 11 A412
DENMARK ECR + LS scale A415 CX20ECR/LS 69 KEY 219B 11 A415 719B 11 A415 983B 11 A415 383C 11 A415
DENMARK 2 piece ECR + LS scale A225 CX31ECR/LS 80 KEY 499B 11 A225 715B 11 A225 984B 11 A225 384C 11 A225
DENMARK R only scale A212 CX30R 125 KEY 329B 11 A212 717B 11 A212 985B 11 A212 385C 11 A212
DENMARK R only scale A412 CX20R 69 KEY 224B 11 A412 726B 11 A412 986B 11 A412 386C 11 A412
FINLAND LS only scale A210 CX31LS 80 KEY ~~~~~~~~~~ 924B 11 A220 217C 11 CX31 387C 11 CX31
FINLAND LS only scale A210 CX30LS 125 KEY ~~~~~~~~~~ 915B 11 A210 218C 11 CX30 388C 11 CX30
FINLAND LS only scale A410 CX20LS 69 KEY ~~~~~~~~~~ 265C 11 A410 283C 11 A410 389C 11 A410
FRANCE 2 piece ECR only scale A224 CX32ECR 80 KEY 983A 11 CX32 734B 11 CX32 987B 11 CX32 390C 11 CX32
FRANCE ECR + LS scale (multi–line) A415 CX30ECR/LS 69 KEY 336B 11 CX20 738B 11 CX20 988B 11 CX20 391C 11 CX20
FRANCE ECR + LS scale A415 CX20ECR/LS 69 KEY 155B 11 CX20 731B 11 CX20 989B 11 CX20 392C 11 CX20
FRANCE LS only scale A210 CX30LS 125 KEY 164B 11 CX30 735B 11 CX30 990B 11 CX30 393C 11 CX30
FRANCE ECR only scale A214 CX30ECR 125 KEY 151B 11 CX30 729B 11 CX30 993B 11 CX30 396C 11 CX30
Addendum B
R=RECEIPT PARAMETER
LS=LS AVERY BERKEL
FRANCE ECR only scale (multi–line) A414 CX30ECR 69 KEY 438B 11 CX20 737B 11 CX20 996B 11 CX20 399C 11 CX20
Addendum B
FRANCE ECR + LS scale A215 CX31ECR/LS 69 KEY ~~~~~~~~~~ 936B 11 CX23 999B 11 CX23 402C 11 CX23
FRANCE LS only scale (multi–line) A410 CX30LS 69 KEY ~~~~~~~~~~ 270C 11 CX20 272C 11 CX20 403C 11 CX20
GERMANY 2 piece ECR + LS scale A225 CX31ECR/LS 80 KEY 350B 11 CX31 740B 11 CX31 101C 11 CX31 404C 11 CX31
GERMANY 2 piece ECR only scale A224 CX32ECR 80 KEY 348B 11 CX32 741B 11 CX32 102C 11 CX32 405C 11 CX32
GERMANY LS only scale A210 CX30LS 125 KEY 345B 11 CX30 739B 11 CX30 103C 11 CX30 406C 11 CX30
GERMANY ECR + LS scale A215 CX30ECR/LS 125 KEY 346B 11 CX30 744B 11 CX30 104C 11 CX30 407C 11 CX30
GERMANY ECR + LS scale A415 CX20ECR/LS 69 KEY 342B 11 CX20 743B 11 CX20 105C 11 CX20 408C 11 CX20
GERMANY ECR only scale A424 CX22ECR 69 KEY 352B 11 CX22 742B 11 CX22 106C 11 CX22 409C 11 CX22
GERMANY LS only scale (multi–line) A410 CX30LS 69 KEY ~~~~~~~~~~ 286C 11 CX20 287C 11 CX20 410C 11 CX20
GREECE LS only scale A410 CX20LS 69 KEY ~~~~~~~~~~ 851B 11 CX20 107C 11 CX20 411C 11 CX20
GREECE LS only scale A210 CX30LS 125 KEY ~~~~~~~~~~ 852B 11 CX30 109C 11 CX30 412C 11 CX30
GREECE LS only scale (multi–line) A410 CX30LS 69 KEY ~~~~~~~~~~ 850B 11 CX30 110C 11 CX30 413C 11 CX30
GREECE 2 piece ECR + LS scale A225 CX31ECR/LS 80 KEY ~~~~~~~~~~ 853B 11 CX31 111C 11 CX31 414C 11 CX31
GREECE 2 piece ECR + LS scale A215 CX30ECR/LS 125 KEY ~~~~~~~~~~ 854B 11 CX30 112C 11 CX30 415C 11 CX30
HOLLAND 2 piece R only scale A222 CX32R 80 KEY 988A 11 CX32 745B 11 CX32 113C 11 CX32 416C 11 CX32
HOLLAND ECR only scale A414 CX20ECR 69 KEY 996A 11 CX20 753B 11 CX20 114C 11 CX20 417C 11 CX20
HOLLAND R only scale A212 CX30R 125 KEY 958A 11 CX30 752B 11 CX30 115C 11 CX30 418C 11 CX30
HOLLAND ECR + LS scale A215 CX30ECR/LS 125 KEY 956A 11 CX30 748B 11 CX30 116C 11 CX30 419C 11 CX30
HOLLAND R only scale A412 CX20R 69 KEY 965A 11 CX20 751B 11 CX20 117C 11 CX20 420C 11 CX20
HOLLAND ECR only scale A214 CX30ECR 125 KEY 999A 11 CX30 749B 11 CX30 118C 11 CX30 421C 11 CX30
HOLLAND 2 piece ECR only scale A224 CX32ECR 80 KEY 982A 11 CX32 746B 11 CX32 119C 11 CX32 422C 11 CX32
HOLLAND ECR + LS scale A415 CX20ECR/LS 69 KEY 964A 11 CX20 747B 11 CX20 120C 11 CX20 423C 11 CX20
HOLLAND LS only scale A210 CX30LS 125 KEY 126B 11 CX30 754B 11 CX30 121C 11 CX30 424C 11 CX30
B–17
R=RECEIPT PARAMETER
B–18
LS=LS AVERY BERKEL
HOLLAND 2 piece ECR + LS scale A225 CX31ECR/LS 80 KEY 149B 11 CX31 750B 11 CX31 122C 11 CX31 425C 11 CX31
HOLLAND ECR + LS scale (multi–line) A415 CX30ECR/LS 69 KEY ~~~~~~~~~~ 891B 11 CX30 123C 11 CX30 426C 11 CX30
HOLLAND LS only scale (multi–line) A410 CX30LS 69 KEY ~~~~~~~~~~ 948B 11 CX20 219C 11 CX30 427C 11 CX30
HOLLAND R only scale (multi–line) A412 CX30R 69 KEY ~~~~~~~~~~ 949B 11 CX20 220C 11 CX30 428C 11 CX30
HOLLAND ECR only scale (multi–line) A414 CX30ECR 69 KEY ~~~~~~~~~~ 244C 11 CX20 245C 11 CX20 429C 11 CX20
ITALY R only scale A412 CX20R 69 KEY 332B 11 CX20 755B 11 CX20 124C 11 CX20 430C 11 CX20
ITALY ECR + LS scale A215 CX30ECR/LS 125 KEY 322B 11 CX30 757B 11 CX30 125C 11 CX30 431C 11 CX30
ITALY 2 piece R only scale A222 CX32R 80 KEY 325B 11 CX32 758B 11 CX32 126C 11 CX32 432C 11 CX32
ITALY 2 piece ECR + LS scale A225 CX31ECR/LS 80 KEY 324B 11 CX32 759B 11 CX32 127C 11 CX32 433C 11 CX32
ITALY R only scale A422 CX22R 69 KEY 304B 11 CX22 760B 11 CX22 128C 11 CX22 434C 11 CX22
ITALY LS only scale A210 CX30LS 125 KEY 305B 11 CX30 761B 11 CX30 129C 11 CX30 435C 11 CX30
ITALY LS only scale A410 CX20LS 69 KEY 331B 11 CX20 762B 11 CX20 130C 11 CX20 436C 11 CX20
ITALY ECR + LS scale (multi–line) A415 CX30ECR/LS 69 KEY ~~~~~~~~~~ 929B 11 CX20 133C 11 CX20 439C 11 CX20
MEXICO R only scale A412 CX20R 69 KEY 266B 11 CX20 771B 11 CX20 134C 11 CX20 440C 11 CX20
MEXICO R only scale A212 CX30R 125 KEY 267B 11 CX30 769B 11 CX30 135C 11 CX30 441C 11 CX30
MEXICO ECR + LS scale (multi–line) A415 CX30ECR/LS 69 KEY 326B 11 CX20 765B 11 CX20 136C 11 CX20 442C 11 CX20
MEXICO ECR + LS scale A225 CX31ECR/LS 80 KEY 434B 11 CX31 764B 11 CX31 137C 11 CX31 443C 11 CX31
MEXICO LS only scale A210 CX31LS 80 KEY 432B 11 CX31 768B 11 CX31 138C 11 CX31 444C 11 CX31
MEXICO R only scale (multi–line) A412 CX30R 69 KEY 327B 11 CX20 770B 11 CX20 139C 11 CX20 445C 11 CX20
NORWAY ECR + LS scale A215 CX30ECR/LS 125 KEY 373B 11 A215 776B 11 A215 142C 11 A215 448C 11 A215
NORWAY LS only scale A410 CX20LS 69 KEY 483B 11 A410 775B 11 A410 143C 11 A410 449C 11 A410
NORWAY 2 piece ECR + LS scale A225 CX31ECR/LS 80 KEY 498B 11 A225 773B 11 A225 144C 11 A225 450C 11 A225
Addendum B
R=RECEIPT PARAMETER
LS=LS AVERY BERKEL
NORWAY LS only scale A210 CX31LS 80 KEY 497B 11 A220 772B 11 A220 145C 11 A220 451C 11 A220
NORWAY LS only scale (multi–line) A410 CX30LS 69 KEY 372B 11 A410 774B 11 A410 146C 11 A410 452C 11 A410
Addendum B
NORWAY LS only scale A210 CX30LS 125 KEY ~~~~~~~~~ 898B 11 A210 233C 11 A210 453C 11 A210
NORWAY 2 piece R only scale A212 CX32R 80 KEY ~~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~~ 308C 11 A222 454C 11 A222
NZ ECR + LS scale (multi–line) A415 CX30ECR/LS 69 KEY 311B 11 A415 779B 11 A415 147C 11 A415 455C 11 A415
NZ ECR + LS scale A415 CX20ECR/LS 69 KEY 309B 11 A415 778B 11 A415 148C 11 A415 456C 11 A415
NZ ECR + LS scale A215 CX30ECR/LS 125 KEY 295B 11 A215 777B 11 A215 149C 11 A215 457C 11 A215
POLAND LS only scale A210 CX31LS 80 KEY ~~~~~~~~~ 247C 11 CX31 276C 11 CX31 458C 11 CX31
POLAND ECR + LS scale A415 CX20ECR/LS 69 KEY ~~~~~~~~~ 248C 11 CX20 277C 11 CX20 459C 11 CX20
POLAND 2 piece ECR + LS scale A225 CX31ECR/LS 80 KEY ~~~~~~~~~ 266C 11 CX31 275C 11 CX31 460C 11 CX31
POLAND LS only scale A410 CX20LS 69 KEY ~~~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~~~ 304C 11 CX20 461C 11 CX20
PORTUGAL ECR only scale A424 CX22ECR 69 KEY 424B 11 CX22 780B 11 CX22 150C 11 CX22 462C 11 CX22
PORTUGAL ECR + LS scale A415 CX20ECR/LS 69 KEY 485B 11 CX20 781B 11 CX20 151C 11 CX20 463C 11 CX20
PORTUGAL ECR + LS scale A215 CX30ECR/LS 125 KEY 484B 11 CX30 782B 11 CX30 152C 11 CX30 464C 11 CX30
PORTUGAL R only scale A422 CX22R 69 KEY 423B 11 CX22 783B 11 CX22 153C 11 CX22 465C 11 CX22
PORTUGAL 2 piece ECR + LS scale A225 CX31ECR/LS 80 KEY 482B 11 CX31 784B 11 CX31 154C 11 CX31 466C 11 CX31
PORTUGAL 2 piece ECR only scale A224 CX32ECR 80 KEY 481B 11 CX32 785B 11 CX32 155C 11 CX32 467C 11 CX32
PORTUGAL ECR + LS scale (multi–line) A415 CX30ECR/LS 69 KEY 480B 11 CX20 786B 11 CX20 156C 11 CX20 468C 11 CX20
SAFRICA ECR + LS scale A215 CX30ECR/LS 125 KEY 237B 11 A215 789B 11 A215 157C 11 A215 469C 11 A215
SAFRICA ECR + LS scale (multi–line) A415 CX30ECR/LS 69 KEY 313B 11 A415 788B 11 A415 158C 11 A415 470C 11 A415
SAFRICA 2 piece ECR + LS scale A225 CX31ECR/LS 80 KEY 233B 11 A225 787B 11 A225 159C 11 A225 471C 11 A225
SAFRICA ECR + LS scale A415 CX20ECR/LS 69 KEY 240B 11 A415 790B 11 A415 160C 11 A415 472C 11 A415
SPAIN 2 piece ECR only scale A224 CX32ECR 80 KEY 517B 11 CX32 795B 11 CX32 161C 11 CX32 473C 11 CX32
SPAIN 2 piece ECR + LS scale A225 CX31ECR/LS 80 KEY 514B 11 CX31 793B 11 CX31 162C 11 CX31 474C 11 CX31
SPAIN ECR only scale A214 CX30ECR 125 KEY 515B 11 CX30 796B 11 CX30 163C 11 CX30 475C 11 CX30
SPAIN LS only scale A410 CX20LS 69 KEY 560B 11 CX20 791B 11 CX20 164C 11 CX20 476C 11 CX20
B–19
R=RECEIPT PARAMETER
B–20
LS=LS AVERY BERKEL
SPAIN 2 piece R only scale A210 CX31LS 80 KEY 518B 11 CX31 792B 11 CX31 165C 11 CX31 477C 11 CX31
SPAIN ECR + LS scale A215 CX30ECR/LS 125 KEY 516B 11 CX30 794B 11 CX30 166C 11 CX30 478C 11 CX30
SPAIN ECR + LS scale A415 CX20ECR/LS 69 KEY ~~~~~~~~~ 871B 11 CX20 167C 11 CX20 479C 11 CX20
SPAIN ECR + LS scale (multi–line) A415 CX30ECR/LS 69 KEY ~~~~~~~~~ 902B 11 CX20 278C 11 CX20 480C 11 CX20
SPAIN R only scale (multi–line) A412 CX30R 69 KEY ~~~~~~~~~ 903B 11 CX20 279C 11 CX20 481C 11 CX20
SPAIN ECR + LS scale A215 CX31ECR/LS 69 KEY ~~~~~~~~~ 930B 11 CX23 168C 11 CX23 482C 11 CX23
SPAIN ECR only scale A424 CX22ECR 69 KEY ~~~~~~~~~ 944B 11 CX22 221C 11 CX22 483C 11 CX22
SWEDEN ECR + LS scale A215 CX30ECR/LS 125 KEY ~~~~~~~~~ 223C 11 A215 228C 11 A215 484C 11 A215
SWEDEN LS only scale A410 CX20LS 69 KEY ~~~~~~~~~ 224C 11 A410 229C 11 A410 485C 11 A410
SWEDEN 2 piece ECR + LS scale A225 CX31ECR/LS 80 KEY ~~~~~~~~~ 225C 11 A225 230C 11 A225 486C 11 A225
SWEDEN LS only scale (multi–line) A410 CX30LS 69 KEY ~~~~~~~~~ 227C 11 A410 232C 11 A410 488C 11 A410
SWISSG LS only scale A210 CX30LS 125 KEY 488B 11 CX30 806B 11 CX30 169C 11 CX30 490C 11 CX30
SWISSG ECR + LS scale A215 CX30ECR/LS 125 KEY 489B 11 CX30 805B 11 CX30 170C 11 CX30 491C 11 CX30
SWISSG ECR only scale A424 CX22ECR 69 KEY 487B 11 CX22 804B 11 CX22 171C 11 CX22 492C 11 CX22
SWISSG 2 piece ECR only scale A224 CX32ECR 80 KEY 491B 11 CX32 807B 11 CX32 172C 11 CX32 493C 11 CX32
SWISSG 2 piece ECR + LS scale A225 CX31ECR/LS 80 KEY 490B 11 CX31 803B 11 CX31 173C 11 CX31 494C 11 CX31
SWISSG LS only scale A410 CX20LS 69 KEY ~~~~~~~~~ 939B 11 CX20 222C 11 CX20 495C 11 CX20
SWISSG LS only scale (multi–line) A410 CX30LS 69 KEY ~~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~~ 326C 11 CX20 496C 11 CX20
UK R only scale A212 CX30R 125 KEY 208B 11 A212 813B 11 A212 174C 11 A212 497C 11 A212
UK ECR only scale A214 CX30ECR 125 KEY 209B 11 A214 812B 11 A214 175C 11 A214 498C 11 A214
UK ECR + LS scale (multi–line) A415 CX30ECR/LS 69 KEY 368B 11 A415 820B 11 A415 176C 11 A415 499C 11 A415
UK 2 piece ECR + LS scale A225 CX31ECR/LS 80 KEY 226B 11 A225 808B 11 A225 177C 11 A225 500C 11 A225
UK R only scale (multi–line) A412 CX30R 69 KEY 366B 11 A412 818B 11 A412 178C 11 A412 501C 11 A412
UK LS only scale A410 CX20LS 69 KEY 211B 11 A410 809B 11 A410 179C 11 A410 502C 11 A410
Addendum B
R=RECEIPT PARAMETER
LS=LS AVERY BERKEL
UK LS only scale (multi–line) A410 CX30LS 69 KEY 365B 11 A410 817B 11 A410 180C 11 A410 503C 11 A410
Addendum B
UK ECR only scale (multi–line) A414 CX30ECR 69 KEY 367B 11 A414 821B 11 A414 182C 11 A414 505C 11 A414
UK ECR only scale A414 CX20ECR 69 KEY 206B 11 A414 819B 11 A414 183C 11 A414 506C 11 A414
UK ECR + LS scale A215 CX30ECR/LS 125 KEY 180B 11 A215 810B 11 A215 185C 11 A215 507C 11 A215
UK ECR + LS scale A415 CX20ECR/LS 69 KEY 179B 11 A415 811B 11 A415 186C 11 A415 508C 11 A415
UK 2 piece ECR only scale A224 CX32ECR 80 KEY 235B 11 A224 815B 11 A224 188C 11 A224 510C 11 A224
UK R only scale A422 CX22R 69 KEY ~~~~~~~~~ 880B 11 A422 280C 11 A422 511C 11 A422
UK ECR only scale A424 CX22ECR 69 KEY ~~~~~~~~~ 881B 11 A424 189C 11 A424 512C 11 A424
UK ECR + LS scale A425 CX22ECR/LS 69 KEY ~~~~~~~~~ 258C 11 CX23 281C 11 A425 513C 11 A425
USA LS only scale A210 CX30LS 125 KEY 136B 11 CX30 824B 11 CX30 190C 11 CX30 514C 11 CX30
USA 2 piece ECR + LS scale A225 CX31ECR/LS 80 KEY 379B 11 CX31 825B 11 CX31 191C 11 CX31 515C 11 CX31
USA ECR + LS scale A215 CX30ECR/LS 125 KEY 113B 11 CX30 826B 11 CX30 192C 11 CX30 516C 11 CX30
USA ECR + LS scale A415 CX20ECR/LS 69 KEY 112B 11 CX20 823B 11 CX20 193C 11 CX20 517C 11 CX20
USA LS only scale A220 CX31LS 80 KEY ~~~~~~~~~~~ 293C 11 CX31 271C 11 CX31 518C 11 CX31
USA ECR + LS scale (multi–line) A415 CX30ECR/LS 69 KEY ~~~~~~~~~~~ 269C 11 CX20 282C 11 CX20 519C 11 CX20
B–21
B–22 Addendum B
Avery Berkel Weighing

A Company
Addendum C
Devlin Column TK
Keyboard
This Addendum is for the following Service Manuals:
A210, A410 and A510 Series of Retail Scales, Part Number 76101–605.
CX20, CX30 and CX34 Series of Retail Scales, Part Number 76101–452.
76102–587 Issue 1/21.04.98

PL – Parts List, Devlin Keyboard
Devlin column TK keyboard: short foot: UK: CXTK0P00000000

C
Description Part Number

Devlin keyboard: standard: 70785–914
Extended display column (TK keyboard) 61656–153
Nylon hole plug 18137–551
Column gromet: 18136–238
HEYCO ‘shorty plug’: 432 1661: 18137–586
Column end plate: 65331–532
Column casting 61656–143
Support plate: 65356–502
M6 x 12 Skt Hd cap screw: brzn: 13811–138
M6 x 20 Rec pan Hd screw MS brzn: 13755–147
M6 x 30: Rec: pan Hd: SS screw: NATL: 13765–049
Foot 61664–151
12.7 mm dia x 3.6 mm rubber bumper 18166–001
M8 hexagon full nut brzn 13821–107
Column casting plate: 66211–514
M4 x 8 rec.pan hd. (SEMS shakeproof) 13758–530
M6 x 20 hex skt button hd scr.SEMS 13818–406
M6 x 40 rec pan hd scr MS brzn: 13755–151
M6 int shakeproof washer brzn 15713–120
M4 x 10 rec pan hd MS scr brzn: 13755–115
4 x 40 unc x ” pozi rec pan hd 23758–856
Printer door assembly 70228–250
Mini camlock: 18162–107
Tool for keytop removal: 18167–081
Serial number plate: 67816–982
Kit label: 67816–980
Packing kit 77011–846
Addendum C C–3
Devlin column TK keyboard: long foot: Export: CXTK0R00000000

Devlin keyboard: standard: 70785–914
Extended display column (TK keyboard) 61656–153
Nylon hole plug 18137–551
Column gromet: 18136–238
Column end plate: 65331–532
Column casting 61656–143
Fifth foot/Support plate: 65352–519
M6 x 12 Skt Hd cap screw: brzn: 13811–138
M6 x 20 Rec pan Hd screw MS brzn: 13755–147
M6 x 30: Rec: pan Hd: SS screw: NATL: 13765–049
M8 x 16 hex Hd screw brzn: 13712–121
Foot 61664–151
12.7 mm dia x 3.6 mm rubber bumper 18166–001
M8 hexagon full nut brzn 13821–107
Column casting plate 66211–513
M4 x 8 rec.pan hd. (SEMS shakeproof) 13758–530
M6 x 20 hex skt button hd scr.SEMS 13818–406
M6 x 40 rec pan hd scr MS brzn: 13755–151
M6 int shakeproof washer brzn 15713–120
M4 x 10 rec pan hd MS scr brzn: 13755–115
4 x 40 unc x ” pozi rec pan hd 23758–856
Printer door assembly 70228–250
Mini camlock: 18162–107
Tool for keytop removal: 18167–081
Serial number plate: 67816–982
Kit label: 67816–979
Packing kit 77011–846
C–4 Addendum C
Devlin column TK keyboard: Spares

Small TK membrane 20–MEMB–DP114016
Large TK membrane 20–MEMB–DP114015
Switch (projected plunger) Devlin 10–B3F–4055
Magnetic membrane Devlin standard 20–MEMB–DP114013
Vertical double keytop KFM Devlin 10–AB–2X1–90000
Controller board assy KFM Devlin 25–KFM–104010SA2
Switch board assy (without keytops) 25–KFM–104010SA1
Printed produce lable membrane 20–MEMB–DP114000
Front cover membrane (see B06) 20–MEMB–DP114016
Small keytop (single) 10–AB–1X1–90000
Large (Quad) keytop 10–AB–2X2–90000
Addendum C C–5
C–6 Addendum C
A Company

CX20 30 34

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

CX20 30 34

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

CX20, CX30 AND CX34 SERIES

76101–452 Issue 2/02.03.95

About This Manual

CX20/CX30/CX34 Service Manual i

3 Disassembly and Assembly 3–1

ii CX20/CX30/CX34 Service Manual

7 Calibration and Adjustments 7–1

CX20/CX30/CX34 Service Manual iii

10 Error Messages 10–1

iv CX20/CX30/CX34 Service Manual

15.4 Keyboard Controller PCB 15–4

CX20/CX30/CX34 Service Manual v

19.3.4 Fitting the printer (CX34) 19–6

vi CX20/CX30/CX34 Service Manual

24 Wiring Interconnections 24–1

Figure 1.1 General View (Integral Displays) 1–4

CX20/CX30/CX34 Service Manual vii

Figure 12.2 Display Brackets 12–4

viii CX20/CX30/CX34 Service Manual

Avery Berkel Technical Support

Tel: 0922 434343

CX20/CX30/CX34 Service Manual ix

AMENDMENT DATE AMENDMENT DETAILS

1 1992 Draft 1: originated by sub–contractors (Cheltenham

2 Sep. 1992 Draft 2: conversion to Interleaf format and general

3 Feb. 1994 Issue 1: general update to incorporate Phase 1.3

4 Oct. 1994 Figure 20.4 Comms PCB – Switch Settings on Page

5 Mar. 1995 Issue 2: amendments as per A/A 31167.

CX20/CX30/CX34 Service Manual xi

% Per cent LK# Circuit code: link number #

g Gram SK# Circuit code: socket number #

CX20/CX30/CX34 Service Manual xiii

CX20/CX30/CX34 Service Manual xv

Static Sensitive Devices

making sure that the workbench is covered by a static–discharge mat

avoiding wearing nylon clothes

discharging any anti–static electricity which may be on your person by contacting an

xvi CX20/CX30/CX34 Service Manual

C918 External Comms Controller Unit

Handbook Part Title of Handbook Machine Specific/Common

Fitting Instuctions – Column Mounted TK Keyboard

CX20/CX30/CX34 Service Manual xvii

THE CX20, CX30 AND CX34 SERIES OF SCALES

xviii CX20/CX30/CX34 Service Manual

1–1 CX20/CX30/CX34 Service Manual

CX20/CX30/CX34 Service Manual 1–3

Figure 1.1 General View (Integral Displays)

On/Off switch (below edge) Keyswitch

Figure 1.2 General View (Column–mounted Displays)

Weighplate Blank screen

Adjustable foot (4) DCU/external

1–4 CX20/CX30/CX34 Service Manual

Figure 1.3 General View (CX20 W)

Label taken sensor

On/Off switch (below edge) Keyswitch

Figure 1.4 General View (CX30)

Weighplate Ticket mouth

Adjustable foot (4) DCU/external

On/Off switch (below edge)

CX20/CX30/CX34 Service Manual 1–5

Figure 1.5 General View (CX30 TK – Column–mounted Version)

Adjustable foot (6)

Figure 1.6 General View (CX34)